Home

Accton Technology ES4548C Switch User Manual

1. network ELELE ILLL ee a et a Port based VLAN 2 1 g 3 4 7 8 iLL LLL Er gewa EIRA E A SEL A A R S E E LE BL E E T T T E 10 11 us 18 12 w A may a Forwarding Tagged Untagged Frames If you want to create a small port based VLAN for devices attached directly to a single switch you can assign ports to the same untagged VLAN However to participate in a VLAN group that crosses several switches you should create a VLAN for that group and enable tagging on all ports Ports can be assigned to multiple tagged or untagged VLANs Each port on the switch is therefore capable of passing tagged or untagged frames When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that contains any VLAN aware devices the switch should include VLAN tags When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that does not contain any VLAN aware devices including the destination host the switch must first strip off the VLAN tag before forwarding the frame When the switch receives a tagged frame it will pass this frame onto the VLAN s indicated by the frame tag However when this switch receives an untagged frame from a VLAN unaware device it first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the i
2. Secondary VLAN private ports Downlink Ports Enabling Private VLANs Use the Private VLAN Status page to enable disable the Private VLAN function Default Disabled Web Click VLAN Private VLAN Status Select Enable or Disable from the scroll down box and click Apply Private VLAN Status Private VLAN Status Enabled Figure 3 68 Private VLAN Status CLI This example enables private VLANs Console config pvlan 4 182 Console config 3 121 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring Uplink and Downlink Ports Use the Private VLAN Link Status page to set ports as downlink or uplink ports Ports designated as downlink ports can not communicate with any other ports on the switch except for the uplink ports Uplink ports can communicate with any other ports on the switch and with any designated downlink ports Web Click VLAN Private VLAN Link Status Mark the ports that will serve as uplinks and downlinks for the private VLAN then click Apply Private VLAN Link Status Port Uplink Downlink None Trunk Member 1 O G 2 O e 3 G C 4 e 5 C e 6 E Figure 3 69 Private VLAN Link Status CLI This configures ports 3 and 4 as uplinks and ports 5 and 6 as downlinks Console config pvlan uplink ethernet 1 3 4 downlink ethernet 1 5 6 4 182 Console config Configuring Protocol Bas
3. Table 4 3 Keystroke Commands Keystroke Function Ctrl A Shifts cursor to start of command line Ctrl B Shifts cursor to the left one character Ctrl C Terminates the current task and displays the command prompt Ctrl E Shifts cursor to end of command line Ctrl F Shifts cursor to the right one character Ctrl K Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the line Ctrl L Repeats current command line on a new line Ctrl N Enters the next command line in the history buffer Ctrl P Enters the last command Ctrl R Repeats current command line on a new line Ctrl U Deletes from the cursor to the beginning of the line Ctrl W Deletes the last word typed Esc B Moves the cursor back one word Esc D Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word Esc F Moves the cursor forward one word Delete key or backspace key Erases a mistake when entering a command 4 Command Line Interface Command Groups The system commands can be broken down into the functional groups shown below Table 4 4 Command Group Index Command Group Description Page Line Sets communication parameters for the serial port and Telnet 4 11 including baud rate and console time out General Basic commands for entering privileged access mode restarting the 4 20 system or quitting the CLI System Management Controls system logs system passwords user name browser 4 24 management options and a variety of
4. IGMP Status I Enable Act as IGMP Querier K Enable IGMP Query Count 2 10 le IGMP Query Interval 60 125 125 seconds IGMP Report Delay 5 25 fio seconds IGMP Query Timeout 300 500 300 seconds IGMP Version 1 2 le Figure 3 83 IGMP Configuration CLI This example modifies the settings for multicast filtering and then displays the current status Console config ip igmp Console config ip igmp Console config ip igmp Console config ip igmp Console config ip igmp Console config ip igmp Console config ip igmp Console config exit Console show ip igmp sno Service status Querier status Query count Query interval Query max response time Router port expire time IGMP snooping version Console snooping snooping querier snooping query count 10 snooping query interval 100 snooping query max response time 20 snooping router port expire time 300 snooping version 2 oping Enabled Enabled 10 100 sec 20 sec 300 sec Version 2 4 205 4 208 4 208 4 209 4 210 4 210 4 206 4 206 3 141 3 Configuring the Switch Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router Multicast routers that are attached to ports on the switch use information obtained from IGMP along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet These routers may be dynamically discovered by the switch or stati
5. Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport priority default 5 4 193 4 Command Line Interface queue bandwidth This command assigns weighted round robin WRR weights to the eight class of service CoS priority queues Use the no form to restore the default weights Syntax queue bandwidth weight1 weight4 no queue bandwidth weight1 weight4 The ratio of weights for queues 0 3 determines the weights used by the WRR scheduler Range 1 15 Default Setting Weights 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 are assigned to queues 0 7 respectively Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage WRR controls bandwidth sharing at the egress port by defining scheduling weights Example This example shows how to assign WRR weights to each of the priority queues Console config interface ethernet 1 8 Console config if queue bandwidth 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 Console config if Related Commands show queue bandwidth 4 196 queue cos map This command assigns class of service CoS values to the priority queues i e hardware output queues 0 7 Use the no form set the CoS map to the default values Syntax queue cos map queue_id cos1 cosn no queue cos map queue_id The ID of the priority queue Ranges are 0 to 7 where 7 is the highest priority queue cos1 cosn The CoS values that are mapped to the queue ID It is a spac
6. username Name of an SSH user Range 1 8 characters e dsa DSA public key type rsa RSA public key type Default Setting Deletes both the DSA and RSA key Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 38 System Management Commands 4 Example Console delete public key admin dsa Console ip ssh crypto host key generate Use this command to generate the host key pair i e public and private Syntax ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa rsa dsa DSA Version 2 key type rsa RSA Version 1 key type Default Setting Generates both the DSA and RSA key pairs Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command stores the host key pair in memory i e RAM Use the ip ssh save host key command to save the host key pair to flash memory Some SSH client programs automatically add the public key to the known hosts file as part of the configuration process Otherwise you must manually create a known hosts file and place the host public key in it The SSH server uses this host key to negotiate a session key and encryption method with the client trying to connect to it Example Console ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa Console Related Commands ip ssh crypto zeroize 4 39 ip ssh save host key 4 40 ip ssh crypto zeroize Use this command to clear the host key from memory i e RAM Syntax ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa rsa e dsa DSA key type
7. CLI only 3 46 User Authentication 3 Web Select Security 802 1x Configuration Enable dot1x globally for the switch modify any of the parameters required and then click Apply 802 1X Configuration 802 1x Re authentication Ta Enable 802 1X Max Request Count 1 10 l2 Timeout For Quiet Period 1 65535 60 seconds Timeout For Re authentication Period 1 65535 3600 seconds Timeout For Tx Period 1 65535 30 seconds Figure 3 27 802 1X Configuration CLI This enables re authentication and sets all of the global parameters for 802 1x Console config dot1lx re authentication 4 81 Console config dot1ix max req 5 4 79 Console config dot1x timeout quiet period 40 4 82 Console config dot1lx timeout re authperiod 5 4 82 Console config dot1lx timeout tx period 40 4 83 Console config authentication dotlx default radius 4 79 Console config Configuring Port Authorization Mode When dot1x is enabled you need to specify the dot1x authentication mode configured for each port Command Attributes e Status Indicates if authentication is enabled or disabled on the port Operation Mode Allows single or multiple hosts clients to connect to an 802 1X authorized port Range Single Host Multi Host Default Single Host Max Count The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port when the Multi Host operation mode is selected Range 1 20 Defaul
8. Function Parameter Default Console Port Baud Rate auto Connection Data bits 8 Stop bits 1 Parity none Local Console Timeout 0 disabled Authentication Privileged Exec Level Username admin Password admin Normal Exec Level Username guest Password guest Enable Privileged Exec from Normal Exec Level Password super RADIUS Authentication Disabled TACACS Authentication Disabled 802 1x Port Authentication Disabled HTTPS Enabled SSH Disabled Port Security Disabled IP Filtering Disabled Web Management HTTP Server Enabled HTTP Port Number 80 HTTP Secure Server Enabled HTTP Secure Port Number 443 SNMP Community Strings public read only private read write Traps Authentication traps enabled Link up down events enabled 4 Introduction Table 1 2 System Defaults Function Parameter Default Port Configuration Admin Status Enabled Auto negotiation Enabled Flow Control Disabled Port Capability 1000BASE T 10 Mbps half duplex 10 Mbps full duplex 100 Mbps half duplex 100 Mbps full duplex 1000 Mbps full duplex Full duplex flow control disabled Symmetric flow control disabled odule Port Capability 1000BASE SX LX LH 1000 Mbps full duplex Full duplex flow control disabled Symmetric flow control disabled Rate Limiting nput and output limits Disabled Port Trunking St
9. any Any address will be matched host The address must be for a single node e source bitmask Source address of rule must match this bitmask e destination bitmask Destination address of rule must match this bitmask e vid Check the VLAN ID field e vid bitmask VLAN ID of rule must match this bitmask e ethertype Check the Ethernet type field e ethertype bitmask Ethernet type of rule must match this bitmask Default Setting None Command Mode MAC Mask Command Usage Up to seven masks can be assigned to an ingress or egress ACL e Packets crossing a port are checked against all the rules in the ACL until a match is found The order in which these packets are checked is determined by the mask and not the order in which the ACL rules were entered e First create the required ACLs and inbound or outbound masks before mapping an ACL to an interface 4 105 4 Command Line Interface Example This example shows how to create an Ingress MAC ACL and bind it to a port You can then see that the order of the rules have been changed by the mask Console config access list mac M4 Console config mac acl permit any any Console config mac acl deny tagged eth2 00 11 11 11 11 11 ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid 3 Console config mac acl end Console show access list MAC access list M4 permit any any deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 Console config access list mac ma
10. port Port number e rx Mirror received packets e tx Mirror transmitted packets both Mirror both received and transmitted packets Default Setting No mirror session is defined When enabled the default mirroring is for both received and transmitted packets Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet destination port 4 136 Mirror Port Commands 4 Command Usage You can mirror traffic from any source port to a destination port for real time analysis You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the destination port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive manner The destination port is set by specifying an Ethernet interface The mirror port and monitor port speeds should match otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port e You can create multiple mirror sessions but all sessions must share the same destination port However you should avoid sending too much traffic to the destination port from multiple source ports Example The following example configures the switch to mirror all packets from port 6 to 11 Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 6 both Console config if show port monitor This command displays mirror information Syntax show port monitor interface interface ethernet unit port source port e unit Switch unit 1 port Port number Def
11. sfp forced Always uses the SFP port even if module not installed sfp preferred auto Uses SFP port if both combination types are functioning and the SFP port has a valid link Default Setting sfp preferred auto Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Example This forces the switch to use the built in RJ 45 port for the combination port 48 Console config interface ethernet 1 48 Console config if combo forced mode copper forced Console config if shutdown This command disables an interface To restart a disabled interface use the no form Syntax no shutdown 4 130 Interface Commands 4 Default Setting All interfaces are enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command allows you to disable a port due to abnormal behavior e g excessive collisions and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved You may also want to disable a port for security reasons Example The following example disables port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if shutdown Console config if switchport broadcast packet rate This command configures broadcast storm control Use the no form to disable broadcast storm control Syntax switchport broadcast packet rate rate no switchport broadcast rate Threshold level as a rate i e packets per second Range 500 262143 Default Setting
12. 4 170 Example Spanning Tree Commands Console show spanning tree Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode Spanning tree enable disable nstance Vlans configuration Priority Bridge Hello Time Bridge Max Age sec Root Hello Time sec Root Max Age sec Root Forward Delay Max hops Remaining hops Designated Root Current root port Current root cost Last topology changes Transmission limit Path Cost Method Eth 1 1 information Admin status Role State External path cost Internal path cost Priority Designated cost Designated port Designated root Designated bridge Fast forwarding Forward transitions Admin edge port Oper edge port Admin Link type Oper Link type Spanning Tree Status Console sec Bridge Forward Delay sec sec Number of topology changes MSTP enable 0 71 4094 232768 22 20 215 22 20 115 20 20 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 200000 time sec root forwarding 100000 100000 128 200000 128 24 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 32768 0 0030F1552000 disable 1 enable disable auto point to point enable 4 171 4 Command Line Interface show spanning tree mst configuration This command shows the configuration of the multiple spanning tree Syntax show spanning tree mst configuration Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show spanning tree mst configuration Mstp Configuration Information Con
13. Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority This command sets the IP port priority for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to map HTTP traffic to CoS value 0 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip port 80 cos 0 Console config if map ip precedence Global Configuration This command enables IP precedence mapping i e IP Type of Service Use the no form to disable IP precedence mapping Syntax no map ip precedence Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration 4 198 Priority Commands 4 Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other type Example The following example shows how to enable IP precedence mapping globally Console config map ip precedence Console config map ip precedence Interface Configuration This command sets IP precedence priority i e IP Type of Service priority Use the no form to restore the default table Syntax map ip precedence p precedence value cos cos value no map ip precedence precedence value 3 bit
14. Displays a list of current mirror sessions Source Port The port whose traffic will be monitored Type Allows you to select which traffic to mirror to the target port Rx receive Tx transmit or Both Target Port The port that will duplicate or mirror the traffic on the source port Web Click Port Mirror Port configuration Specify the source port the traffic type to be mirrored and the monitor port then click Add Mirror Port Configuration Mirror Sessions New Source 1 10 Both Destination 1 13 sour Source Port fi R Type Rx gt emove fi Target Port Figure 3 48 Mirror Port Configuration CLI Use the interface command to select the monitor port then use the port monitor command to specify the source port Note that default mirroring under the CLI is for both received and transmitted packets Console config interface ethernet 1 10 4 125 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 13 4 136 Console config if 3 82 Port Configuration 3 Configuring Rate Limits This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic coming out of the switch Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Rate limiting
15. show startup config Displays the contents of the configuration file stored in flash PE 4 57 memory that is used to start up the system show running config Displays the configuration data currently in use PE 4 58 show system Displays system information NE PE 4 60 show users Shows all active console and Telnet sessions including user NE PE 4 61 name idle time and IP address of Telnet clients show version Displays version information for the system NE PE 4 61 show startup config This command displays the configuration file stored in non volatile memory that is used to start up the system Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Use this command in conjunction with the show running config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non volatile memory e This command displays settings for key command modes Each mode group is separated by symbols and includes the configuration mode command and corresponding commands This command displays the following information SNMP community strings Users names and access levels VLAN database VLAN ID name and state VLAN configuration settings for each interface Multiple spanning tree instances name and interfaces IP address configured for VLANs Spanning tree settings Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet 4 57 4 Command Li
16. Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s STA uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device STA compliant switch bridge or router that serves as the root of the spanning tree network It selects a root port on each bridging device except for the root device which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device Then it selects a designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device All ports connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports After determining the lowest cost spanning tree it enables all root ports and designated ports and disables all other ports Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports eliminating any possible network loops 3 91 3 Configuring the Switch N Designated N Z Root NL i i gt x _A x Designated x Boot A EK i Port ol ne a Designated x Ne __ Bridge A A ae x Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the Root Bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Maximum Age the bridge assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down This bridge will then initiate negotiations with
17. The IP address for a specific multicast service e Multicast Group Port List Shows the interfaces that have already been assigned to the selected VLAN to propagate a specific multicast service Web Click IGMP Snooping IP Multicast Registration Table Select a VLAN ID and the IP address for a multicast service from the scroll down lists The switch will display all the interfaces that are propagating this multicast service IP Multicast Registration Table VLAN ID 15 Multicast IP Address 2241 112 Multicast Group Port List Uniti Portl User Figure 3 86 IP Multicast Registration Table CLI This example displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1 along with the ports propagating the corresponding services The Type field shows if this entry was learned dynamically or was statically configured Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 4 207 VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type 1 224 1 1 12 Eth1 12 USER 1 224 1 2 3 Eth1 12 IGMP Console 3 144 Multicast Filtering 3 Assigning Ports to Multicast Services Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured using IGMP Snooping and IGMP Query messages as described in Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters on page 3 140 For certain applications that require tighter control you may need to statically configure a multicast service on the switch First add all the ports attached to participating hosts to a comm
18. 4 112 SNMP Commands Example 4 Console config snmp server community alpha rw Console config snmp server contact This command sets the system contact string Use the no form to remove the system contact information Syntax snmp server contact string no snmp server contact string String that describes the system contact information Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server contact Paul Console config Related Commands snmp server location 4 113 snmp server location This command sets the system location string Use the no form to remove the location string Syntax snmp server location text no snmp server location text String that describes the system location Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server location WC 19 Console config 4 113 4 Command Line Interface Related Commands snmp server contact 4 113 snmp server host This command specifies the recipient of a Simple Network Management Protocol notification operation Use the no form to remove the specified host Syntax snmp server host host addr community string version 1 2c no snmp server host host addr host addr Internet address of the host the targeted recipient Maximum host addresses 5 trap desti
19. MAC addresses or other more specific criteria This switch tests ingress or egress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule If no rules match for a list of all permit rules the packet is dropped and if no rules match for a list of all deny rules the packet is accepted You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule This is done by specifying masks that control the order in which ACL rules are checked The switch includes two system default masks that pass filter packets matching the permit deny rules specified in an ingress ACL You can also configure up to seven user defined masks for an ingress or egress ACL Command Usage The following restrictions apply to ACLs e Each ACL can have up to 32 rules The maximum number of ACLs is also 32 However due to resource restrictions the average number of rules bound to the ports should not exceed 20 e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule e When an ACL is bound to an interface as an egress filter all entries in the ACL must be deny rules Otherwise the bind operation will fail The switch does not support the explicit deny any any rule for the egress IP ACL or the egre
20. Number of Egress Traffic Classes The number of queue buffers provided for each port CLI displays this information as Priority for untagged traffic 3 125 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Priority Default Port Priority or Default Trunk Priority Modify the default priority for any interface then click Apply Port Priority Configuration Port Default Priority 0 7 Number of Egress Traffic Classes Trunk 1 fo 8 2 fo 3 fo 8 4 fo 8 5 fo 8 6 fo 8 7 b 8 8 b 8 9 P 8 a Figure 3 72 Default Port Priority CLI This example assigns a default priority of 5 to port 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 4 125 Console config if switchport priority default 5 4 193 Console config if end Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 5 4 135 Information of Eth 1 3 Broadcast threshold Enabled 500 packets second Lacp status Disabled ngress rate limit disable 1000M bits per second Egress rate limit disable 1000M bits per second VLAN membership mode Hybrid ngress rule Disabled Acceptable frame type All frames Native VLAN 1 Priority for untagged traffic 5 Gvrp status Disabled Allowed Vlan 1 u Forbidden Vlan Console 3 126 Class of Service Configuration 3 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues This switch processes Class of Service CoS priority tagged traffic by using eight priority queues for each port with service s
21. Partner Oper System ID LAG partner s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol Partner Admin Port Number Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner Partner Oper Port Number Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port s protocol partner Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner Oper Key Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner Admin State Administrative values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table Oper State Operational values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table Web Click Port LACP Port Neighbors Information Select a port channel to display the corresponding information LACP Port Neighbors Information Member Port 1 z Trunk ID 2 Partner Admin System ID _ Partner Admin Port Number Port Admin Priority Admin Key Admin State Expired 32768 00 00 00 00 00 00 Partner Oper System 1D 00 Partner Oper System ID_ _32768 00 04 60 80 47 40 1 Partner Oper Port Number 1 32768 Port Oper Priority 32768 O Oper Key 4 Oper State Expired Admin State Defaulted V Oper State Defaulted Admin State Distributing V O
22. Powered by Accton ES4512C ES4524C ES4548C 12 24 48 Port Gigabit Intelligent Switch Management Guide www edge core com Installation Guide ES4512C 12 Port Gigabit Intelligent Switch Layer 2 Workgroup Switch with 12 1000BASE T RJ 45 Ports and 4 Combination RJ 45 SFP Ports ES4524C 24 Port Gigabit Intelligent Switch Layer 2 Workgroup Switch with 24 1000BASE T RJ 45 Ports and 4 Combination RJ 45 SFP Ports ES4548C 48 Port Gigabit Intelligent Switch Layer 2 Workgroup Switch with 48 1000BASE T RJ 45 Ports and 4 Combination RJ 45 SFP Ports ES4512C ES4524C ES4548C E052005 R02 Contents Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 Key Features 1 1 Description of Software Features 1 2 System Defaults 1 5 Chapter 2 Initial Configuration 2 1 Connecting to the Switch 2 1 Configuration Options 2 1 Required Connections 2 2 Remote Connections 2 3 Basic Configuration 2 3 Console Connection 2 3 Setting Passwords 2 4 Setting an IP Address 2 4 Manual Configuration 2 4 Dynamic Configuration 2 5 Enabling SNMP Management Access 2 6 Community Strings 2 6 Trap Receivers 2 7 Saving Configuration Settings 2 7 Managing System Files 2 8 Chapter 3 Configuring the Switch 3 1 Using the Web Interface 3 1 Navigating the Web Browser Interface 3 2 Home Page 3 2 Configuration Options 3 3 Panel Display 3 3 Main Menu 3 4 Basic Configuration 3 9 Displaying System Information 3 9 Displaying Switch Hardware Software Vers
23. e No The entry number for each resource record Flag The flag is always 4 indicating a cache entry and therefore unreliable Type This field includes CNAME which specifies the canonical or primary name for the owner and ALIAS which specifies multiple domain names which are mapped to the same IP address as an existing entry IP The IP address associated with this record TTL The time to live reported by the name server Domain The domain name associated with this record Web Select DNS Cache Cache No Flag Type IP TTL Domain o 64 CNAME 207 456 134 222 51 www microsoft akadns net 1 4 CNAME 207 46 134 190 51 www microsoft akadns net 2 j4 CNAME 207 46 134 155 51 www microsoft akadns net 3 j CNAME 207 46 249 222 51 www microsoft akadns net 4 4 CNAME 207 46 249 27 51 www microsoft akadns net 5 4 ALIAS POINTER TO 4 51 www microsoft com 6 4 CNAME 207 46 68 27 71964 msn com tw 7 4 ALIAS POINTER TO 6 71964 www msn com tw 6 64 CNAME 65 54 131 192 605 passportimages com 9 f ALIAS POINTER TO 8 605 www passportimages com 10 4 CNAME 165 193 72 190 37 global msads net zj Figure 3 90 DNS Cache 3 150 Configuring Domain Name Service 3 CLI This example displays all the resource records learned from the designated name servers Console show dns cache NO FLAG TYPE 0 4 CNAME 1 4 CNAME 2 4 CN
24. flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset sendmail Displays settings for the SMTP event handler page 4 51 trap Displays settings for the trap function Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example The following example shows that system logging is enabled the message level for flash memory is errors i e default level 3 0 the message level for RAM is debugging i e default level 7 0 and lists one sample error Console show logging flash Syslog logging Enable History logging in FLASH level errors Console show logging ram Syslog logging Enable History logging in RAM level debugging 0 02 07 30 01 01 2001 STA topology change notification level 6 module 6 function 1 and event no 1 Console Table 4 18 show logging flash ram display description Field Description Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command History logging in FLASH The message level s reported based on the logging history command History logging in RAM The message level s reported based on the logging history command Messages Any system and event messages stored in memory 4 47 4 Command Line Interface The following example displays settings for the trap function REM REM Con
25. 3 Configuring the Switch CLI Enter the following command Console show bridge ext 4 188 Max support vlan numbers 255 Max support vlan ID 4094 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning IVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic classes Enabled Global GVRP status Enabled GMRP Disabled Console Displaying Current VLANs The VLAN Current Table shows the current port members of each VLAN and whether or not the port supports VLAN tagging Ports assigned to a large VLAN group that crosses several switches should use VLAN tagging However if you just want to create a small port based VLAN for one or two switches you can disable tagging Command Attributes Web e VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 Up Time at Creation Time this VLAN was created i e System Up Time e Status Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch Dynamic GVRP Automatically learned via GVRP Permanent Added as a static entry Egress Ports Shows all the VLAN port members Untagged Ports Shows the untagged VLAN port members Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Current Table Select any ID from the list VLAN Current Table VLAN ID 1 7 Up Time at Creationd dO hO min7 Status Permanent Egress Ports Untagged Ports Unit Port a Unitl Port2 Unit Port3 Unitl Port4 Unit Port6 Unit Port Unit Port8 Unit Port
26. 4 119 4 Command Line Interface Example This example adds two domain names to the current list and then displays the list Console config ip domain list sample com jp Console config ip domain list sample com uk Console config end Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS disabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List sample com jp sample com uk Name Server List Console Related Commands ip domain name 4 118 ip name server This command specifies the address of one or more domain name servers to use for name to address resolution Use the no form to remove a name server from this list Syntax no ip name server server address1 server address2 server address6 server address1 IP address of domain name server server address2 server address6 IP address of additional domain name servers Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The listed name servers are queried in the specified sequence until a response is received or the end of the list is reached with no response 4 120 DNS Commands 4 Example This example adds two domain name servers to the list and then displays the list Console config ip name server 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 Console config end Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS disabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List sample com jp sample com uk Name Server List 192 168 1 55 10 1
27. 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 20 4 24 4 25 4 26 4 26 4 28 4 30 4 31 4 34 4 41 4 43 4 44 4 47 4 48 4 48 4 52 4 57 4 62 4 63 4 66 4 68 xiii Tables Table 4 27 Table 4 28 Table 4 29 Table 4 30 Table 4 31 Table 4 32 Table 4 33 Table 4 34 Table 4 35 Table 4 36 Table 4 37 Table 4 38 Table 4 39 Table 4 40 Table 4 41 Table 4 42 Table 4 43 Table 4 44 Table 4 45 Table 4 46 Table 4 47 Table 4 48 Table 4 49 Table 4 50 Table 4 51 Table 4 52 Table 4 53 Table 4 54 Table 4 55 Table 4 56 Table 4 57 Table 4 58 Table 4 59 Table 4 60 Table 4 61 Table 4 62 Table 4 63 Table 4 64 Table 4 65 Table 4 66 Table 4 67 Table 4 68 Table 4 69 Table B 1 xiv Authentication Sequence Commands RADIUS Client Commands TACACS Client Commands Port Security Commands 802 1x Port Authentication Commands Access Control List Commands IP ACL Commands Mapping CoS Values to IP ACLs MAC ACL Commands Mapping CoS Values to MAC ACLs ACL Information Commands SNMP Commands DNS Commands show dns cache display description Interface Commands interfaces switchport display description Mirror Port Commands Rate Limit Commands Link Aggregation Commands show lacp counters display description show lacp internal display description show lacp neighbors display description show lacp sysid display description Address Table Commands Spanning Tree Commands VLAN Commands Editing
28. 60 3000 centiseconds Default 60 e GARP LeaveAll Timer The interval between sending out a LeaveAll query message for VLAN group participants and the port leaving the group This interval should be considerably larger than the Leave Time to minimize the amount of traffic generated by nodes rejoining the group Range 500 18000 centiseconds Default 1000 e Mode Indicates VLAN membership mode for an interface Default 1Q Trunk 1Q Trunk Specifies a port as an end point for a VLAN trunk A trunk is a direct link between two switches so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN Note that frames belonging to the port s default VLAN i e associated with the PVID are also transmitted as tagged frames Hybrid Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To add a trunk to the selected VLAN use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page Timer settings must follow this rule 2 x join timer lt leave timer lt leaveAll timer Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Port Configuration or VLAN Trunk Configuration Fill in the required settings for each interface click Apply VLAN Port Configuration Port PVID Wd Acceptable Frame Type fa fal Tagged ALL hd ALL ALL 4 4 Ingress Filtering I Enabled F Enabled F Enabled F Enabled M Enabled F Enabled Enabled 20 60 l E
29. Configure secure addresses for individual ports 802 1x Use IEEE 802 1x port authentication to control access to specific ports IP Filter Filters management access to the web SNMP or Telnet interface Configuring the Logon Password The guest only has read access for most configuration parameters However the administrator has write access for all parameters governing the onboard agent You should therefore assign a new administrator password as soon as possible and store it in a safe place The default guest name is guest with the password guest The default administrator name is admin with the password admin Note that user names can only be assigned via the CLI 3 30 User Authentication 3 Command Attributes User Name The name of the user Maximum length 8 characters Access Level Specifies the user level Options Normal and Privileged e Password Specifies the user password Range 0 8 characters plain text case sensitive CLI only Web Click Security Passwords To change the password for the current user enter the old password the new password confirm it by entering it again then click Apply Passwords Old Password and New Password p Confirm Password CLI Assign a user name to access level 15 i e administrator then specify the password Console config username bob access level 15 4 26 Console config usern
30. DSCP DSCP priority level Range 0 64 Protocol Specifies the protocol type to match as TCP UDP or Others where others indicates a specific protocol number 0 255 Options TCP UDP Others Default TCP Src Dst Port Source destination port number for the specified protocol type Range 0 65535 Src Dst Port Bitmask Decimal number representing the port bits to match Range 0 65535 Control Code Decimal number representing a bit string that specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header Range 0 63 Control Bitmask Decimal number representing the code bits to match The control bitmask is a decimal number for an equivalent binary bit mask that is applied to the control code Enter a decimal number where the equivalent binary bit 1 means to match a bit and 0 means to ignore a bit The following bits may be specified 1 fin Finish 2 syn Synchronize 4 rst Reset 8 psh Push 16 ack Acknowledgement 32 urg Urgent pointer For example use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the following flags set SYN flag valid use control code 2 control bitmask 2 Both SYN and ACK valid use control code 18 control bitmask 18 SYN valid and ACK invalid use control code 2 control bitmask 18 3 55 3 Configuring the Switch Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Specify the source and or destination addresses Selec
31. Default 3 SSH Server Key Size Specifies the SSH server key size Range 512 896 bits The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch The host key is shared with the SSH client and is fixed at 1024 bits Web Click Security SSH Settings Enable SSH and adjust the authentication parameters as required then click Apply Note that you must first generate the host key pair on the SSH Host Key Settings page before you can enable the SSH server SSH Server Settings SSH Server Status Enabled gt Version 2 0 SSH Authentication Timeout 1 120 fi 00 seconds SSH Authentication Retries 1 5 E SSH Server Key Size 512 896 512 Figure 3 24 SSH Server Settings 3 40 User Authentication 3 CLI This example enables SSH sets the authentication parameters and displays the current configuration It shows that the administrator has made a connection via SHH and then disables this connection Console config ip ssh server 4 36 Console config ip ssh timeout 100 4 37 Console config ip ssh authentication retries 5 4 37 Console config ip ssh server key size 512 4 38 Console config end Console show ip ssh 4 40 SSH Enabled version 2 0 Negotiation timeout 120 secs Authentication retries 3 Server key size 768 bits Console show ssh 4 41 Information of secure shell Session Username Version Encrypt method Negotiation state o admin 2 0 cipher 3des session s
32. Example Console config dot1lx timeout quiet period 350 Console config dot1x timeout re authperiod This command sets the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Syntax dot1x timeout re authperiod seconds no dot1x timeout re authperiod seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 3600 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dot1lx timeout re authperiod 300 Console config 4 82 Authentication Commands 4 dot1x timeout tx period This command sets the time that the switch waits during an authentication session before re transmitting an EAP packet Use the no form to reset to the default value Syntax dot1x timeout tx period seconds no dot1x timeout tx period seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 30 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dot1x timeout tx period 300 Console config show dot1x This command shows general port authentication related settings on the switch or a specific interface Syntax show dot1x statistics interface interface e statistics Displays dot1x status for each port interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the following information Global 802 1X Parameters Displays the global port access contro
33. Example Console show system System description 20 10 100 1000 ports 4 Gigabit Combo ports L2 L4 managed standalone switch System OID string 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 10 51 System information System Up time 0 days 1 hours 41 minutes and 43 31 seconds System Name NONE System Location NONE System Contact NONE MAC address 00 12 12 34 12 34 Web server enable Web server port 80 Web secure server enable Web secure server port 443 Telnet server enable Telnet port 23 POST result UART LOOP BACK Test PASS DRAM TOBE oip toes ERREA PASS TIMELY TESES sims cnc eased ER PASS PCI Device 1 Test PASS PCI Device 2 Test PASS Switch Int Loopback test PASS Done All Pass Console 4 60 System Management Commands 4 show users Shows all active console and Telnet sessions including user name idle time and IP address of Telnet client Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The session used to execute this command is indicated by a symbol next to the Line i e session index number Example Console show users Username accounts Username Privilege Public Key admin 15 None guest 0 None steve 15 RSA Online users Line Username Idle time h m s Remote IP addr 0 console admin 0 14 14 1 VTY 0 admin 0 00 00 192 168 1 19 2 SSH 1 steve 0 00 06 192 168 1 19 Web online users Line Remote IP addr Username
34. P Precedence Priority Sets IP Type of Service priority mapping the precedence tag to 3 132 a class of service value P DSCP Priority Sets IP Differentiated Services Code Point priority mapping a 3 133 DSCP tag to a class of service value P Port Priority Status Globally enables or disables IP Port Priority 3 135 P Port Priority Sets TCP UDP port priority defining the socket number and 3 135 associated class of service value ACL CoS Priority Sets the CoS value and corresponding output queue for packets 3 135 matching an ACL rule ACL Marker Change traffic priorities for frames matching an ACL rule 3 137 IGMP Snooping 3 139 IGMP Configuration Enables multicast filtering configures parameters for multicast 3 140 query Multicast Router Displays the ports that are attached to a neighboring multicast 3 142 Port Information router for each VLAN ID Static Multicast Router Port Assigns ports that are attached to a neighboring multicast router 3 143 Configuration IP Multicast Registration Displays all multicast groups active on this switch including 3 144 Table multicast IP addresses and VLAN ID IGMP Member Port Table Indicates multicast addresses associated with the selected 3 145 VLAN 3 Configuring the Switch Table 3 2 Switch Main Menu Menu Description Page DNS 3 146 General Configuration Enables DNS configures domain name and domain list and 3 146 specifies IP address of nam
35. Switch config ext acl permit any any Switch config ext acl deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 Switch config ext acl end Console show access list IP extended access list A6 permit any any deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 Console configure Switch config access list ip mask precedence in Switch config ip mask acl mask protocol any any control flag 2 Switch config ip mask acl end Console sh access list IP extended access list A6 permit any any deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 IP ingress mask ACL mask protocol any any control flag 2 Console configure Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if ip access group A6 in Console config if end Console show access list IP extended access list A6 deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 permit any any IP ingress mask ACL mask protocol any any control flag 2 Console show access list ip mask precedence This command shows the ingress or egress rule masks for IP ACLs Syntax show access list ip mask precedence in out e in Ingress mask precedence for ingress ACLs out Egress mask precedence for egress ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show access list ip mask precedence IP ingress mask ACL mask host any mask 255 255 255 0 any Console 4 96 Access Control List Commands 4 Related Commands mask IP ACL 4 93 ip access group This command binds a port to an IP ACL Use the no form to remov
36. The following attributes are read only and cannot be changed e STA State Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree See Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 99 for additional information e Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Configuration only The following interface attributes can be configured e MST Instance ID Instance identifier to configure Range 0 4094 Default 0 e Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority i e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Protocol is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Default 128 e Range 0 240 in steps of 16 3 108 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 e MST Path Cost This parameter is use
37. Use the silent time command to set this interval When this threshold is reached for Telnet the Telnet logon interface shuts down This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections Example To set the password threshold to five attempts enter this command Console config line password thresh 5 Console config line Related Commands silent time 4 15 silent time This command sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password thresh command Use the no form to remove the silent time value Syntax silent time seconds no silent time seconds The number of seconds to disable console response Range 0 65535 0 no silent time Default Setting The default value is no silent time Command Mode Line Configuration 4 15 4 Command Line Interface Example To set the silent time to 60 seconds enter this command Console config line silent time 60 Console config line Related Commands password thresh 4 15 databits This command sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and generated by the console port Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax databits 7 8 no databits 7 Seven data bits per character 8 Eight data bits per character Default Setting 8 data bits per character Command Mode Line Configu
38. import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch Otherwise you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management station and place the host public key in it An entry for a public key in the known hosts file would appear similar to the following example 10 1 0 54 1024 35 1568499540186766925933394677505461 732531 3674890836547254 150202455931 99868544358361651999923329781 766065830956 10825913212890233 76546801 72627257 141342876294 1301196195566782 595664 10486957427888146206 5194174677298486546861571773939016477935594230357 74 13098022737087794545 2408397 17526463580581 767 16709574804776117 3 Import Client s Public Key to the Switch Use the copy tftp public key command to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH client s granted management access to the switch Note that these clients must be configured locally on the switch with the username command as described on page 4 26 The clients are subsequently authenticated using these keys The current firmware only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the following example for an RSA Version 1 key 1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880 0555361616310517759408386863 1109291232226828519254374603100937187721199 69631781366277414168985132049117204830339254324 10163799759237 1449011938 0060902539484084827 178194372288402533 11595213486 10229029789827213532671 31629432532818915
39. not for multicast broadcast or destination mac unknown packets 3 57 3 Configuring the Switch Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Specify the source and or destination addresses Select the address type Any Host or MAC If you select Host enter a specific address e g 11 22 33 44 55 66 If you select MAC enter a base address and a hexidecimal bitmask for an address range Set any other required criteria such as VID Ethernet type or packet format Then click Add MAC ACL Name a Action Source Source Destination Destination p VID Ethernet Ethernet acket Remove MAC Mask MAC Mask Mask Type Py Format Action Permit x Source MAC Any v Source MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Source MAC BitMask Destination MAC Host Destination MAC Address 00 20 29 94 34 de Destination BitMask ana ff VID rs VID Mask rT Ethernet Type jo Ethernet Type Mask C Packet Format Any X Ad Figure 3 34 ACL Configuration MAC CLI This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address 00 e0 29 94 34 de where the Ethernet type is 0800 Console config mac acl permit any host 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 4 102 Console config mac acl 3 58 Access Control Lists 3 Configuring ACL Masks You can specify optional masks that c
40. specified level The messages are sent to specified SMTP servers on the network and can be retrieved using POP or IMAP clients Command Attributes e Admin Status Enables disables the SMTP function Default Enabled Email Source Address Sets the email address used for the From field in alert messages You may use a symbolic email address that identifies the switch or the address of an administrator responsible for the switch Severity Sets the syslog severity threshold level see table on page 4 48 used to trigger alert messages All events at this level or higher will be sent to the configured email recipients For example using Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0 Default Level 7 SMTP Server List Specifies a list of up to three recipient SMTP servers The switch attempts to connect to the other listed servers if the first fails Use the New SMTP Server text field and the Add Remove buttons to configure the list Email Destination Address List Specifies the email recipients of alert messages You can specify up to five recipients Use the New Email Destination Address text field and the Add Remove buttons to configure the list 3 23 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click System Log SMTP Enable SMTP specify a source email address and select the minimum severity level To add an IP address to the SMTP Server List type the new IP address in the SMTP Server field and cli
41. 0 55 Console Related Commands ip domain name 4 118 ip domain lookup 4 121 ip domain lookup This command enables DNS host name to address translation Use the no form to disable DNS Syntax no ip domain lookup Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Atleast one name server must be specified before you can enable DNS If all name servers are deleted DNS will automatically be disabled 4 121 4 Command Line Interface Example This example enables DNS and then displays the configuration Console config ip domain lookup Console config end Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS enabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List sample com jp sample com uk Name Server List 192 1658 1 55 10 1 0 55 Console Related Commands ip domain name 4 118 ip name server 4 120 show hosts This command displays the static host name to address mapping table Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Note that a host name will be displayed as an alias if it is mapped to the same address es as a previously configured entry Console show hosts Hostname rd5 Inet address 10 1 0 55 192 168 1 55 Alias 1 rd6 Console 4 122 DNS Commands 4 show dns This command displays the configuration of the DNS server Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS enabled Defau
42. 0 or above or Netscape Navigator 6 2 or above Note You can also use the Command Line Interface CLI to manage the switch over a serial connection to the console port or via Telnet For more information on using the CLI refer to Chapter 4 Command Line Interface Prior to accessing the switch from a Web browser be sure you have first performed the following tasks 1 Configure the switch with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway using an out of band serial connection BOOTP or DHCP protocol See Setting an IP Address on page 2 4 2 Set usernames and passwords using an out of band serial connection Access to the Web agent is controlled by the same user names and passwords as the onboard configuration program See Setting Passwords on page 2 4 3 After you enter a user name and password you will have access to the system configuration program Notes 1 You are allowed three attempts to enter the correct password on the third failed attempt the current connection is terminated 2 If you log into the Web interface as guest Normal Exec level you can view the configuration settings or change the guest password If you log in as admin Privileged Exec level you can change the settings on any page 3 If the path between your management station and this switch does not pass through any device that uses the Spanning Tree Algorithm then you can set the switch port attached to your manag
43. 000 trunk 50 000 e Gigabit Ethernet full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e This command is used by the Spanning Tree Algorithm to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media e Path cost takes precedence over port priority e When the spanning tree pathcost method page 4 158 is set to short the maximum value for path cost is 65 535 Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree cost 50 Console config if spanning tree port priority This command configures the priority for the specified interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree port priority priority no spanning tree port priority priority The priority for a port Range 0 240 in steps of 16 4 164 Spanning Tree Commands 4 Default Setting 128 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority that is lowest value will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identi
44. 3 Mapping IP Port Priority You can also map network applications to Class of Service values based on the IP port number i e TCP UDP port number in the frame header Some of the more common TCP service ports include HTTP 80 FTP 21 Telnet 23 and POP3 110 Command Attributes IP Port Priority Status Enables or disables the IP port priority Default Disabled Interface Selects the port or trunk interface to which the settings apply IP Port Priority Table Shows the IP port to CoS map IP Port Number TCP UDP Set a new IP port number e Class of Service Value Sets a CoS value for a new IP port Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represents high priority Note IP Port Priority settings apply to all interfaces Web Click Priority IP Port Priority Status Set IP Port Priority Status to Enabled IP Port Priority Status IP Port Priority Global Status Enabled Figure 3 79 IP Port Priority Status Click Priority IP Port Priority Enter the port number for a network application in the IP Port Number box and the new CoS values in the Class of Service box and then click Apply IP Port Priority none IP Port Priority Table IP Port Number TCP UDP class of Service Value 0 7 Remove IP Port Figure 3 80 IP Port Priority 3 135 3 Configuring the Switch CLI The following example globally enables IP Port Priority service on t
45. 3 16 4 63 DSCP enabling 3 131 4 198 mapping priorities 3 133 3 136 3 137 4 198 dynamic addresses displaying 3 89 4 149 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See DHCP E edge port STA 3 101 3 103 4 163 event logging 4 43 F firmware displaying version 3 10 4 61 upgrading 3 16 4 63 G GARP VLAN Registration Protocol See GVRP gateway default 3 13 4 213 GVRP global setting 3 113 4 185 interface configuration 3 119 4 186 Index 1 Index H hardware version displaying 3 10 4 61 HTTPS 3 34 4 31 HTTPS secure server 3 34 4 31 l IEEE 802 1D 3 91 4 152 IEEE 802 1s 4 152 IEEE 802 1w 3 91 4 152 IEEE 802 1x 3 43 4 78 IGMP groups displaying 3 144 4 205 Layer 2 3 139 4 202 query 3 139 4 206 query Layer 2 3 140 4 206 snooping 3 139 4 203 snooping configuring 3 140 4 202 ingress filtering 3 119 4 175 IP address BOOTP DHCP 3 15 4 211 4 212 setting 2 4 3 13 4 211 IP precedence enabling 3 131 4 195 4 196 mapping priorities 3 132 4 197 J jumbo frame 4 62 L link type STA 3 101 3 103 4 165 logging to syslog servers 4 45 log in Web interface 3 2 logon authentication 3 30 4 68 RADIUS client 3 31 4 71 RADIUS server 3 31 4 71 TACACS client 3 31 4 74 TACACS server 3 31 4 74 logon authentication sequence 3 32 4 69 4 70 M main menu 3 4 Index 2 Management Information Bases MIBs A 3 mirror port configuring 3 82 4 134 MSTP 4 152 global
46. 3 66 Port Configuration 3 Configuring Interface Connections You can use the Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration page to enable disable an interface set auto negotiation and the interface capabilities to advertise or manually fix the speed duplex mode and flow control Command Attributes e Name Allows you to label an interface Range 1 64 characters Admin Allows you to manually disable an interface You can disable an interface due to abnormal behavior e g excessive collisions and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved You may also disable an interface for security reasons Speed Duplex Allows you to manually set the port speed and duplex mode Flow Control Allows automatic or manual selection of flow control Autonegotiation Port Capabilities Allows auto negotiation to be enabled disabled When auto negotiation is enabled you need to specify the capabilities to be advertised When auto negotiation is disabled you can force the settings for speed mode and flow control The following capabilities are supported 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 1000full Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation Sym Gigabit only Check this item to transmit and receive pause frames or clear it to auto negotiat
47. 41 show public key 4 42 Event Logging Commands 4 43 logging on 4 43 logging history 4 44 logging host 4 45 vV Contents logging facility logging trap clear logging show logging SMTP Alert Commands logging sendmail host logging sendmail level logging sendmail source email logging sendmail destination email logging sendmail show logging sendmail Time Commands sntp client sntp server sntp poll show snip clock timezone calendar set show calendar System Status Commands show startup config show running config show system show users show version Frame Size Commands jumbo frame Flash File Commands copy delete dir whichboot boot system Authentication Commands Authentication Sequence authentication login authentication enable RADIUS Client radius server host radius server port radius server key radius server retransmit radius server timeout show radius server TACACS Client vi 4 45 4 46 4 46 4 47 4 48 4 49 4 49 4 50 4 50 4 51 4 51 4 52 4 52 4 53 4 54 4 54 4 55 4 55 4 56 4 57 4 57 4 58 4 60 4 61 4 61 4 62 4 62 4 63 4 63 4 65 4 66 4 67 4 67 4 68 4 69 4 69 4 70 4 71 4 71 4 71 4 72 4 72 4 73 4 73 4 74 Contents tacacs server host 4 74 tacacs server port 4 74 tacacs server key 4 75 show tacacs server 4 75 Port Security Commands 4 76 port security 4 76 802 1x Port Authentication 4 78 authentication dot1x default 4 78 dot1x default 4 79 do
48. 60 Access Control Lists 3 Web Configure the mask to match the required rules in the IP ingress or egress ACLs Set the mask to check for any source or destination address a specific host address or an address range Include other criteria to search for in the rules such as a protocol type or one of the service types Or use a bitmask to search for specific protocol port s or TCP control code s Then click Add ACL Mask IP Configuration Mask IP Ingress Table Sre Dst IP Dst Port Control Src IP BitMask BitMask Protocol TOS a DSCP Israi BitMask BitMask Remove 255 255 255 255 192 168 1 0 Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Any B0 fany Remove Remove All Entries Sre IP Any gt Src IP BitMask ooo Dst IP Any gt Dst IP BitMask booo Protocol BitMask I Enabled 7 Service Type TOS Enabled I Precedence Enabled I DSCP Enabled Src Port BitMask 0 65535 Dst Port BitMask 0 85535 Control BitMask 0 63 Aa Figure 3 36 ACL Mask Configuration IP CLI This shows that the entries in the mask override the precedence in which the rules are entered into the ACL In the following example packets with the source address 10 1 1 1 are dropped because the deny 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 rule has the higher precedence according the mask host any entry Console config access list ip standard A2 4 88 Console config std
49. A loop can often occur in complicated or backup linked network systems Spanning Tree detects and directs data along the shortest available path maximizing the performance and efficiency of the network Telnet Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over TCPIIP Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TACACS TACACS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to TACACS compliant devices on the network Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP Protocol suite that includes TCP as the primary transport protocol and IP as the network layer protocol Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP A TCP IP protocol commonly used for software downloads Glossary 5 Glossary User Datagram Protocol UDP UDP provides a datagram mode for packet switched communications It uses IP as the underlying transport mechanism to provide access to IP like services UDP packets are delivered just like IP packets connection less datagrams that may be discarded before reaching their targets UDP is useful when TCP would be too complex too slow or just unnecessary Virtual LAN VLAN A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network A VLAN serves as a logical workgroup with no physical barriers and allows users to sha
50. Commands Command Group Function Page Authentication Sequence Defines logon authentication method and precedence 4 69 RADIUS Client Configures settings for authentication via a RADIUS server 4 70 TACACS Client Configures settings for authentication via a TACACS server 4 74 Port Security Configures secure addresses for a port 4 76 Port Authentication Configures host authentication on specific ports using 802 1x 4 78 4 68 Authentication Commands 4 Authentication Sequence Table 4 27 Authentication Sequence Commands Command Function Mode Page authentication login Defines logon authentication method and precedence GC 4 69 authentication enable Defines the authentication method and precedence for GC 4 70 command mode change authentication login This command defines the login authentication method and precedence Use the no form to restore the default Syntax authentication login local radius tacacs no authentication login e local Use local password e radius Use RADIUS server password tacacs Use TACACS server password Default Setting Local Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while T
51. Console config if combo forced mode copper forced 4 130 Console config if 3 68 Port Configuration 3 Creating Trunk Groups You can create multiple links between devices that work as one virtual aggregate link A port trunk offers a dramatic increase in bandwidth for network segments where bottlenecks exist as well as providing a fault tolerant link between two devices You can create up to six trunks at a time The switch supports both static trunking and dynamic Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Static trunks have to be manually configured at both ends of the link and the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard On the other hand LACP configured ports can automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP configured ports on another device You can configure any number of ports on the switch as LACP as long as they are not already configured as part of a static trunk If ports on another device are also configured as LACP the switch and the other device will negotiate a trunk link between them If an LACP trunk consists of more than four ports all other ports will be placed in a standby mode Should one link in the trunk fail one of the standby ports will automatically be activated to replace it Command Usage Besides balancing the load across each port in the trunk the other ports provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk fails However before making any physical c
52. Downlink Ports Configuring Protocol Based VLANs Configuring Protocol Groups Mapping Protocols to VLANs Class of Service Configuration Layer 2 Queue Settings Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues Selecting the Queue Mode Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes Layer 3 4 Priority Settings Mapping Layer 3 4 Priorities to CoS Values Selecting IP Precedence DSCP Priority Mapping IP Precedence Mapping DSCP Priority Mapping IP Port Priority Contents 3 77 3 79 3 80 3 82 3 83 3 84 3 88 3 88 3 89 3 91 3 91 3 92 3 95 3 99 3 102 3 104 3 107 3 108 3 110 3 110 3 113 3 113 3 114 3 115 3 116 3 118 3 119 3 121 3 121 3 122 3 122 3 123 3 123 3 125 3 125 3 125 3 127 3 129 3 129 3 131 3 131 3 131 3 132 3 133 3 135 Contents Mapping CoS Values to ACLs 3 136 Changing Priorities Based on ACL Rules 3 137 Multicast Filtering 3 139 Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Query 3 139 Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters 3 140 Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router 3 142 Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router 3 143 Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services 3 144 Assigning Ports to Multicast Services 3 145 Configuring Domain Name Service 3 146 Configuring General DNS Server Parameters 3 146 Configuring Static DNS Host to Address Entries 3 148 Displaying the DNS Cache 3 150 Chapter 4 Command Line Interface 4 1 Using the Command Line Interfa
53. Enabled for all ports Packet rate limit 500 packets per second Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage When broadcast traffic exceeds the specified threshold packets above that threshold are dropped This command can enable or disable broadcast storm control for the selected interface However the specified threshold value applies to all ports on the switch 4 131 4 Command Line Interface Example The following shows how to configure broadcast storm control at 600 packets per second Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if switchport broadcast packet rate 600 Console config if clear counters This command clears statistics on an interface Syntax clear counters interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Statistics are only initialized for a power reset This command sets the base value for displayed statistics to zero for the current management session However if you log out and back into the management interface the statistics displayed will show the absolute value accumulated since the last power reset Example The following example clears statistics on port 5 Console clear counters ethernet 1 5 Console 4 132 Interface Commands 4 show interfaces status This command dis
54. IOTELOG server IOTELOG server sole status facility type local use 7 level type Debugging messages d IP IP IR IP IP Console show logging trap Syslog logging Enable REMOTELOG REMOTELOG REMOTELOG REMOTELOG server REMOTELOG server REMOTELOG server isable address 1 2 3 4 address 0 0 0 0 address 0 0 0 0 address 0 0 0 0 address 0 0 0 0 Table 4 19 show logging trap display description Field Description Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command REMOTELOG status Shows if remote logging has been enabled via the logging trap command REMOTELOG The facility type for remote logging of syslog messages as specified in the logging facility type facility command REMOTELOG level type The severity threshold for syslog messages sent to a remote server as specified in the logging trap command servi REMOTELOG er IP address The address of syslog servers as specified in the logging host command Related Commands show logging sendmail 4 51 SMTP Alert Commands These commands configure SMTP event handling and forwarding of alert messages to the specified SMTP servers and email recipients Table 4 20 SMTP Alert Commands Command Function Mode Page logging sendmail host SMTP servers to receive alert messages GC 4 49 logging sendmail level Severity threshold used to trigger alert messa
55. IP subnet This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets bootp Obtains IP address from BOOTP dhcp Obtains IP address from DHCP Default Setting DHCP Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN Command Usage e You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management access over the network You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the configuration program 4 213 4 Command Line Interface e Ifyou select the bootp or dhcp option IP is enabled but will not function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received Requests will be broadcast periodically by this device in an effort to learn its IP address BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP address default gateway and subnet mask e You can start broadcasting BOOTP or DHCP requests by entering an ip dhcp restart command or by rebooting the switch Note Before you can change the IP address you must first clear the current address with the no form of this command Example In the following example the device is assigned an address in VLAN 1 Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 5 255 255 255 0 Console config if Related Commands ip dhcp restart 4 214 ip
56. Instance Remove MST ID 0 4094 vlan 1D Add Figure 3 58 MSTP VLAN Configuration 3 105 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This displays STA settings for instance 1 followed by settings for each port Console show spanning tree mst 1 4 170 Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode MSTP Spanning tree enable disable enable Instance oe Vlans configuration 21 5 Priority 232768 Bridge Hello Time sec 22 Bridge Max Age sec 720 Bridge Forward Delay sec 215 Root Hello Time sec 22 Root Max Age sec 20 Root Forward Delay sec 215 Max hops 2 20 Remaining hops 20 Designated Root 4096 2 0000E9313131 Current root port D Current root cost 0 Number of topology changes 0 Last topology changes time sec 646 Transmission limit Ec Path Cost Method long Eth 1 7 information Admin status enable Role disable State discarding External path cost 10000 Internal path cost 10000 Priority 128 Designated cost 0 Designated port 126 7 Designated root 4096 2 0000E9313131 Designated bridge 4096 2 0000E9313131 Fast forwarding enable Forward transitions 0 Admin edge port enable Oper edge port enable Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to point Spanning Tree Status enable CLI This example sets the priority for MSTI 1 and adds VLANs 1 5 to this MSTI Console config spanning tree mst configuration 4 159 Console config mst mst 1
57. MAC address are concatenated to form the LAG system ID Address Table Commands These commands are used to configure the address table for filtering specified addresses displaying current entries clearing the table or setting the aging time Table 4 50 Address Table Commands Command Function Mode Page mac address table static Maps a static address to a port ina VLAN GC 4 150 clear mac address table Removes any learned entries from the forwarding database PE 4 151 dynamic show mac address table Displays entries in the bridge forwarding database PE 4 151 mac address table Sets the aging time of the address table GC 4 152 aging time show mac address table Shows the aging time for the address table PE 4 152 aging time 4 149 4 Command Line Interface mac address table static This command maps a static address to a destination port in a VLAN Use the no form to remove an address Syntax mac address table static mac address interface interface vlan vlan id action no mac address table static mac address vlan vlan id mac address MAC address interface e ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 e vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 action delete on reset Assignment lasts until the switch is reset permanent Assignment is permanent Default Setting No static addresses are defined The default mode
58. N OD oy A ew DM ejl CO Command Attributes DSCP Priority Table Shows the DSCP Priority to CoS map e Class of Service Value Maps a CoS value to the selected DSCP Priority value Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority Note IP DSCP settings apply to all interfaces 3 133 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Priority IP DSCP Priority Select an entry from the DSCP table enter a value in the Class of Service Value field then click Apply IP DSCP Priority DSCP0 coso BD DSCP1 CoS0 DSCP 2 CoS 0 DSCP Priority Table DSCP 3 CoS 0 DSCP 4 CoS 0 DSCP5 CoS 0 DSCP6 CoS0 zf Class of Semice Value 0 7 Mo Restore Default Figure 3 78 IP DSCP Priority CLI The following example globally enables DSCP Priority service on the switch maps DSCP value 0 to CoS value 1 on port 1 and then displays the DSCP Priority settings Console config map ip dscp 4 200 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 125 Console config if map ip dscp 1 cos 0 4 200 Console config if end Console show map ip dscp ethernet 1 1 4 203 DSCP mapping status enabled Port DSCP COS Eth 1 1 o 0 Eth 1 1 1 0 Eth 1 1 2 0 Eth 1 1 3 0 Eth 1 1 63 0 Console Mapping specific values for IP DSCP is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch 3 134 Class of Service Configuration
59. Note that path cost page 4 164 takes precedence over port priority page 4 164 Example Console config spanning tree pathcost method long Console config 4 158 Spanning Tree Commands 4 spanning tree transmission limit This command configures the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive RSTP MSTP BPDUs Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree transmission limit count no spanning tree transmission limit count The transmission limit in seconds Range 1 10 Default Setting 3 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command limits the maximum transmission rate for BPDUs Example Console config spanning tree transmission limit 4 Console config spanning tree mst configuration Use this command to change to Multiple Spanning Tree MST configuration mode Default Setting No VLANs are mapped to any MST instance The region name is set the switch s MAC address Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config spanning tree mst configuration Console config mstp Related Commands mst vlan 4 160 mst priority 4 161 name 4 161 revision 4 162 max hops 4 163 4 159 4 Command Line Interface mst vlan This command adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance Use the no form to remove the specified VLANs Using the no form without any VLAN parameters to remove all VLANs Syntax
60. Priority 3 132 Class of Service Configuration 3 CLI The following example globally enables IP Precedence service on the switch maps IP Precedence value 1 to CoS value 0 on port 1 and then displays the IP Precedence settings Console config map ip precedence 4 197 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 125 Console config if map ip precedence 1 cos 0 4 199 Console config if end Console show map ip precedence ethernet 1 1 4 201 Precedence mapping status disabled Port Precedence COS PRPRPRPRPER NHN RWNHO NYHURWNODO Eth 1 Console Mapping specific values for IP Precedence is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch Mapping DSCP Priority The DSCP is six bits wide allowing coding for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors The DSCP replaces the ToS bits but it retains backward compatibility with the three precedence bits so that non DSCP compliant ToS enabled devices will not conflict with the DSCP mapping Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding The DSCP default values are defined in the following table Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0 Table 3 13 Mapping DSCP Priority IP DSCP Value CoS Value 0 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 48 46 56
61. Range 0 7 Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e You must configure an ACL mask before you can map CoS values to the rule A packet matching a rule within the specified ACL is mapped to one of the output queues as shown in the following table For information on mapping the CoS values to output queues see queue cos map on page 4 194 Table 4 34 Mapping CoS Values to IP ACLs Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 Example Console config interface ethernet 1 25 Console config if map access list ip david cos 0 Console config if Related Commands queue cos map 4 194 show map access list ip 4 99 4 98 Access Control List Commands 4 show map access list ip This command shows the CoS value mapped to an IP ACL for the current interface The CoS value determines the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule Syntax show map access list ip interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show map access list ip Eth 1 25 access list ip david cos 0 Console Related Commands map access list ip 4 98 match access list ip This command changes the IEEE 802 1p priority IP Precedence or DSCP Priority of a frame matching the defined ACL rule This feature is commonly referred to as ACL pac
62. Saving Configuration Settings Configuration commands only modify the running configuration file and are not saved when the switch is rebooted To save all your configuration changes in nonvolatile storage you must copy the running configuration file to the start up configuration file using the copy command To save the current configuration settings enter the following command 1 From the Privileged Exec mode prompt type copy running config startup config and press lt Enter gt 2 Initial Configuration 2 Enter the name of the start up file Press lt Enter gt Console copy running config startup config Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console Managing System Files The switch s flash memory supports three types of system files that can be managed by the CLI program Web interface or SNMP The switch s file system allows files to be uploaded and downloaded copied deleted and set as a start up file The three types of files are e Configuration This file stores system configuration information and is created when configuration settings are saved Saved configuration files can be selected as a system start up file or can be uploaded via TFTP to a server for backup A file named Factory_Default_Config cfg contains all the system default settings and cannot be deleted from the system See Saving or Restoring C
63. Security Status Max MAC Count 0 20 Trunk 1 none Enabled oS 2 nne T Enabled fo 3 none Enabled fo 4 rone Sw I Enabled boo 5 Trap and Shutdown F Enabled fo 6 none F Enabled boo 7 none a I Enabled oT 8 none H I Enabled boo fo r Enabled oc 7 10 none Sid Enabled S 11 none P Enabled boo 12 none a I Enabled boo 3 42 Figure 3 25 Port Security User Authentication 3 CLI This example selects the target port sets the port security action to send a trap and disable the port specifies a maximum address count and then enables port security for the port Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if port security action trap and shutdown 4 76 Console config if port security max mac count 20 Console config if port security Console config if Configuring 802 1x Port Authentication Network switches can provide open and easy access to network resources by simply attaching a client PC Although this automatic configuration and access is a desirable feature it also allows unauthorized personnel to easily intrude and possibly gain access to sensitive network data The IEEE 802 1x dot1x standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication Access to all switch ports in a network can be centrally contro
64. Syntax no bridge ext gvrp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network This function should be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch Example Console config bridge ext gvrp Console config 4 187 4 Command Line Interface show bridge ext This command shows the configuration for bridge extension commands Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage See Displaying Basic VLAN Information on page 3 113 and Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities on page 3 12 for a description of the displayed items Example Console show bridge ext Max support vlan numbers 255 Max support vlan ID 4094 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning IVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic classes Enabled Global GVRP status Enabled GMRP Disabled Console switchport gvrp This command enables GVRP for a port Use the no form to disable it Syntax no switchport gvrp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport gvrp Console config if 4
65. Type Frame type used by this protocol Options Ethernet RFC_1042 LLC_other Protocol Type The only option for the LLC_other frame type is IPX_raw The options for all other frames types include IP ARP RARP Web Click VLAN Protocol VLAN Configuration Enter a protocol group ID frame type and protocol type then click Apply Protocol VLAN Configuration Current New Group 1 Ethernet 06 00 p dadag BUA a Group 1 Ethernet 08 06 lt lt Add FORICON SINOPE 1 2 3647 oo Frame Type Ethernet Remove Protocol Type Ip ba Figure 3 70 Protocol VLAN Configuration CLI The following creates protocol group 1 and then specifies Ethernet frames with IP and ARP protocol types Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame_type ethernet protocol type ip 4 184 Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame_type ethernet protocol type arp Console config Mapping Protocols to VLANs Map a protocol group to a VLAN for each interface that will participate in the group Command Usage e When creating a protocol based VLAN only assign interfaces using this configuration screen If you assign interfaces using any of the other VLAN commands such as VLAN Static Table page 3 116 or VLAN Static Membership page 3 118 these interfaces will admit traffic of any protocol type into the associated VLAN e When a frame enters a port that has been assigned to a protoc
66. VLAN Groups Configuring VLAN Interfaces Show VLAN Commands Private VLAN Commands Protocol VLAN Commands GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands Priority Commands Priority Commands Layer 2 Default CoS Priority Levels Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 Mapping IP Precedence to CoS Values Mapping IP DSCP to CoS Values Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping Commands IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 Static Multicast Routing Commands IP Interface Commands Troubleshooting Chart 4 69 4 71 4 74 4 76 4 78 4 87 4 87 4 98 4 101 4 108 4 111 4 112 4 117 4 123 4 125 4 135 4 136 4 138 4 139 4 146 4 147 4 148 4 149 4 149 4 153 4 172 4 173 4 175 4 181 4 182 4 183 4 187 4 191 4 191 4 195 4 197 4 199 4 201 4 204 4 204 4 208 4 211 4 213 B 1 Figures Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 3 21 Figure 3 22 Figure 3 23 Figure 3 24 Figure 3 25 Figure 3 26 Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 Figure 3 29 Figure 3 30 Figure 3 31 Figure 3 32 Figure 3 33 Figure 3 34 Figure 3 35 Figure 3 36 Figure 3 37 Figure 3 38 Figure 3 39 Figure 3 40 Figure 3 41 Figure 3 42 Home Page Front Panel Indicators System Information Switch Information Displaying B
67. a port to participate in multiple VLANs End stations can belong to multiple VLANs e Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unaware devices e Priority tagging Assigning Ports to VLANs Before enabling VLANs for the switch you must first assign each port to the VLAN group s in which it will participate By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then assign ports on the other VLAN aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN s either manually or dynamically using GVRP However if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port 3 110 VLAN Configuration lt 3 Note VLAN tagged frames can pass through VLAN aware or VLAN unaware network interconnection devices but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end node host that does not support VLAN tagging tagged frames i i s Ip VA VLAN Aware VU VLAN Unaware tagged untagged frames ______ frames WW e o VA VA VU Ve ie VLAN Classification When the switch receives a fra
68. a specific IP address Default Setting None Command Mode Standard ACL Command Usage e New rules are appended to the end of the list e Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and then compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned Example This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10 1 1 21 and another rule for the address range 168 92 16 x 168 92 31 x using a bitmask Console config std acl permit host 10 1 1 21 Console config std acl permit 168 92 16 0 255 255 240 0 Console config std acl Related Commands access list ip 4 88 4 89 4 Command Line Interface permit deny Extended ACL This command adds a rule to an Extended IP ACL The rule sets a filter condition for packets with specific source or destination IP addresses protocol types source or destination protocol ports or TCP control codes Use the no form to remove a rule Syntax no permit deny protocol number udp any source address bitmask host source any destination address bitmask host destination precedence precedence tos tos dscp dscp source port sport bitmask destination port dport po
69. access to a switch Table 4 28 RADIUS Client Commands Command Function Mode Page radius server host Specifies the RADIUS server GC 4 71 radius server port Sets the RADIUS server network port GC 4 71 radius server key Sets the RADIUS encryption key GC 4 72 radius server retransmit Sets the number of retries GC 4 72 show radius server Shows the current RADIUS settings PE 4 73 radius server host This command specifies the RADIUS server Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server host host_ip_ address no radius server host host_ip_address IP address of server Default Setting 10 1 0 1 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server host 192 168 1 25 Console config radius server port This command sets the RADIUS server network port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server port port_number no radius server port port_number RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 4 71 4 Command Line Interface Default Setting 1812 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server port 181 Console config radius server key This command sets the RADIUS encryption key Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server key key_string no radius server key key_string Encryption key used to authenticate logon a
70. acl permit 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 4 89 Console config std acl deny 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 Console config std acl exit Console config access list ip mask precedence in 4 92 Console config ip mask acl mask host any 4 93 Console config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any Console config ip mask acl 3 61 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring a MAC ACL Mask This mask defines the fields to check in the packet header Command Usage You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port Command Attributes e Source Destination MAC Use Any to match any address Host to specify the host address for a single node or MAC to specify a range of addresses Options Any Host MAC Default Any e Source Destination MAC Bitmask Address of rule must match this bitmask VID Bitmask VLAN ID of rule must match this bitmask Ethernet Type Bitmask Ethernet type of rule must match this bitmask e Packet Format Bitmask A packet format must be specified in the rule Web Configure the mask to match the required rules in the MAC ingress or egress ACLs Set the mask to check for any source or destination address a host address or an address range Use a bitmask to search for specific VLAN ID s or Ethernet type s Or check for rules where a packet format was specified Then click Add ACL Mask MAC Configuration Mask MAC Ingress Table Source MAC
71. admin ctos aes128 cbc hmac md5 stoc aes128 cbc hmac md5 Console Table 4 15 show ssh display description Field Description Session The session number Range 0 3 Version The Secure Shell version number State The authentication negotiation state Values Negotiation Started Authentication Started Session Started Username The user name of the client Encryption The encryption method is automatically negotiated between the client and server Options for SSHv1 5 include DES 3DES and server to client stoc aes128 cbc hmac sha1 aes192 cbc hmac sha1 aes256 cbc hmac sha1 3des cbc hmac sha1 blowfish cbc hmac sha1 aes128 cbc hmac md5 aes192 cbc hmac md5 aes256 cbc hmac md5 3des cbc hmac md5 blowfish cbc hmac md5 Terminology DES Data Encryption Standard 56 bit key 3DES Triple DES Uses three iterations of DES 112 bit key aes Advanced Encryption Standard 160 or 224 bit key blowfish Blowfish 32 448 bit key cbc cypher block chaining sha Secure Hash Algorithm 1 160 bit hashes md5 Message Digest algorithm number 5 128 bit hashes Options for SSHv2 0 can include different algorithms for the client to server ctos 4 Command Line Interface show public key Use this command to show the public key for the specified user or for the host Syntax show public key user username host username Name of an SSH user Range 1 8 characters Default Setting Shows all pub
72. admin key page 4 144 is not set through the CLI when a channel group is formed i e it has a null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key used by the interfaces that joined the group lacp admin key as described in this section and on page 4 143 Command Attributes Set Port Actor This menu sets the local side of an aggregate link i e the ports on this switch e Port Port number Range 1 24 1 48 e System Priority LACP system priority is used to determine link aggregation group LAG membership and to identify this device to other switches during LAG negotiations Range 0 65535 Default 32768 Ports must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG System priority is combined with the switch s MAC address to form the LAG identifier This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP negotiations with other systems e Admin Key The LACP administration key must be set to the same value for ports that belong to the same LAG Range 0 65535 Default 0 Port Priority If a link goes down LACP port priority is used to select a backup link Range 0 65535 Default 32768 Set Port Partner This menu sets the remote side of an aggregate link i e the ports on the attached device The command attributes have the same meaning as those used for the port actor However configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its admini
73. and RMON port statistics 3 84 3 Configuring the Switch Table 3 2 Switch Main Menu Menu Description Page Address Table 3 88 Static Addresses Displays entries for interface address or VLAN 3 88 Dynamic Addresses Displays or edits static entries in the Address Table 3 89 Address Aging Sets timeout for dynamically learned entries 3 91 Spanning Tree 3 91 STA 3 91 Information Displays STA values used for the bridge 3 92 Configuration Configures global bridge settings for STA RSTP and MSTP 3 95 Port Information Displays individual port settings for STA 3 99 Trunk Information Displays individual trunk settings for STA 3 99 Port Configuration Configures individual port settings for STA 3 102 Trunk Configuration Configures individual trunk settings for STA 3 102 MSTP 3 104 VLAN Configuration Configures priority and VLANs for a spanning tree instance 3 104 Port Information Displays port settings for a specified MST instance 3 107 Trunk Information Displays trunk settings for a specified MST instance 3 107 Port Configuration Configures port settings for a specified MST instance 3 108 Trunk Configuration Configures trunk settings for a specified MST instance 3 108 VLAN 3 110 802 1Q VLAN 3 110 GVRP Status Enables GVRP VLAN registration protocol 3 113 Basic Information Displays information on the VLAN type supported by this switch 3 113 Current
74. as it is powered on To automatically configure the switch by communicating with BOOTP or DHCP address allocation servers on the network complete the following steps 1 From the Global Configuration mode prompt type interface vlan 1 to access the interface configuration mode Press lt Enter gt 2 Atthe interface configuration mode prompt use one of the following commands To obtain IP settings via DHCP type ip address dhcp and press lt Enter gt e To obtain IP settings via BOOTP type ip address bootp and press lt Enter gt 3 Type end to return to the Privileged Exec mode Press lt Enter gt 4 Type ip dhcp restart to begin broadcasting service requests Press lt Enter gt 2 Initial Configuration 5 Wait a few minutes and then check the IP configuration settings by typing the show ip interface command Press lt Enter gt 6 Then save your configuration changes by typing copy running config startup config Enter the startup file name and press lt Enter gt Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address dhcp Console config if end Console ip dhcp restart Console show ip interface IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode User specified Console copy running config startup config Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Ena
75. attempts to access a switch port 2 Switch sends client an identity request 3 Client sends back identity information 4 Switch forwards this to authentication server 5 Authentication server challenges client 6 Client responds with proper credentials 7 Authentication server approves access 8 Switch grants client access to this port 3 43 3 Configuring the Switch The operation of 802 1x on the switch requires the following The switch must have an IP address assigned RADIUS authentication must be enabled on the switch and the IP address of the RADIUS server specified Each switch port that will be used must be set to dot1x Auto mode Each client that needs to be authenticated must have dot1x client software installed and properly configured The RADIUS server and 802 1x client support EAP The switch only supports EAPOL in order to pass the EAP packets from the server to the client The RADIUS server and client also have to support the same EAP authentication type MD5 Some clients have native support in Windows otherwise the dot1x client must support it Displaying 802 1x Global Settings The dot1x protocol includes global parameters that control the client authentication process that runs between the client and the switch i e authenticator as well as the client identity lookup process that runs between the switch and authentication server These parameters are described in this section Comma
76. authorized to access the network The port will drop any incoming frames with a source MAC address that is unknown or has been previously learned from another port If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message Table 4 30 Port Security Commands Command Function Mode Page port security Configures a secure port IC 4 76 mac address table static Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN GC 4 150 show mac address table Displays entries in the bridge forwarding database PE 4 151 port security This command enables or configures port security Use the no form without any keywords to disable port security Use the no form with the appropriate keyword to restore the default settings for a response to security violation or for the maximum number of allowed addresses Syntax port security action shutdown trap trap and shutdown max mac count address count no port security action max mac count action Response to take when port security is violated shutdown Disable port only trap Issue SNMP trap message only trap and shutdown Issue SNMP trap message and disable port max mac count address count The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port Range 0 20 Default Setting Status Disabled Action None M
77. bottom of the page to update the screen Port Statistics Interface G Pon 1 Trunk Query Interface Statistics Received Octets 15020 Received Unicast Packets 0 Received Multicast 177 Recewed Broadcast 0 Packets Packets Received Discarded 0 Recewed Unknown o Packets Packets Received Errors O Transmit Octets 168087 Transmit Multicast Transmit Unicast Packets 0 Packets 2420 Transmit Broadcast 7 Transmit Discarded D Packets Packets Transmit Errors 0 xl Etherlike Statistics Alignment Errors O Late Collisions FCS Errors D Excessive Collisions Single Collision Frames Internal MAC Transmit Errors Multiple Collision Frames SQE Test Errors D Carrier Sense Errors O Frames Too Long Deferred Transmissions Internal MAC Receive Errors o lolol o lolo RMON Statistics Drop Events DlJabbers ol Received Bytes 188155 Collisions 0 Received Frames O64 Bytes Frames 2249 Broadcast Frames A 65 127 Bytes Frames 459 Multicast Frames 2672 128 255 Bytes Frames 11 CRC Alignment Errors 0256 511 Bytes Frames 0 Undersize Frames 01512 1023 Bytes Frames 0 Oversize Frames 0 1024 1518 Bytes Frames a Fragments 0 Refresh Figure 3 50 Port Statistics le 3 87 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example shows statistics for port 13 Console show interfaces counters ethernet 1 13 4 134 Ethernet 1 13 Iftable s
78. config if lacp actor admin key 120 Console config if lacp actor port priority 512 Console config if end Console show lacp sysid 4 145 Channel Group System Priority System MAC Address 4 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 2 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 3 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 4 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 5 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 6 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 Console show lacp 1 internal 4 145 Channel group 1 Oper Key 120 Admin Key 120 Console 3 75 3 Configuring the Switch Displaying LACP Port Counters You can display statistics for LACP protocol messages Table 3 6 LACP Port Counters Field Description LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group Marker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group Marker Received Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group LACPDUs Unknown Pkts Number of frames received that either 1 Carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain an unknown PDU or 2 are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address but do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type LACPDUs Illegal Pkts Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype Web Click Port LACP Port Counters Information Select a member port to display the
79. corresponding information LACP Port Counters Information Member Port 1 z Trunk ID 2 LACPDUs Sent __ 307 LACPDUs Receive 296 Marker Sent 0 Marker Receive o Marker Unknown Pkts 0 Marker Illegal Pkts 0 Figure 3 44 LACP Port Counters Information CLI The following example displays LACP counters for port channel 1 Console show lacp 1 counters 4 145 Channel group 1 LACPDUs Sent 21 LACPDUs Received 21 Marker Sent 0 Marker Received 0 LACPDUs Unknown Pkts 0 LACPDUs Illegal Pkts 0 Console 3 76 Port Configuration 3 Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the local side of an link aggregation Table 3 7 LACP Internal Configuration Information Field Description Oper Key Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port Admin Key Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port LACPDUs Internal Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU information LACP System Priority LACP system priority assigned to this port channel LACP Port Priority LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group Admin State Administrative or operational values of the actor s state parameters Oper State Expired The actor s receive machine is in the expired state Defaulted The actor s
80. either during initial connection or manually entered into the known host file However you do not need to configure the client s keys 2 The SSH server supports up to four client sessions The maximum number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions Generating the Host Key Pair A host public private key pair is used to provide secure communications between an SSH client and the switch After generating this key pair you must provide the host public key to SSH clients and import the client s public key to the switch as described in the proceeding section Command Usage Field Attributes e Public Key of Host Key The public key for the host RSA Version 1 The first field indicates the size of the host key e g 1024 the second field is the encoded public exponent e g 65537 and the last string is the encoded modulus DSA Version 2 The first field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard DSS The last string is the encoded modulus e Host Key Type The key type used to generate the host key pair i e public and private keys Range RSA Version 1 DSA Version 2 Both Default RSA The SSH server uses RSA or DSA for key exchange when the client first establishes a connection with the switch and then negotiates with the client to select either DES 56 bit or 3DES 168 bit for data encryption Save Host Key from Memor
81. enabled for ports connected to an end node device Default Disabled Migration If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can also use the Protocol Migration button to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format RSTP or STP compatible to send on the selected interfaces Default Disabled 3 103 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Spanning Tree STA Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Modify the required attributes then click Apply STA Port Configuration Priority Path Cost Admin Edge Port 0 240 1 200000000 84 Link Type Migration Trunk Fast Forwarding 1 M Enable Forwarding 128 100000 Auto z M Enabled rc Enabled M Enable Discarding 128 10000 Auto z M Enabled jo Bima M Enable Discarding 128 10000 Auto j M Enabled I Enabled 4 M Enable Discarding 128 10000 Auto E M Enabled m Enabled L i 5 M Enable Discarding 128 10000 Auto zji M Enabled E Enabled zj Port Spanning Tree STA State w n Figure 3 57 STA Port Configuration CLI This example sets STA attributes for port 7 Console config interface ethernet 1 7 4 125 Console config if no spanning tree spanning disabled 4 163 Console config if spanning tree port priority 0 4 164 Console config if spanning tree cost 50 4 164 Co
82. follows Notes Select the appropriate serial port COM port 1 or COM port 2 Set to any of the following baud rates 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Note Set to 9600 baud if want to view all the system initialization messages Set the data format to 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity Set flow control to none Set the emulation mode to VT100 When using HyperTerminal select Terminal keys not Windows keys 1 When using HyperTerminal with Microsoft Windows 2000 make sure that you have Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later installed Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 fixes the problem of arrow keys not functioning in HyperTerminal s VT100 emulation See www microsoft com for information on Windows 2000 service packs 2 Refer to Line Commands on page 4 11 for a complete description of console configuration options 3 Once you have set up the terminal correctly the console login screen will be displayed For a description of how to use the CLI see Using the Command Line Interface on page 4 1 For a list of all the CLI commands and detailed information on using the CLI refer to Command Groups on page 4 10 Basic Configuration 2 Remote Connections Prior to accessing the switch s onboard agent via a network connection you must first configure it with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway using a console connection DHCP or BOOTP protocol The IP address for this switch is obtained
83. gateway if you are managing the switch from a different IP subnet For example Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 10 1 0 254 255 255 255 0 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 10 1 0 254 If your corporate network is connected to another network outside your office or to the Internet you need to apply for a registered IP address However if you are attached to an isolated network then you can use any IP address that matches the network segment to which you are attached After you configure the switch with an IP address you can open a Telnet session by performing these steps 1 From the remote host enter the Telnet command and the IP address of the device you want to access 2 Atthe prompt enter the user name and system password The CLI will display the Vty n prompt for the administrator to show that you are using privileged access mode i e Privileged Exec or Vty n gt for the guest to show that you are using normal access mode i e Normal Exec where n indicates the number of the current Telnet session 3 Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks 4 When finished exit the session with the quit or exit command After entering the Telnet command the login screen displays Username admin Password CLI session with the 44 10 100 1000 ports 4 Gigabit Combo ports L2 L4 managed standalone switch is opened To en
84. i e RSTP or STP compatible Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree protocol migration Console config if 4 169 4 Command Line Interface show spanning tree This command shows the configuration for the common spanning tree CST or for an instance within the multiple spanning tree MST Syntax show spanning tree interface mst instance_id interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 e instance_id Instance identifier of the multiple spanning tree Range 0 4094 no leading zeroes Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Use the show spanning tree command with no parameters to display the spanning tree configuration for the switch for the Common Spanning Tree CST and for every interface in the tree e Use the show spanning tree interface command to display the spanning tree configuration for an interface within the Common Spanning Tree CST Use the show spanning tree mst instance_id command to display the spanning tree configuration for an instance within the Multiple Spanning Tree MST e For a description of the items displayed under Spanning tree information see Configuring Global Settings on page 3 95 For a description of the items displayed for specific interfaces see Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 99
85. in steps of 16 Default Setting 128 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command defines the priority for the use of an interface in the multiple spanning tree If the path cost for all interfaces on a switch are the same the 4 168 Spanning Tree Commands 4 interface with the highest priority that is lowest value will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree Where more than one interface is assigned the highest priority the interface with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree mst 1 port priority 0 Console config if Related Commands spanning tree mst cost 4 167 spanning tree protocol migration This command re checks the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interface Syntax spanning tree protocol migration interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can also use the spanning tree protocol migration command at any time to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interfaces
86. interface interface This command configures an interface type and enter interface configuration mode Use the no form to remove a trunk Syntax interface interface no interface port channel channel id interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 e vlan vian id Range 1 4094 Default Setting None 4 125 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Global Configuration Example To specify port 24 enter the following command Console config interface ethernet 1 24 Console config if description This command adds a description to an interface Use the no form to remove the description Syntax description string no description string Comment or a description to help you remember what is attached to this interface Range 1 64 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example The following example adds a description to port 24 Console config interface ethernet 1 24 Console config if description RD SW 3 Console config if speed duplex This command configures the speed and duplex mode of a given interface when autonegotiation is disabled Use the no form to restore the default Syntax speed duplex 1000full 100full 100half 10full 10half no speed duplex 1000full Forces 1000 Mbps full duplex operation 100full Forces
87. is the device that asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups they wish to join or to which they already belong The elected querier will be the device with the lowest IP address in the subnetwork Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP A protocol through which hosts can register with their local router for multicast services If there is more than one multicast switch router on a given subnetwork one of the devices is made the querier and assumes responsibility for keeping track of group membership In Band Management Management of the network from a station attached directly to the network IP Multicast Filtering A process whereby this switch can pass multicast traffic along to participating hosts IP Precedence The Type of Service ToS octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control packets to lowest priority for routine traffic The eight values are mapped one to one to the Class of Service categories by default but may be configured differently to suit the requirements for specific network applications Layer 2 Data Link layer in the ISO 7 Layer Data Communications Protocol This is related directly to the hardware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on MAC addresses Link Aggregation See Port Trunk Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Allows ports to automatically negotiate a tr
88. is displayed Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This shows that traffic entering Port 1 that matches the specifications for protocol group 1 will be mapped to VLAN 2 Console show interfaces protocol vlan protocol group Port ProtocolGroup ID Vlan ID Eth 1 1 T vlan2 Console 4 186 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands 4 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across the network This section describes how to enable GVRP for individual interfaces and globally for the switch as well as how to display default configuration settings for the Bridge Extension MIB Table 4 58 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands Command Function Mode Page bridge ext gvrp Enables GVRP globally for the switch GC 4 187 show bridge ext Shows the global bridge extension configuration PE 4 188 switchportgvrp Enables GVRP for an interface Je T488 switchport forbidden vlan Configures forbidden VLANs for an interface IC 4 180 show gvrp configuration Displays GVRP configuration for the selected interface NE PE 4 189 garp timer Sets the GARP timer for the selected function IC 4 189 show garp timer Shows the GARP timer for the selected function NE PE 4 190 bridge ext gvrp This command enables GVRP globally for the switch Use the no form to disable it
89. is permanent Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The static address for a host device can be assigned to a specific port within a specific VLAN Use this command to add static addresses to the MAC Address Table Static addresses have the following characteristics e Static addresses will not be removed from the address table when a given interface link is down e Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table A static address cannot be learned on another port until the address is removed with the no form of this command Example Console config mac address table static 00 e0 29 94 34 de interface ethernet 1 1 vlan 1 delete on reset 4 150 Address Table Commands 4 clear mac address table dynamic This command removes any learned entries from the forwarding database and clears the transmit and receive counts for any static or system configured entries Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console clear mac address table dynamic show mac address table This command shows classes of entries in the bridge forwarding database Syntax show mac address table address mac address mask interface interface vlan vian id sort address vlan interface mac address MAC address e mask Bits to mat
90. is restarted it will always run the Power On Self Test It will also retain all configuration information stored in non volatile memory by the copy running config startup config command Default Setting None 4 22 General Commands 4 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command resets the entire system Example This example shows how to reset the switch Console reload System will be restarted continue lt y n gt y end This command returns to Privileged Exec mode Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Interface Configuration Line Configuration VLAN Database Configuration and Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration Example This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Interface Configuration mode Console config if end Console exit This command returns to the previous configuration mode or exit the configuration program Default Setting None Command Mode Any Example This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Global Configuration mode and then quit the CLI session Console config exit Console exit Press ENTER to start session User Access Verification Username 4 23 A Command Line Interface quit This command exits the configuration program Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The quit and exit commands can bo
91. lacp 1 internal Channel group 1 Oper Key 4 Admin Key 0 Eth 1 1 LACPDUs Internal 30 sec LACP System Priority 32768 LACP Port Priority 32768 Admin Key 4 Oper Key 4 Admin State defaulted aggregation long timeout LACP activity Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity Table 4 47 show lacp internal display description Field Description Oper Key Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port Admin Key Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port LACPDUs Internal Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU information LACP System Priority LACP system priority assigned to this port channel LACP Port Priority LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group Admin State Administrative or operational values of the actor s state parameters Oper State e Expired The actor s receive machine is in the expired state Defaulted The actor s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner information administratively configured for the partner Distributing If false distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled i e distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Collecting Collection of incoming frames on this l
92. list mac Shows CoS value mapped to an access list for an interface PE 4 109 match access list mac Changes the 802 1p priority the priority of a frame IC 4 110 matching the defined rule i e also called packet marking show marking Displays the current configuration for packet marking PE 4 100 access list mac This command adds a MAC access list and enters MAC ACL configuration mode Use the no form to remove the specified ACL Syntax no access list mac ac l_name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage An egress ACL must contain all deny rules When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list To create an ACL you must add at least one rule to the list To remove a rule use the no permit or no deny command followed by the exact text of a previously configured rule e An ACL can contain up to 32 rules 4 101 4 Command Line Interface Example Console config access list mac jerry Console config mac acl Related Commands permit deny 4 102 mac access group 4 107 show mac access list 4 103 permit deny MAC ACL This command adds a rule to a MAC ACL The rule filters packets matching a specified MAC source or destination address i e physical layer address or Ethernet protocol ty
93. login GC 4 26 enable password Sets a password to control access to the Privileged Exec level GC 4 27 username This command adds named users requires authentication at login specifies or changes a user s password or specify that no password is required or specifies or changes a user s access level Use the no form to remove a user name Syntax username name access level eve nopassword password 0 7 password no username name name The name of the user Maximum length 8 characters case sensitive Maximum users 16 e access level evel Specifies the user level The device has two predefined privilege levels 0 Normal Exec 15 Privileged Exec nopassword No password is required for this user to log in 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password password password The authentication password for the user Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting e The default access level is Normal Exec e The factory defaults for the user names and passwords are Table 4 10 Default Login Settings username access level password guest 0 guest admin 15 admin 4 26 System Management Commands 4 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when dow
94. must have the same LACP system priority e Ports must have the same port admin key Ethernet Interface e Ifthe port channel admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed i e it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group e However if the port channel admin key is set then the port admin key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group e Ifa link goes down LACP port priority is used to select the backup link channel group This command adds a port to a trunk Use the no form to remove a port from a trunk Syntax channel group channel id no channel group channel id Trunk index Range 1 6 Default Setting The current port will be added to this trunk Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e When configuring static trunks the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard e Use no channel group to remove a port group from a trunk Use no interfaces port channel to remove a trunk from the switch Example The following example creates trunk 1 and then adds port 11 Console config interface port channel 1 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if channel group 1 Console config if 4 140 Link Aggregation Commands
95. no mst instance_id vlan vian range e instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 vian range Range of VLANs Range 1 4094 Default Setting none Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage e Use this command to group VLANs into spanning tree instances MSTP generates a unique spanning tree for each instance This provides multiple pathways across the network thereby balancing the traffic load preventing wide scale disruption when a bridge node in a single instance fails and allowing for faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree MSTI 0 that connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region This switch supports up to 58 instances You should try to group VLANs which cover the same general area of your network However remember that you must configure all bridges within the same MSTI Region page 4 161 with the same set of instances and the same instance on each bridge with the same set of VLANs Also note that RSTP treats each MSTI region as a single node connecting all regions to the Common Spanning Tree Example Console config mstp mst 1 vlan 2 5 Console config mstp 4 160 Spanning Tree Commands 4 mst priority This command configures the priority of a spanning tree instance Use the no form to restore the default Syntax mst instance_id priority priority no mst instance_i
96. only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet e RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level for each user name and password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server e You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you enter authentication enable radius tacacs local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted on the TACACS server If the TACACS server is not available the local user name and password is checked Example Console config authentication enable radius Console config Related Commands enable password sets the password for changing command modes 4 27 4 70 Authentication Commands A RADIUS Client Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require management
97. precedence value Range 0 7 cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7 Default Setting The list below shows the default priority mapping Table 4 63 Mapping IP Precedence to CoS Values IP Precedence Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CoS Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority IP Precedence values are mapped to default Class of Service values on a one to one basis according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard and then subsequently mapped to the eight hardware priority queues This command sets the IP Precedence for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to map IP precedence value 1 to CoS value 0 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip precedence 1 cos 0 Console config if 4 199 4 Command Line Interface map ip dscp Global Configuration This command enables IP DSCP mapping i e Differentiated Services Code Point mapping Use the no form to disable IP DSCP mapping Syntax no map ip dscp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled Enabling o
98. priority 4096 4 161 Console config mstp mst 1 vlan 1 5 4 160 Console config mst 3 106 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 Displaying Interface Settings for MSTP The MSTP Port Information and MSTP Trunk Information pages display the current status of ports and trunks in the selected MST instance Field Attributes e MST Instance ID Instance identifier to configure Range 0 4094 Default 0 The other attributes are described under Displaying Interface Settings page 3 99 Web Click Spanning Tree MSTP Port Information or Trunk Information Select the required MST instance to display the current spanning tree values MSTP Port Information MST Instance ID 0 7 Portl STA Forward Designated Designated Designated Oper Oper Port Role Trunk Status Transitions Cost Bridge Port Link Type Edge Port Member 1 Forwarding 1 200000 32768 0 0030F1552000 128 24 Poto Disabled Root Point to 2 Discarding 0 200000 32768 0 0000E9313131 128 2 Point Enabled Disabled 3 Discarding 0 200000 32768 0 0000E9313131 128 3 Po Enabled Disabled a Point to 4 Discarding 0 200000 32768 0 0000E9313131 128 4 Point Enabled Disabled Point to 5 Discarding 0 200000 32768 0 0000E 9313131 128 5 P Enabled Disabled oint xl Figure 3 59 MSTP Port Information CLI This displays STA settings for instance 0 followed by settings for each port The settings for instan
99. queues You can set the default priority for each interface the relative weight of each queue and the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch s priority queues Table 4 59 Priority Commands Command Groups Function Page Priority Layer 2 Configures default priority for untagged frames sets queue weights 4 191 and maps class of service tags to hardware queues Priority Layer 3 and 4 Maps TCP ports IP precedence tags or IP DSCP tags to class of 4 197 service values Priority Commands Layer 2 Table 4 60 Priority Commands Layer 2 Command Function Mode Page queue mode Sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted GC 4 192 Round Robin WRR switchport priority default Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames IC 4 193 queue bandwidth Assigns round robin weights to the priority queues IC 4 193 queue cos map Assigns class of service values to the priority queues IC 4 194 show queue mode Shows the current queue mode PE 4 195 show queue bandwidth Shows round robin weights assigned to the priority queues PE 4 196 show queue cos map Shows the class of service map PE 4 196 show interfaces switchport Displays the administrative and operational status of an PE 4 135 interface 4 191 4 Command Line Interface queue mode This command sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round Robin WRR for the class of service CoS priority queue
100. settings 3 104 4 151 interface settings 4 151 multicast filtering 3 139 4 202 multicast groups 3 144 4 205 displaying 4 205 static 3 144 4 203 4 205 multicast services configuring 3 145 4 203 displaying 3 144 4 205 multicast static router port 3 143 4 209 P password line 4 13 passwords 2 4 administrator setting 3 30 4 26 path cost 3 93 3 100 method 3 97 4 156 STA 3 93 3 100 4 156 port authentication 3 43 4 78 port priority configuring 3 125 4 189 default ingress 3 125 4 191 STA 3 101 4 162 port security configuring 3 41 4 76 port statistics 3 84 4 132 ports autonegotiation 3 67 4 125 broadcast storm threshold 3 80 4 129 capabilities 3 67 4 126 configuring 3 64 4 123 duplex mode 3 67 4 124 flow control 3 67 4 127 forced selection on combo ports 3 66 4 128 mirroring 3 82 4 134 speed 3 67 4 124 priority default port ingress 3 125 4 191 problems troubleshooting B 1 protocol migration 3 103 4 167 Q queue weights 3 129 4 192 R RADIUS logon authentication 3 31 4 71 rate limits setting 3 83 4 136 restarting the system 3 25 4 22 RSTP 3 91 4 152 global configuration 3 92 4 152 S Secure Shell 3 36 4 34 configuration 3 36 4 37 Secure Shell configuration 4 37 serial port configuring 4 11 Simple Network Management Protocol See SNMP SNMP 3 28 community string 3 28 4 112 enabling traps 3 29 4 115 filtering IP addresses 3 50 trap manager 3 29 4 114 software dis
101. switch complete the following steps 1 From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type interface vlan 1 to access the interface configuration mode Press lt Enter gt 2 Type ip address ijp address netmask where ip address is the switch IP address and netmask is the network mask for the network Press lt Enter gt 3 Type exit to return to the global configuration mode prompt Press lt Enter gt 4 Tosetthe IP address of the default gateway for the network to which the switch belongs type ip default gateway gateway where gateway is the IP address of the default gateway Press lt Enter gt Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 5 255 255 255 0 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 192 168 1 254 Console config Dynamic Configuration If you select the bootp or dhcp option IP will be enabled but will not function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received You therefore need to use the ip dhcp restart command to start broadcasting service requests Requests will be sent periodically in an effort to obtain IP configuration information BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP address subnet mask and default gateway If the bootp or dhcp option is saved to the startup config file step 6 then the switch will start broadcasting service requests as soon
102. switchport broadcast packet rate clear counters show interfaces status show interfaces counters show interfaces switchport Mirror Port Commands port monitor show port monitor Rate Limit Commands rate limit Link Aggregation Commands channel group lacp lacp system priority lacp admin key Ethernet Interface 4 111 4 111 4 111 4 112 4 112 4 113 4 113 4 114 4 115 4 115 4 117 4 117 4 118 4 118 4 119 4 120 4 121 4 122 4 123 4 123 4 124 4 123 4 123 4 124 4 124 4 125 4 126 4 127 4 128 4 128 4 129 4 130 4 131 4 132 4 133 4 134 4 134 4 135 4 136 4 136 4 137 4 138 4 139 4 140 4 141 Contents lacp admin key Port Channel 4 142 lacp port priority 4 142 show lacp 4 143 Address Table Commands 4 147 mac address table static 4 148 clear mac address table dynamic 4 149 show mac address table 4 149 mac address table aging time 4 150 show mac address table aging time 4 150 Spanning Tree Commands 4 151 spanning tree 4 152 spanning tree mode 4 152 spanning tree forward time 4 153 spanning tree hello time 4 154 spanning tree max age 4 155 spanning tree priority 4 155 spanning tree pathcost method 4 156 spanning tree transmission limit 4 157 spanning tree mst configuration 4 157 mst vian 4 158 mst priority 4 159 name 4 159 revision 4 160 max hops 4 161 spanning tree spanning disabled 4 161 spanning tree cost 4 162 spanning tree port priority 4 162 spanning tree edge port 4 163 spanning tree portfast 4 1
103. the DSCP field source port Check the protocol source port field e destination port Check the protocol destination port field e port bitmask Protocol port of rule must match this bitmask Range 0 65535 control flag Check the field for control flags e flag bitmask Control flags of rule must match this bitmask Range 0 63 Default Setting None 4 93 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode IP Mask Command Usage e Packets crossing a port are checked against all the rules in the ACL until a match is found The order in which these packets are checked is determined by the mask and not the order in which the ACL rules were entered e First create the required ACLs and ingress or egress masks before mapping an ACL to an interface e If you enter dscp you cannot enter tos or precedence You can enter both tos and precedence without dscp e Masks that include an entry for a Layer 4 protocol source port or destination port can only be applied to packets with a header length of exactly five bytes Example This example creates an IP ingress mask with two rules Each rule is checked in order of precedence to look for a match in the ACL entries The first entry matching a mask is applied to the inbound packet Console Console Console Console config access list ip mask precedence in config ip mask acl mask host any config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any config ip mask acl This
104. the RADIUS or TACACS software installed on those servers Example Console config line login local Console config line Related Commands username 4 26 password 4 13 password This command specifies the password for a line Use the no form to remove the password Syntax password 0 7 password no password 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password password Character string that specifies the line password Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting No password is specified Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt You can use the password thresh command to set the 4 13 4 Command Line Interface number of times a user can enter an incorrect password before the system terminates the line connection and returns the terminal to the idle state The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example Console config line password 0 secret Console config line Related Commands login 4 12 pas
105. the host key from RAM PE 4 39 ip ssh save host key Saves the host key from RAM to flash memory PE 4 40 disconnect Terminates a line connection PE 4 18 show ip ssh Displays the status of the SSH server and the configured values PE 4 40 for authentication timeout and retries show ssh Displays the status of current SSH sessions PE 4 41 show public key Shows the public key for the specified user or for the host PE 4 42 show users Shows SSH users including privilege level and public key type PE 4 61 4 34 System Management Commands 4 The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key authentication If password authentication is specified by the SSH client then the password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS remote authentication server as specified by the authentication login command on page 4 69 If public key authentication is specified by the client then you must configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the following section Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password authentication you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch and enable the SSH server To use the SSH server complete these steps 1 Generate a Host Key Pair Use the ip ssh crypto host key generate command to create a host public private key pair 2 Provide Host Public Key to Clients Many SSH client programs automatically
106. time at the Earth s prime meridian zero degrees longitude To display a time corresponding to your local time you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east before or west after of UTC Command Attributes Current Time Displays the current time Name Assigns a name to the time zone Range 1 29 characters Hours 0 12 The number of hours before after UTC Minutes 0 59 The number of minutes before after UTC Direction Configures the time zone to be before east or after west UTC Web Select SNTP Clock Time Zone Set the offset for your time zone relative to the UTC and click Apply Clock Time Zone Current Time Jan 1 06 04 04 2001 Name Dhaka Hours 0 12 Minutes 0 89 Direction C before utc after utc Figure 3 18 Clock Time Zone 3 27 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example shows how to set the time zone for the system clock Console config clock timezone Dhaka hours 6 minute 0 after UTC 4 55 Console Simple Network Management Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a communication protocol designed specifically for managing devices on a network Equipment commonly managed with SNMP includes switches routers and host computers SNMP is typically used to configure these devices for proper operation in a network environment as well as to monitor them to evaluate performance or detect potential p
107. to remove the configuration Syntax no ip igmp snooping vlan vian id mrouter interface e vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 e interface e ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 Default Setting No static multicast router ports are configured Command Mode Global Configuration 4 211 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your router you can manually configure that interface to join all the current multicast groups Example The following shows how to configure port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1 11 Console config show ip igmp snooping mrouter This command displays information on statically configured and dynamically learned multicast router ports Syntax show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan vian id vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 Default Setting Displays multicast router ports for all configured VLANs Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Multicast router port types displayed include Static or Dynamic Example The following shows that port 11 in VLAN 1 is attached to a multicast router Console show ip igmp s
108. to add to the Host IP List Web Click System Logs Remote Logs To add an IP address to the Host IP List type the new IP address in the Host IP Address box and then click Add To delete an IP address click the entry in the Host IP List and then click Remove Remote Logs Remote Log Status Disebied Logging Facility 16 23 E Logging Trap 0 7 IF Host IP Address Current New Host IP List none lt lt Add Host IP Address Remove Figure 3 13 Remote Logs 3 21 3 Configuring the Switch CLI Enter the syslog server host IP address choose the facility type and set the logging trap Console config logging host 10 1 0 9 4 45 Console config logging facility 23 4 45 Console config logging trap 4 4 46 Console config logging trap Console config Console show logging trap 4 47 Syslog logging Enabled REMOTELOG status Disabled REMOTELOG facility type local use 7 REMOTELOG level type Warning conditions REMOTELOG server ip address 10 1 0 9 REMOTELOG server ip address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server ip address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server ip address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server ip address 0 0 0 0 Console Displaying Log Messages Use the Logs page to scroll through the logged system and event messages The switch can store up to 2048 log entries in temporary random access memory RAM i e memory flushed on power reset and up t
109. use Factory_Default_Config cfg as the source to copy from the factory default configuration file but you cannot use it as the destination To replace the startup configuration you must use startup config as the destination The Boot ROM and Loader cannot be uploaded or downloaded from the TFTP server You must follow the instructions in the release notes for new firmware or contact your distributor for help e For information on specifying an https certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 35 For information on configuring the switch to use HTTPS SSL for a secure connection see ip http secure server on page 4 31 Example The following example shows how to upload the configuration settings to a file on the TFTP server Console copy file tftp Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode lt 1 2 gt 1 Source file name startup TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 99 Destination file name startup 01 TFTP completed Success Console The following example shows how to copy the running configuration to a startup file Console copy running config file destination file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console 4 64 Flash File Commands 4 The following example shows how to download a configuration file Console copy tftp startup config TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 99 Source configuration file name start
110. via DHCP by default To manually configure this address or enable dynamic address assignment via DHCP or BOOTP see Setting an IP Address on page 2 4 Note This switch supports four concurrent Telnet SSH sessions After configuring the switch s IP parameters you can access the onboard configuration program from anywhere within the attached network The onboard configuration program can be accessed using Telnet from any computer attached to the network The switch can also be managed by any computer using a web browser Internet Explorer 5 0 or above or Netscape Navigator 6 2 or above or from a network computer using SNMP network management software Note The onboard program only provides access to basic configuration functions To access the full range of SNMP management functions you must use SNMP based network management software Basic Configuration Console Connection The CLI program provides two different command levels normal access level Normal Exec and privileged access level Privileged Exec The commands available at the Normal Exec level are a limited subset of those available at the Privileged Exec level and allow you to only display information and use basic utilities To fully configure the switch parameters you must access the CLI at the Privileged Exec level Access to both CLI levels are controlled by user names and passwords The switch has a default user name and password for each level To log into
111. vlan Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index Assign ports as tagged if they are connected to 802 1Q VLAN compliant devices or untagged they are not connected to any VLAN aware devices Or configure a port as forbidden to prevent the switch from automatically adding it to a VLAN via the GVRP protocol Notes 1 You can also use the VLAN Static Membership by Port page to configure VLAN groups based on the port index page 3 118 However note that this configuration page can only add ports to a VLAN as tagged members 2 VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN containing all ports on the switch and can only be modified by first reassigning the default port VLAN ID as described under Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces on page 3 119 3 116 VLAN Configuration 3 Command Attributes e VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading zeroes Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters Status Enables or disables the specified VLAN Enable VLAN is operational Disable VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets e Port Port identifier e Trunk Trunk identifier Membership Type Select VLAN membership for each interface by marking the appropriate radio button for a port or trunk Tagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be tagged that is carry a tag and therefore
112. you can enter the prefix keyword no to cancel the effect of a command or reset the configuration to the default value For example the logging command will log system messages to a host server To disable logging specify the no logging command This guide describes the negation effect for all applicable commands Using Command History The CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered You can scroll back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow key Any command displayed in the history list can be executed again or first modified and then executed Using the show history command displays a longer list of recently executed commands 4 Command Line Interface Understanding Command Modes The command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes Exec commands generally display information on system status or clear statistical counters Configuration commands on the other hand modify interface parameters or enable certain switching functions These classes are further divided into different modes Available commands depend on the selected mode You can always enter a question mark at the prompt to display a list of the commands available for the current mode The command classes and associated modes are displayed in the following table Table 4 1 General Command Modes Class Mode Exec Normal Privileged Configuration Global Access Control List Interface Line Multiple Spanning T
113. 045306393916643 steve 192 168 1 19 4 Set the Optional Parameters Set other optional parameters including the authentication timeout the number of retries and the server key size 5 Enable SSH Service Use the ip ssh server command to enable the SSH server on the switch 6 Configure Challenge Response Authentication When an SSH client attempts to contact the switch the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key and encryption method Only clients that have a private key 4 35 4 Command Line Interface corresponding to the public keys stored on the switch can gain access The following exchanges take place during this process a The client sends its public key to the switch b The switch compares the client s public key to those stored in memory c Ifa match is found the switch uses the public key to encrypt a random sequence of bytes and sends this string to the client d The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes and sends the decrypted bytes back to the switch e The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it sent If the two sets match this means that the client s private key corresponds to an authorized public key and the client is authenticated Note To use SSH with only password authentication the host public key must still be given to the client either during initial connection or manually entered into the known host file However you do not need to con
114. 1 6 counters Statistics for LACP protocol messages internal Configuration settings and operational state for local side e neighbors Configuration settings and operational state for remote side sysid Summary of system priority and MAC address for all channel groups Default Setting Port Channel all Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 145 4 Command Line Interface Example Console show lacp 1 counters Channel group 1 LACPDUs Sent LACPDUs Received Marker Sent 0 Marker Received LACPDUs Unknown Pkts 0 LACPDUs Illegal Pkts 0 ar 0 Table 4 46 show lacp counters display description Field Description LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group Marker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group Marker Received Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group LACPDUs Unknown Pkts Number of frames received that either 1 Carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain an unknown PDU or 2 are addressed to the Slow We group MAC Address but do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet LACPDUs Illegal Pkts Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype 4 146 Link Aggregation Commands 4 Console show
115. 10 1 0 1 Communication key with radius server Server port number 1812 Retransmit times 2 Request timeout 5 Console 4 73 4 Command Line Interface TACACS Client Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TACACS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to TACACS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch tacacs server host This command specifies the TACACS server Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server host host_ip_address no tacacs server host host_ip_address IP address of a TACACS server Default Setting 10 11 12 13 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Table 4 29 TACACS Client Commands Command Function Mode Page tacacs server host Specifies the TACACS server GC 4 74 tacacs server port Specifies the TACACS server network port GC 4 74 tacacs server key Sets the TACACS encryption key GC 4 75 show tacacs server Shows the current TACACS settings GC 4 75 Console config tacacs server host 192 168 1 25 Console config tacacs server port This command specifies the TACACS server network port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server port port_number no tacacs server p
116. 100 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Forces 100 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Forces 10 Mbps full duplex operation 10half Forces 10 Mbps half duplex operation 4 126 Interface Commands 4 Default Setting e Auto negotiation is enabled by default e When auto negotiation is disabled the default speed duplex setting is 100half for 100BASE TX ports and 1000full for Gigabit Ethernet ports Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage To force operation to the speed and duplex mode specified in a speed duplex command use the no negotiation command to disable auto negotiation on the selected interface When using the negotiation command to enable auto negotiation the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command To set the speed duplex mode under auto negotiation the required mode must be specified in the capabilities list for an interface Example The following example configures port 5 to 100 Mbps half duplex operation Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 5 config if speed duplex 100half config if no negotiation config if Related Commands negotiation 4 127 capabilities 4 128 negotiation This command enables autonegotiation for a given interface Use the no form to disable autonegotiation Syntax no negotiation Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Chan
117. 11 Console config if lacp Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 12 Console config if lacp Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 13 el e 4 141 4 Command Line Interface Current status Created by lacp Link status Up Operation speed duplex 1000full Flow control type None Member Ports Eth1 11 Eth1 12 Eth1 13 Console lacp system priority This command configures a port s LACP system priority Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner system priority priority no lacp actor partner system priority e actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link e priority This priority is used to determine link aggregation group LAG membership and to identify this device to other switches during LAG negotiations Range 0 65535 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e Port must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG e System priority is combined with the switch s MAC address to form the LAG identifier This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP negotiations with other systems Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its a
118. 11938 0060902539484084827 178194372288402533 11595213486 10229029789827213532671 31629432532818915045306393916643 steve 192 168 1 19 4 Set the Optional Parameters On the SSH Settings page configure the optional parameters including the authentication timeout the number of retries and the server key size 5 Enable SSH Service On the SSH Settings page enable the SSH server on the switch 6 Challenge Response Authentication When an SSH client attempts to contact the switch the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key and encryption method Only clients that have a private key corresponding to the public keys stored on the switch can access The following exchanges take place during this process a The client sends its public key to the switch b The switch compares the client s public key to those stored in memory c Ifa match is found the switch uses the public key to encrypt a random sequence of bytes and sends this string to the client d The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes and sends the decrypted bytes back to the switch 3 37 3 Configuring the Switch e The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it sent If the two sets match this means that the client s private key corresponds to an authorized public key and the client is authenticated Notes 1 To use SSH with only password authentication the host public key must still be given to the client
119. 166 spanning tree portfast This command sets an interface to fast forwarding Use the no form to disable fast forwarding Syntax no spanning tree portfast Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e This command is used to enable disable the fast spanning tree mode for the selected port In this mode ports skip the Discarding and Learning states and proceed straight to Forwarding e Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can be passed through the spanning tree state changes more quickly than allowed by standard convergence time Fast forwarding can achieve quicker convergence for end node workstations and servers and also overcome other STA related timeout problems Remember that fast forwarding should only be enabled for ports connected to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or for an end node device e This command is the same as spanning tree edge port and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products Note that this command may be removed for future software versions Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if bridge group 1 portfast Console config if Related Commands spanning tree edge port 4 165 4 166 Spanning Tree Commands 4 spanning tree link type This command configures the link type for Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to res
120. 188 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands 4 show gvrp configuration This command shows if GVRP is enabled Syntax show gvrp configuration interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 Default Setting Shows both global and interface specific configuration Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show gvrp configuration ethernet 1 7 Eth 1 7 Gvrp configuration Disabled Console garp timer This command sets the values for the join leave and leaveall timers Use the no form to restore the timers default values Syntax garp timer join leave leaveall timer_value no garp timer join leave leaveall e join leave leaveall Which timer to set e timer_value Value of timer Ranges join 20 1000 centiseconds leave 60 3000 centiseconds leaveall 500 18000 centiseconds Default Setting e join 20 centiseconds leave 60 centiseconds leaveall 1000 centiseconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 189 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP and GMRP to register or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN The default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data rate These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing diffic
121. 19 Remote Logs Configures the logging of messages to a remote logging process 3 20 SMTP Sends an SMTP client message to a participating server 3 23 Reset Restarts the switch 3 25 SNTP 3 26 Configuration Configures SNTP client settings including broadcast mode or a 3 26 specified list of servers Clock Time Zone Sets the local time zone for the system clock 3 27 SNMP 3 28 Configuration Configures community strings and related trap functions 3 28 Security 3 30 Passwords Assigns a new password for the current user 3 30 Authentication Settings Configures authentication sequence RADIUS and TACACS 3 31 HTTPS Settings Configures secure HTTP settings 3 34 SSH 3 36 Settings Configures Secure Shell server settings 3 40 Host Key Settings Generates the host key pair public and private 3 38 Port Security Configures per port security including status response for 3 41 3 4 Navigating the Web Browser Interface 3 Table 3 2 Switch Main Menu Menu Description Page 802 1x Port authentication 3 43 Information Displays global configuration settings 3 44 Configuration Configures protocol parameters 3 46 Port Configuration Sets the authentication mode for individual ports 3 47 Statistics Displays protocol statistics for the selected port 3 48 ACL 3 52 Configuration Configures packet filtering based on IP or MAC addresses 3 52 Mask Confi
122. 2 34 Web server enable Web server port 80 Web secure server enable Web secure server port 443 Telnet server enable Telnet port 23 POST result UART LOOP BACK Test PASS DRAM TBT erre r Biss doe eran eS one PASS TIMES TOBE yy sod Hie EAR PASS PCI Device 1 Test PASS PCI Device 2 Test PASS Switch Int Loopback test PASS Done All Pass Console Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions Use the Switch Information page to display hardware firmware version numbers for the main board and management software as well as the power status of the system Field Attributes Main Board Serial Number The serial number of the switch Number of Ports Number of built in RJ 45 ports and SFP slots e Hardware Version Hardware version of the main board Internal Power Status Displays the status of the internal power supply 3 10 Basic Configuration 3 e Redundant Power Status Displays the status of the redundant power supply CLI only Management Software e Loader Version Version number of loader code Boot ROM Version Version of Power On Self Test POST and boot code Operation Code Version Version number of runtime code e Role Shows that this switch is operating as Master i e operating stand alone Web Click System Switch Information Switch Information Main Board Serial Number Number of Ports 24 Ha
123. 29 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Priority Queue Scheduling Select the interface highlight a traffic class i e output queue enter a weight then click Apply Queue Scheduling Interface G Port z C Trunk Select Traffic Class O weight1 amp Traffic Class 1 weight 2 WRR Setting Table Traffic Class 2 weight 4 Traffic Class 3 weight 6 Traffic Class 4 weight8 gt Weight Value A 1 15 Figure 3 75 Queue Scheduling CLI The following example shows how to assign WRR weights to each of the priority queues Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if queue bandwidth 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 4 193 Console config if end Console show queue bandwidth 4 196 Information of Eth 1 1 Queue ID Weight 0 4 dl 3 2 5 3 7J 4 9 5 TI 6 13 7 15 Information of Eth 1 2 Queue ID Weight 3 130 Class of Service Configuration 3 Layer 3 4 Priority Settings Mapping Layer 3 4 Priorities to CoS Values This switch supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3 4 traffic to meet application requirements Traffic priorities can be specified in the IP header of a frame using the priority bits in the Type of Service ToS octet or the number of the TCP port If priority bits are used the ToS octet may contain three bits for IP Precedence or six bits for Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP service When these services are enabled the priorities are mappe
124. 4 Telnet Server Commands Command Function Mode Page ip telnet port Specifies the port to be used by the Telnet interface GC 4 30 ip telnet server Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from Telnet GC 4 30 ip telnet port This command specifies the TCP port number used by the Telnet interface Use the no form to use the default port Syntax ip telnet port port number no ip telnet port port number The TCP port to be used by the browser interface Range 1 65535 Default Setting 23 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip telnet port 123 Console config Related Commands ip telnet server 4 33 ip telnet server This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from Telnet Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip telnet server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip telnet server Console config 4 33 4 Command Line Interface Related Commands ip telnet port 4 33 Secure Shell Commands The Berkley standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix systems Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows and other environments These tools including commands such as rlogin remote login rsh remote shell and rcp remote copy are not secure from hostile attacks The Secure Shell SSH includes
125. 4 lacp This command enables 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP for the current interface Use the no form to disable it Syntax no lacp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage The ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex either by forced mode or auto negotiation A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned the next available port channel ID e Ifthe target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports the trunk will be activated automatically If more than four ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled the additional ports will be placed in standby mode and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails Example The following shows LACP enabled on ports 11 13 Because LACP has also been enabled on the ports at the other end of the links the show interfaces status port channel 1 command shows that Trunk1 has been established Conso config if lacp Conso config if exit Console config exit Console show interfaces status port channel 1 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type 1000T Mac address 00 00 e8 00 00 0b Configuration Name Port admin status Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full Flow control status Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Console config interface ethernet 1
126. 4 105 In multi host mode only one host connected to a port needs to pass authentication for all other hosts to be granted network access Similarly a port can become unauthorized for all hosts if one attached host fails re authentication or sends an EAPOL logoff message Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1x operation mode multi host max count 10 Console config if dot1x re authenticate This command forces re authentication on all ports or a specific interface Syntax dot1x re authenticate interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console dotix re authenticate Console dot1x re authentication This command enables periodic re authentication globally for all ports Use the no form to disable re authentication Syntax no dot1x re authentication Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dot1ix re authentication Console config 4 81 4 Command Line Interface dot1x timeout quiet period This command sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Use the no form to reset the default Syntax dot1x timeout quiet period seconds no dot1x timeout quiet period seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 60 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration
127. 5 Console config if match access list ip bill set dscp 0 4 99 Console config if match access list mac mike set priority 0 4 110 Console config if end Console show marking 4 100 Interface ethernet 1 1 match access list IP bill set DSCP 0 match access list MAC a set priority 0 Console 3 138 Multicast Filtering 3 Multicast Filtering Multicasting is used to support real time a N Unicast applications such as videoconferencing or Flow streaming audio A multicast server does not have to establish a separate connection with each ook co client It merely broadcasts its service to the network and any hosts that want to receive the multicast register with their local multicast switch AN AN AN router Although this approach reduces the Ke AA Aa J network overhead required by a multicast server the broadcast traffic must be carefully pruned at every multicast switch router it passes through to ensure that traffic is only passed on to the hosts C which subscribed to this service Aer This switch uses IGMP Internet Group oe Management Protocol to query for any attached a a a hosts that want to receive a specific multicast a S a a a C N service It identifies the ports containing hosts eS J C J C if C J requesting to join the service and sends data out to those ports only It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the mul
128. 64 spanning tree link type 4 165 spanning tree mst cost 4 165 spanning tree mst port priority 4 166 spanning tree protocol migration 4 167 show spanning tree 4 168 show spanning tree mst configuration 4 170 VLAN Commands 4 170 Editing VLAN Groups 4 171 vlan database 4 171 vlan 4 172 Configuring VLAN Interfaces 4 173 interface vlan 4 173 switchport mode 4 174 switchport acceptable frame types 4 174 switchport ingress filtering 4 175 switchport native vlan 4 176 ix Contents switchport allowed vian 4 177 switchport forbidden vian 4 178 Displaying VLAN Information 4 179 show vlan 4 179 Configuring Private VLANs 4 180 pvlan 4 180 show pvlan 4 181 Configuring Protocol based VLANs 4 181 protocol vian protocol group Configuring Groups 4 182 protocol vian protocol group Configuring Interfaces 4 182 show protocol vlan protocol group 4 183 show interfaces protocol vlan protocol group 4 184 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands 4 185 bridge ext gvrp 4 185 show bridge ext 4 186 switchport gvrp 4 186 show gvrp configuration 4 187 garp timer 4 187 show garp timer 4 188 Priority Commands 4 189 Priority Commands Layer 2 4 189 queue mode 4 190 switchport priority default 4 191 queue bandwidth 4 192 queue cos map 4 192 show queue mode 4 193 show queue bandwidth 4 194 show queue cos map 4 194 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 4 195 map ip port Global Configuration 4 195 map ip port Interface Configuration 4 196 map ip precedence Glo
129. 764891 DSA ssh dss AAAAB3NzaC1lkc3MAAACBAN6 zwIqCqDb3 8693 YVXIME1SHLOEcE Re6hlasfEthIwmj hLY400j qJZpcEQUgC Ylum0Y2uo0Lka Py9ieGWO8 f2gobUZKIICukg6vjO9XTs7XKc05xfzkBi KviDa 20r1Iz6UK 6vFOgvUDFed1nixYTVo h5v8r0ea2rpn06DkZAAAAFOCNZn x17dwpW8Rrv DOQnSWw4Qk 6QAAATEApt kGeB6B5hwagH4gUoCcy6ilTmrmSidgfwO9OqRPUMbCAkCC uzxatO0o7 drnIZypMx Sx5RUdGMGgKS 9ywsalcWqHeFY5ilc31DCNBueeLykZzVS RS azTKIk zrdh8GLG Nq375R55yRxFvmcGIn Q7IphPqyJ309MK8LFD mJEAAACAL8A6tESiswP20FqX7VGOEbzVDSOL RTMFy3 iUXtvGyQAOVSy6 7M c3 lMtgqPRUOYXDiwIBp5NxXgilCg5z7VqbmRm2 8mWc5a f 8TUAg PNWKV6WOhqmshQdot VzZDR1e XKNTZj OuTWwWfjO5Kytdn4MdoTHgrbl1 DMdAfjnte8MZZs Console 3 39 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring the SSH Server The SSH server includes basic settings for authentication Field Attributes SSH Server Status Allows you to enable disable the SSH server on the switch Default Disabled Version The Secure Shell version number Version 2 0 is displayed but the switch supports management access via either SSH Version 1 5 or 2 0 clients SSH Authentication Timeout Specifies the time interval in seconds that the SSH server waits for a response from a client during an authentication attempt Range 1 to 120 seconds Default 120 seconds SSH Authentication Retries Specifies the number of authentication attempts that a client is allowed before authentication fails and the client has to restart the authentication process Range 1 5 times
130. 8 102 permit any Console This shows how to create an extended ACL with an egress mask to drop packets leaving network 171 69 198 0 when the Layer 4 source port is 23 Console config access list ip extended A3 Console config ext acl deny host 171 69 198 5 any Console config ext acl deny 171 69 198 0 255 255 255 0 any source port 23 Console config ext acl end Console show access list IP extended access list A3 deny host 171 69 198 5 any deny 171 69 198 0 255 255 255 0 any source port 23 Console config Console config access list ip mask precedence out Console config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any source port Console config ip mask acl exit Console config interface ethernet 1 15 Console config if ip access group A3 out Console config if end Console show access list IP extended access list A3 deny 171 69 198 0 255 255 255 0 any source port 23 deny host 171 69 198 5 any IP egress mask ACL mask 255 255 255 0 any source port Console 4 95 4 Command Line Interface This is a more comprehensive example It denies any TCP packets in which the SYN bit is ON and permits all other packets It then sets the ingress mask to check the deny rule first and finally binds port 1 to this ACL Note that once the ACL is bound to an interface i e the ACL is active the order in which the rules are displayed is determined by the associated mask Switch config access list ip extended A6
131. ACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level for each user name and password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you enter authentication login radius tacacs local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted on the TACACS server If the TACACS server is not available the local user name and password is checked Example Console config authentication login radius Console config Related Commands username for setting the local user names and passwords 4 26 4 69 4 Command Line Interface authentication enable This command defines the authentication method and precedence to use when changing from Exec command mode to Privileged Exec command mode with the enable command see page 4 20 Use the no form to restore the default Syntax authentication enable local radius tacacs no authentication enable e local Use local password only radius Use RADIUS server password only tacacs Use TACACS server password Default Setting Local Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP
132. AME 3 4 CNAME 4 4 CNAME 5 4 ALIAS 6 4 CNAME 7 4 ALIAS 8 4 CNAME 9 4 ALIAS 10 4 CNAME Console EP 207 207 207 207 207 46 46 46 46 46 134 134 134 249 249 POINTER TO 222 190 155 222 27 4 207 46 68 27 POINTER TO 6 65 54 131 192 POINTER TO 8 165 193 72 190 TTL 51 51 51 54 bi 51 71964 71964 605 605 87 DOMAIN www www www www www www msn www microsoft microsoft microsoft microsoft microsoft microsoft com tw msn com tw akadns akadns akadns akadns akadns com passportimages com www passportimages com global msads net 4 123 net net net net net 3 151 3 Configuring the Switch 3 152 Chapter 4 Command Line Interface This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface CLI Using the Command Line Interface Accessing the CLI When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection to the server s console port or via a Telnet connection the switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt Using the switch s command line interface CLI is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system Console Connection To access the switch through the console port perform these steps 1 At the console prompt enter the user name and password The default user names are admin and guest with corresponding passwords of ad
133. BPDUs is specified by setting the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive protocol messages Range 1 10 Default 3 Configuration Settings for MSTP Max Instance Numbers The maximum number of MSTP instances to which this switch can be assigned Default 65 Configuration Digest An MD5 signature key that contains the VLAN ID to MST ID mapping table In other words this key is a mapping of all VLANs to the CIST e Region Revision The revision for this MSTI Range 0 65535 Default 0 e Region Name The name for this MSTI Maximum length 32 characters Maximum Hop Count The maximum number of hops allowed in the MST region before a BPDU is discarded Range 1 40 Default 20 The MST name and revision number are both required to uniquely identify an MST region 3 97 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Spanning Tree STA Configuration Modify the required attributes and click Apply STA Configuration Switch Spanning Tree State M Enabled Spanning Tree Type MSTP gt Priority 0 61440 in steps of 4096 22768 When the Switch Becomes Root Input Format 2 hello time 1 lt max age lt 2 forward delay 1 Hello Time 1 10 le seconds Maximum Age 6 40 feo seconds Forward Delay 4 30 fis seconds RSTP Configuration Path Cost Method Long x Transmission Limit 1 10 B MSTP Configuration Max Instance Numbers 65 Con
134. Based on the IGMP query and report messages the switch forwards traffic only to the ports that request multicast traffic This prevents the switch from broadcasting the traffic to all ports and possibly disrupting network performance Command Usage IGMP Snooping This switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query and Report packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast host groups to identify the IP multicast group members It simply monitors the IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures the multicast filters accordingly IGMP Querier A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one router switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Note Multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet Command Attributes IGMP Status When enabled the switch will monitor network traffic to determine which hosts want to receive multicast traffic This is also referred to as IGMP Snooping Default Enabled Act as IGMP Qu
135. C addresses learned by monitoring the source address for traffic entering the switch When the destination address for inbound traffic is found in the database the packets intended for that address are forwarded directly to the associated port Otherwise the traffic is flooded to all ports Command Attributes Interface Indicates a port or trunk MAC Address Physical address associated with this interface VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 Address Table Sort Key You can sort the information displayed based on MAC address VLAN or interface port or trunk Dynamic Address Counts The number of addresses dynamically learned Current Dynamic Address Table Lists all the dynamic addresses 3 89 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Address Table Dynamic Addresses Specify the search type i e mark the Interface MAC Address or VLAN checkbox select the method of sorting the displayed addresses and then click Query Dynamic Addresses Query by W Interface Port fi gt Trunk z I MAC Address dY F VLAN fi Address Table Sort Key Address gt Query Dynamic Address Table Dynamic Address Counts 00 20 9C 23 CD 60 VLAN 2 Unit 1 Port 1 Dynamic Current Dynamic Address Table Figure 3 52 Dynamic Addresses CLI This example also displays the address table entries for port 1 Console show mac address table interface ethernet 1 1 4 151 Interface Mac Addre
136. CL Mask Types CLI This example creates an IP ingress mask and then adds two rules Each rule is checked in order of precedence to look for a match in the ACL entries The first entry matching a mask is applied to the inbound packet Console config access list ip mask precedence in 4 92 Console config ip mask acl mask host any 4 93 Console config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any Console config ip mask acl 3 59 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring an IP ACL Mask This mask defines the fields to check in the IP header Command Usage Masks that include an entry for a Layer 4 protocol source port or destination port can only be applied to packets with a header length of exactly five bytes Command Attributes Src Dst IP Specifies the source or destination IP address Use Any to match any address Host to specify a host address not a subnet or IP to specify a range of addresses Options Any Host IP Default Any Src Dst IP Bitmask Source or destination address of rule must match this bitmask See the description for SubMask on page 3 53 Protocol Bitmask Check the protocol field Service Type Check the rule for the specified priority type Options Precedence TOS DSCP Default TOS Src Dst Port Bitmask Protocol port of rule must match this bitmask Range 0 65535 Control Bitmask Control flags of rule must match this bitmask Range 0 63 3
137. Console config snmp server host 192 168 1 23 Glossary Access Control List ACL ACLs can limit network traffic and restrict access to certain users or devices by checking each packet for certain IP or MAC i e Layer 2 information Boot Protocol BOOTP BOOTP is used to provide bootup information for network devices including IP address information the address of the TFTP server that contains the devices system files and the name of the boot file Class of Service CoS CoS is supported by prioritizing packets based on the required level of service and then placing them in the appropriate output queue Data is transmitted from the queues using weighted round robin service to enforce priority service and prevent blockage of lower level queues Priority may be set according to the port default the packet s priority bit in the VLAN tag TCP UDP port number IP Precedence bit or DSCP priority bit Differentiated Services Code Point Service DSCP DSCP uses a six bit tag to provide for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding The DSCP bits are mapped to the Class of Service categories and then into the output queues Domain Name Service DNS A system used for translating host names for network nodes into IP addresses Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP Provides a framework for passing configuration inform
138. Console show mac access group Interface ethernet 1 5 MAC access list M5 out Console Related Commands mac access group 4 107 map access list mac This command sets the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule The specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output queue it is not written to the packet itself Use the no form to remove the CoS mapping Syntax no map access list mac acl_name cos cos value acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters cos value CoS value Range 0 7 Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e You must configure an ACL mask before you can map CoS values to the rule A packet matching a rule within the specified ACL is mapped to one of the output queues as shown below Table 4 36 Mapping CoS Values to MAC ACLs Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 4 108 Access Control List Commands 4 Example Console config int eth 1 5 Console config if map access list mac M5 cos 0 Console config if Related Commands queue cos map 4 194 show map access list mac 4 109 show map access list mac This command shows the CoS value mapped to a MAC ACL for the current interface The CoS value determines the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule Syntax show map access list mac interface interface eth
139. Console show management all client Management Ip Filter Http Client Start ip address End ip address 1 192 168 1219 192 168 1 19 2 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Snmp Client Start ip address End ip address T 192 168 31 19 192 168 1 19 2 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Telnet Client Start ip address End ip address I1 192 168 1219 192 168 1 19 2 192 168 1125 192 168 1 30 Console 4 29 4 Command Line Interface Web Server Commands Table 4 12 Web Server Commands Command Function Mode Page ip http port Specifies the port to be used by the Web browser interface GC 4 30 ip http server Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from a browser GC 4 30 ip http secure server Enables HTTPS SSL for encrypted communications GC 4 31 ip http secure port Specifies the UDP port number for HTTPS SsL ec 432 ip http port This command specifies the TCP port number used by the Web browser interface Use the no form to use the default port Syntax ip http port port number no ip http port port number The TCP port to be used by the browser interface Range 1 65535 Default Setting 80 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip http port 769 Console config Related Commands ip http server 4 30 ip http server This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from a browser Use the no form to disable this functio
140. Dbs1loBf PuSAb4oAsyj KXKVYNLOKTLZ cFRu41bS2KV5LAwecsigF DjKGWt PNIQqabKgYCw2 o dVzX4Gg yqdT1YmGA7 fHGm8ARGeiG4ssFKy4Z6DmYPXFum1 Yg0 fhLwuHpOSKdxT3kk475S7 wOW Console 4 42 System Management Commands 4 Event Logging Commands Table 4 16 Event Logging Commands Command Function Mode Page logging on Controls logging of error messages GC 4 43 logging history Limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on GC 4 44 severity logging host Adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging GC 4 45 messages logging facility Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages GC 4 45 logging trap Limits syslog messages saved to a remote server based on GC 4 46 severity clear logging Clears messages from the logging buffer PE 4 46 show logging Displays the state of logging configuration PE 4 47 logging on This command controls logging of error messages sending debug or error messages to switch memory The no form disables the logging process Syntax no logging on Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The logging process controls error messages saved to switch memory You can use the logging history command to control the type of error messages that are stored Example Console config logging on Console config Related Commands logging history 4 44 clear logging 4 46 4 43 4 Command L
141. Default v1 Enable Authentication Traps Issues a trap message whenever an invalid community string is submitted during the SNMP access authentication process Default Enabled Enable Link up and Link down Traps Issues link up or link down traps Default Enabled 3 29 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click SNMP Configuration Fill in the IP address and community string for each trap manager that will receive these messages specify the SNMP version mark the trap types required and then click Add Trap Managers Trap Manager Capability 5 Current New none Trap Manager IP address 192 168 1 19 lt lt Add Trap Manager Community String private Remove Trap Version 2c Enable Authentication Traps Vv Enable Link up and Link down Traps V I Figure 3 20 Configuring SNMP Trap Managers CLI This example adds a trap manager and enables both authentication and link up link down traps Console config snmp server host 192 168 1 19 private version 2c 4 114 Console config snmp server enable traps 4 115 User Authentication You can restrict management access to this switch using the following options e Passwords Configures the password for the current user e Authentication Settings Use remote authentication to configure access rights e HTTPS Settings Provide a secure web connection e SSH Settings Provide a secure shell for secure Telnet access e Port Security
142. Destination MAC VID Ethernet Type Packet Format R emove BitM ask BitMask Bitmask Bitmask Bitmask iSt 00 11 11 11 11 11 Any o0 Enable __Remove Remove All Entries Source MAC Any 7 Source MAC BitMask Destination MAC Any Destination MAC BitMask VID Bitmask I Ethernet Type Bitmask Packet Format Bitmask I Enable tad Figure 3 37 ACL Mask Configuration MAC 3 62 Access Control Lists 3 CLI This example shows how to create an Ingress MAC ACL and bind it to a port You can then see that the order of the rules have been changed by the mask Console config access list mac M4 4 101 Console config mac acl permit any any 4 102 Console config mac acl deny tagged eth2 00 11 11 11 11 11 ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid 3 4 102 Console config mac acl end Console show access list 4 111 MAC access list M4 permit any any deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 Console config access list mac mask precedence in 4 104 Console config mac mask acl mask pktformat ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid4 105 Console config mac mask acl exit Console config interface ethernet 1 12 4 125 Console config if mac access group M4 in 4 107 Console config if end Console show access list MAC access list M4 deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 permit any any MAC ingress mask ACL mask pktformat host any vid Console Binding a Po
143. EC 8802 3 IEEE 802 3z Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802 3ab 1000BASE T IEEE 802 3ac VLAN tagging IEEE 802 1Q VLAN IEEE 802 1v Protocol based VLANs IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and traffic priorities IEEE 802 1p Priority tags IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication ARP RFC 826 DHCP RFC 1541 HTTPS ICMP RFC 792 IGMP RFC 1112 IGMPv2 RFC 2236 RADIUS RFC 2618 A 2 Management Information Bases A RMON RFC 1757 groups 1 2 3 9 SNMP RFC 1157 SNMPv2 RFC 1907 SNTP RFC 2030 SSH Version 2 0 TFTP RFC 1350 Management Information Bases Bridge MIB RFC 1493 Entity MIB RFC 2737 Ether like MIB RFC 2665 Extended Bridge MIB RFC 2674 Extensible SNMP Agents MIB RFC 2742 Forwarding Table MIB RFC 2096 IGMP MIB RFC 2933 Interface Group MIB RFC 2233 Interfaces Evolution MIB RFC 2863 IP Multicasting related MIBs MAU MIB RFC 2668 MIB Il RFC 1212 1213 Port Access Entity MIB IEEE 802 1x Private MIB Quality of Service MIB RADIUS Authentication Client MIB RFC 2621 RMON MIB RFC 2819 RMON II Probe Configuration Group RFC 2021 partial implementation TACACS Authentication Client MIB TCP MIB RFC 2013 Trap RFC 1215 UDP MIB RFC 2012 A Software Specifications A 4 Appendix B Troubleshooting Problems Accessing the Management Interfa
144. G partner s system ID assigned by the user LAG partner s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol Partner Admin Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner Port Number Partner Oper Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port s protocol Port Number partner Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner Oper Key Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner Admin State Administrative values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table Oper State Operational values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table 4 148 Address Table Commands 4 Console show lacp sysid Channel group System Priority System MAC Address 1 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 2 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 3 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 4 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 5 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 6 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 Console Table 4 49 show lacp sysid display description Field Description Channel group A link aggregation group configured on this switch System Priority LACP system priority for this channel group System MAC Address System MAC address The LACP system priority and system
145. IB objects 3 28 Simple Network Management Protocol 3 Web Click SNMP Configuration Add new community strings as required select the access rights from the Access Mode drop down list then click Add SNMP Configuration SNMP Community SNMP Community Capability 5 Current New private RW public RO lt lt Add Community String spiderman Remove Access Mode Read Write v zi Figure 3 19 Configuring SNMP Community Strings CLI The following example adds the string spiderman with read write access Console config snmp server community spiderman rw 4 112 Console config Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types Traps indicating status changes are issued by the switch to specified trap managers You must specify trap managers so that key events are reported by this switch to your management station using network management platforms such as HP OpenView You can specify up to five management stations that will receive authentication failure messages and other trap messages from the switch Command Attributes Trap Manager Capability This switch supports up to five trap managers Trap Manager IP Address IP address of a new management station to receive trap messages Trap Manager Community String Community string sent with the notification operation Range 1 32 characters case sensitive Trap Version Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP v1 or v2c traps
146. IP interface for management access over the network The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default To manually configure an address you need to change the switch s default settings IP address 0 0 0 0 and netmask 255 0 0 0 to values that are compatible with your network You may also need to a establish a default gateway between the switch and management stations that exist on another network segment You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the CLI program Command Attributes e Management VLAN ID of the configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading zeroes By default all ports on the switch are members of VLAN 1 However the management station can be attached to a port belonging to any VLAN as long as that VLAN has been assigned an IP address IP Address Mode Specifies whether IP functionality is enabled via manual configuration Static Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP or Boot Protocol BOOTP If DHCP BOOTP is enabled IP will not function until a reply has been received from the server Requests will be broadcast periodically by the switch for an IP address DHCP BOOTP values can include the IP address subnet mask and default gateway IP Address Address of the VLAN to which the mana
147. Idle time h m s Console show version This command displays hardware and software version information for the system Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage See Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions on page 3 10 for detailed information on the items displayed by this command 4 61 4 Command Line Interface Example Unit id 1 Loader version 225 E 0 3 Boot rom version 2 2 0 2 4 11 Operation code version 1 4 0 0 Console show version Unitl Serial number Hardware version Number of ports 224 Main power status up Redundant power status not present Agent master Console Frame Size Commands Table 4 23 Frame Size Commands Command Function Mode Page jumbo frame Enables support for jumbo frames GC 4 62 jumbo frame This command enables support for jumbo frames Use the no form to disable it Syntax no jumbo frame Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage 4 62 e This switch provides more efficient throughput for large sequential data transfers by supporting jumbo frames up to 9216 bytes Compared to standard Ethernet frames that run only up to 1 5 KB using jumbo frames significantly reduces the per packet overhead required to process protocol encapsulation fields To use jumbo frames both the source and destination end nodes such as a computer o
148. N ID Range 1 4095 vid bitmask VLAN bitmask Range 1 4095 protocol A specific Ethernet protocol number Range 600 fff hex e protocol bitmask Protocol bitmask Range 600 fff hex For all bitmasks 1 means care and 0 means ignore Default Setting None Command Mode MAC ACL Command Usage New rules are added to the end of the list The ethertype option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060 A few of the more common types include the following 0800 IP 0806 ARP 8137 IPX Example This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address 00 e0 29 94 34 de where the Ethernet type is 0800 Console config mac acl permit any host 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 Console config mac acl Related Commands access list mac 4 101 show mac access list This command displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs Syntax show mac access list ac _name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 103 4 Command Line Interface Example Console show mac access list MAC access list jerry permit any 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 Console Related Commands permit deny 4 102 mac access group 4 107 access list mac mask precedence This command changes to MAC Mask mode used t
149. Name of the host Do not include the initial dot that separates the host name from the domain name Range 1 64 characters 4 118 DNS Commands 4 Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip domain name sample com Console config end Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS disabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List Name Server List Console Related Commands ip domain list 4 119 ip name server 4 120 ip domain lookup 4 121 ip domain list This command defines a list of domain names that can be appended to incomplete host names i e host names passed from a client that are not formatted with dotted notation Use the no form to remove a name from this list Syntax no ip domain list name name Name of the host Do not include the initial dot that separates the host name from the domain name Range 1 64 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Domain names are added to the end of the list one at a time When an incomplete host name is received by the DNS server on this switch it will work through the domain list appending each domain name in the list to the host name and checking with the specified name servers for a match e If there is no domain list the domain name specified with the ip domain name command is used If there is a domain list the default domain name is not used
150. Ns In large networks routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains This switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage groups such as e mail or multicast groups used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN This switch supports the following VLAN features Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard e Distributed VLAN learning across multiple switches using explicit or implicit tagging and GVRP protocol Port overlapping allowing
151. P source email address big wheels matel com SMTP status Enabled Console Resetting the System Web Click System Reset Click the Reset button to restart the switch When prompted confirm that you want reset the switch Reset the switch by selecting Reset Reset Le Figure 3 16 Resetting the System CLI Use the reload command to restart the switch Console reload 4 22 System will be restarted continue lt y n gt Note When restarting the system it will always run the Power On Self Test 3 25 3 Configuring the Switch Setting the System Clock Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP allows the switch to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a time server SNTP or NTP Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries You can also manually set the clock using the CLI See calendar set on page 4 55 If the clock is not set the switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup When the SNTP client is enabled the switch periodically sends a request for a time update to a configured time server You can configure up to three time server IP addresses The switch will attempt to poll each server in the configured sequence Configuring SNTP You can configure the switch to send time synchronization requests to time servers Command Attributes e SNTP Client C
152. Priority anas IGMP Snooping a DNS Telnet Connect to textual user interface Suppor Send mail to technical support Contact Connect to Edge Core Web Site ne Apply Revert Help Figure 3 1 Home Page Note Most of the examples in this chapter are based on the ES4524C Other than the number of fixed ports there are no major differences between the ES4512C ES4524C and ES4548C Navigating the Web Browser Interface 3 Configuration Options Configurable parameters have a dialog box or a drop down list Once a configuration change has been made on a page be sure to click on the Apply button to confirm the new setting The following table summarizes the web page configuration buttons Table 3 1 Web Page Configuration Buttons Button Action Revert Cancels specified values and restores current values prior to pressing Apply Apply Sets specified values to the system Help Links directly to web help Notes 1 To ensure proper screen refresh be sure that Internet Explorer 5 x is configured as follows Under the menu Tools Internet Options General Temporary Internet Files Settings the setting for item Check for newer versions of stored pages should be Every visit to the page 2 When using Internet Explorer 5 0 you may have to manually refresh the screen after making configuration changes by pressing the browser s refresh button Panel Di
153. Pv4 header includes three precedence bits defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control packets to lowest priority for routine traffic The default IP Precedence values are mapped one to one to Class of Service values i e Precedence value 0 maps to CoS value 0 and so forth Bits 6 and 7 are used for network control and the other bits for various application types ToS bits are defined in the following table Table 3 12 Mapping IP Precedence Priority Level Traffic Type Priority Level Traffic Type 7 Network Control 3 Flash Internetwork Control Immediate 6 2 5 Critical 1 Priority 4 0 Routine Flash Override Command Attributes IP Precedence Priority Table Shows the IP Precedence to CoS map e Class of Service Value Maps a CoS value to the selected IP Precedence value Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority Web Click Priority IP Precedence Priority Select an entry from the IP Precedence Priority Table enter a value in the Class of Service Value field and then click Apply IP Precedence Priority IP Precedence 0 CoS 0 IP Precedence 1 CoS1 IP Precedence 2 CoS 2 IP Precedence 3 CoS 3 IP Precedence 4 CoS 4 IP Precedence 5 CoS5 IP Precedence 6 CoS6 IP Precedence 7 CoS 7 Class of Serice Value 0 7 0 Restore Default IP Precedence Priority Table Figure 3 77 IP Precedence
154. Setting 2 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the time interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Example Console config spanning tree hello time 5 Console config 4 156 Spanning Tree Commands 4 spanning tree max age This command configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree max age seconds no spanning tree max age seconds Time in seconds Range 6 40 seconds The minimum value is the higher of 6 or 2 x hello time 1 The maximum value is the lower of 40 or 2 x forward time 1 Default Setting 20 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network Example Console config spanning tree max age 40 Console config spanning tree priority This command configures the spanning tree priority globally for this switch Use the no form
155. Start IP Address A single IP address or the starting address of a range End IP Address The end address of a range 3 50 User Authentication 3 Web Click Security IP Filter Enter the addresses that are allowed management access to an interface and click Add IP Filtering Entry IP Filter Web IP Filter Web IP Filter List Start IP Tr Address End IP Address Add Web IP Filtering Entry Remove Web IP Filtering Entry Figure 3 30 IP Filter CLI This example allows SNMP access for a specific client Console config management snmp client 10 1 2 3 4 28 Console config end Console show management all client Management Ip Filter Http Client Start ip address End ip address Snmp Client Start ip address End ip address Le 10 1 2 3 10 1 2 3 Telnet Client Start ip address End ip address Console 3 51 3 Configuring the Switch Access Control Lists Access Control Lists ACL provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type To filter incoming packets first create an access list add the required rules specify a mask to modify the precedence in which the rules are checked and then bind the list to a specific port Configuring Access Control Lists An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses
156. Table Shows the current port members of each VLAN and whether or 3 114 not the port is tagged or untagged Static List Used to create or remove VLAN groups 3 115 Static Table Modifies the settings for an existing VLAN 3 116 Static Membership Configures membership type for interfaces including tagged 3 118 untagged or forbidden Port Configuration Specifies default PVID and VLAN attributes 3 119 Trunk Configuration Specifies default trunk VID and VLAN attributes 3 119 Private VLAN 3 121 Status Enables or disables the private VLAN 3 121 Link Status Configures the private VLAN 3 122 Navigating the Web Browser Interface 3 Table 3 2 Switch Main Menu Menu Description Page Protocol VLAN 3 123 Configuration Creates a protocol group specifying the supported protocols 3 123 Port Configuration Maps a protocol group to a VLAN 3 123 Priority 3 125 Default Port Priority Sets the default priority for each port 3 125 Default Trunk Priority Sets the default priority for each trunk 3 125 Traffic Classes Maps IEEE 802 1p priority tags to output queues 3 127 Traffic Classes Status Enables disables traffic class priorities not implemented NA Queue Mode Sets queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round Robin 3 129 Queue Scheduling Configures Weighted Round Robin queueing 3 129 P Precedence Globally selects IP Precedence or DSCP Priority or disables 3 131 DSCP Priority Status both
157. VLANs and protocol VLANs GVRP and Configures GVRP settings that permit automatic VLAN learning 4 187 Bridge Extension shows the configuration for the bridge extension MIB Priority Sets port priority for untagged frames selects strict priority or weighted 4 191 round robin relative weight for each priority queue also sets priority for TCP traffic types IP precedence and DSCP Multicast Filtering Configures IGMP multicast filtering query parameters and specifies 4 204 ports attached to a multicast router IP Interface Configures IP address for the switch 4 213 4 10 Line Commands 4 The access mode shown in the following tables is indicated by these abbreviations NE Normal Exec IC Interface Configuration PE Privileged Exec LC Line Configuration GC Global Configuration vc VLAN Database Configuration ACL Access Control List Configuration MST Multiple Spanning Tree Line Commands You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100 compatible device to the server s serial port These commands are used to set communication parameters for the serial port or Telnet i e a virtual terminal Table 4 5 Line Commands Command Function Mode Page line Identifies a specific line for configuration and starts the line GC 4 12 configuration mode login Enables password checking at login LC 4 12 password Specifies a password on a line LC 4 13 exec timeo
158. able frame types 4 176 switchport acceptable frame types This command configures the acceptable frame types for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport acceptable frame types all tagged no switchport acceptable frame types all The port accepts all frames tagged or untagged tagged The port only receives tagged frames Default Setting All frame types 4 176 VLAN Commands 4 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage When set to receive all frame types any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN Example The following example shows how to restrict the traffic received on port 1 to tagged frames Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport acceptable frame types tagged Console config if Related Commands switchport mode 4 176 switchport ingress filtering This command enables ingress filtering for an interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax no switchport ingress filtering Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be flooded to all other ports except for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port If ingress fil
159. aged standalone switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console configure Console config username guest password 0 password Console config username admin password 0 password Console config Setting an IP Address You must establish IP address information for the switch to obtain management access through the network This can be done in either of the following ways Manual You have to input the information including IP address and subnet mask If your management station is not in the same IP subnet as the switch you will also need to specify the default gateway router Dynamic The switch sends IP configuration requests to BOOTP or DHCP address allocation servers on the network Manual Configuration You can manually assign an IP address to the switch You may also need to specify a default gateway that resides between this device and management stations that exist on another network segment Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the CLI program Note The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default Basic Configuration 2 Before you can assign an IP address to the switch you must obtain the following information from your network administrator IP address for the switch Default gateway for the network Network mask for this network To assign an IP address to the
160. al secs 30 seconds Admin State Expired OperState Expired Admin State Defaulted ViOper State Defaulted Admin State Distributing Oper State Distributing Admin State Collecting Oper State Collecting Admin State Oper State Synchronization Synchronization Admin State Aggregation V Oper State Aggregation Admin State Timeout Long Oper State Timeout Admin State LACP Activity V Oper State LACP Activity i LACP System Priority 3 LACP Port Priority Figure 3 45 LACP Port Internal Information CLI The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and operational state for the local side of port channel 1 Console show lacp 1 internal 4 145 Channel group 1 Oper Key 4 Admin Key 0 Eth 1 1 LACPDUs Internal 30 sec LACP System Priority 32768 LACP Port Priority 32768 Admin Key 4 Oper Key 4 Admin State defaulted aggregation long timeout LACP activity Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity Console 3 78 Port Configuration 3 Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the remote side of an link aggregation Table 3 8 LACP Neighbor Configuration Information Field Description Partner Admin System ID LAG partner s system ID assigned by the user
161. ame bob password 0 smith Console config Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication Use the Authentication Settings menu to restrict management access based on specified user names and passwords You can manually configure access rights on the switch or you can use a remote access authentication server based on RADIUS or TACACS protocols Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS and Terminal Access Controller E E Access Control System Plus l m n TACACS are logon Tena console authentication protocols that use software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware or en TACACS aware devices on server the network An authentication pa server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the switch apa faite A Toisio 1 Client attempts management access 2 Switch contacts authentication server 3 Authentication server challenges client 4 Client responds with proper password or key 5 Authentication server approves access 6 Switch grants management access 3 31 3 Configuring the Switch RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS encr
162. and contact information for the system administrator then click Apply This page also includes a Telnet button that allows access to the Command Line Interface via Telnet 20 10 100 1000 ports 4 Gigabit Combo ports L2 L4 managed standalone switch System Name Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 10 51 Location Contact System Up Time 0 days 1 hours 28 minutes and 1 90 seconds iene Connect to textual user interface Support Send mail to technical support Seeley Connect to Edge Core Web Site Figure 3 3 System Information 3 Configuring the Switch CLI Specify the hostname location and contact information Console config hostname R amp D 5 4 25 Console config snmp server location WC 9 4 113 Console config snmp server contact Ted 4 113 Console config exit Console show version 4 61 Unitl Serial number Hardware version Number of ports 2 24 Main power status up Redundant power status not present Agent master Unit id 1 Loader version an A e OE Boot rom version 205 2 11 Operation code version 1 4 0 0 Console show system 4 60 System description 20 10 100 1000 ports 4 Gigabit Combo ports L2 L4 managed standalone switch System OID string 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 10 51 System information System Up time 0 days 0 hours 46 minutes and 20 53 seconds System Name NONE System Location NONE System Contact NONE MAC address 00 12 12 34 1
163. and NE mode GC 4 25 hostname Specifies the host name for the switch GC 4 25 snmp server contact Sets the system contact string GC 4 113 snmp server location Sets the system location string GC 4 113 prompt This command customizes the CLI prompt Use the no form to restore the default prompt Syntax prompt string no prompt string Any alphanumeric string to use for the CLI prompt Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting Console Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config prompt RD2 RD2 config hostname This command specifies or modifies the host name for this device Use the no form to restore the default host name Syntax hostname name no hostname name The name of this host Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 25 4 Command Line Interface Example Console config hostname RD 1 Console config User Access Commands The basic commands required for management access are listed in this section This switch also includes other options for password checking via the console or a Telnet connection page 4 11 user authentication via a remote authentication server page 4 68 and host access authentication for specific ports page 4 78 Table 4 9 User Access Commands Command Function Mode Page username Establishes a user name based authentication system at
164. ants to join When this switch receives these messages it will automatically place the receiving port in the specified VLANs and then forward the message to all other ports When the message arrives at another switch that supports GVRP it will also place the receiving port in the specified VLANs and pass the message on to all other ports VLAN requirements are propagated in this way throughout the network This allows GVRP compliant devices to be automatically configured for VLAN groups based solely on endstation requests To implement GVRP in a network first add the host devices to the required VLANs using the operating system or other application software so that these VLANs can be propagated onto the network For both the edge switches attached directly to 3 111 3 Configuring the Switch these hosts and core switches in the network enable GVRP on the links between these devices You should also determine security boundaries in the network and disable GVRP on the boundary ports to prevent advertisements from being propagated or forbid those ports from joining restricted VLANs Note If you have host devices that do not support GVRP you should configure static or untagged VLANs for the switch ports connected to these devices as described in Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index on page 3 116 But you can still enable GVRP on these edge switches as well as on the core switches in the
165. arding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to reconfigure when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device Admin Link Type The link type attached to this interface e Point to Point A connection to exactly one other bridge Shared A connection to two or more bridges e Auto The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point to point link or to shared media Web Click Spanning Tree STA Port Information or Trunk Information STA Port Information Spanning Forward Designated Designated Designated Oper Oper Trunk Port Tree STA Status Transitions Cost Bridge Port Link Type Edge Port Port Role Member 1 Enabled Forwarding 7 200000 32768 0 0030F 1552000 128 24 pti Disabled Root 2 Enabled Discarding 0 200000 61440 0 0000E9313131 128 2 rome Enabled Disabled 3 Enabled Discarding 0 200000 61440 0 0000E9313131 1283 eng Enabled Disabled 4 Enabled Discarding 0 200000 6 1440 0 0000E9313131 128 4 oo Enabled Disabled 5 Enabl
166. ask precedence This command shows the ingress or egress rule masks for MAC ACLs Syntax show access list mac mask precedence in out e in Ingress mask precedence for ingress ACLs out Egress mask precedence for egress ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show access list mac mask precedence MAC egress mask ACL mask pktformat host any vid ethertype Console Related Commands mask MAC ACL 4 105 mac access group This command binds a port to a MAC ACL Use the no form to remove the port Syntax mac access group ac _name in out acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e in Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets out Indicates that this list applies to egress packets Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage A port can only be bound to one ACL Ifa port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL the switch will replace the old binding with the new one e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port Example Console config interface ethernet 1 25 Console config if mac access group jerry in Console config if 4 107 4 Command Line Interface Related Commands show mac access list 4 103 show mac access group This command shows the ports assigned to MAC ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec Example
167. atching a specified source IP address STD ACL 4 89 permit deny Filters packets meeting the specified criteria including EXT ACL 4 90 source and destination IP address TCP UDP port number protocol type and TCP control code show ip access list Displays the rules for configured IP ACLs PE 4 92 access list ip Changes to the mode for configuring access control masks GC 4 92 mask precedence mask Sets a precedence mask for the ACL rules IP Mask 4 93 show access list ip Shows the ingress or egress rule masks for IP ACLs PE 4 96 mask precedence ip access group Adds a port to an IP ACL IC 4 97 show ip access group Shows port assignments for IP ACLs PE 4 97 map access list ip Sets the CoS value and corresponding output queue for IC 4 98 packets matching an ACL rule show map access list ip Shows CoS value mapped to an access list for an interface PE 4 99 4 87 4 Command Line Interface Table 4 33 IP ACL Commands Command Function Mode Page match access list ip Changes the 802 1p priority IP Precedence or DSCP IC 4 99 Priority of a frame matching the defined rule i e also called packet marking show marking Displays the current configuration for packet marking PE 4 100 access list ip This command adds an IP access list and enters configuration mode for standard or extended IP ACLs Use the no form to remove the specified ACL Syntax no access list ip
168. ated sequence RADIUS Settings Server IP Address Address of authentication server Default 10 1 0 1 Server Port Number Network UDP port of authentication server used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default 1812 Secret Text String Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Number of Server Transmits Number of times the switch tries to authenticate logon access via the authentication server Range 1 30 Default 2 Timeout for a reply The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply from the RADIUS server before it resends the request Range 1 65535 Default 5 TACACS Settings Server IP Address Address of the TACACS server Default 10 11 12 13 Server Port Number Network TCP port of TACACS server used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default 49 Secret Text String Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters 3 32 User Authentication 3 Note The local switch user database has to be set up by manually entering user names and passwords using the CLI See username on page 4 26 Web Click Security Authentication Settings To configure local or remote authentication preferences specify the authentication sequence i e one to three methods fill in the para
169. atic Trunks None LACP all ports Disabled Broadcast Storm Status Enabled all ports Protection Broadcast Limit Rate 500 packets per second Spanning Tree Protocol Status Enabled MSTP Defaults All values based on IEEE 802 1s Fast Forwarding Edge Port Disabled Address Table Aging Time 300 seconds Virtual LANs Default VLAN 1 PVID 1 Acceptable Frame Type All Ingress Filtering Disabled Switchport Mode Egress Mode Hybrid tagged untagged frames GVRP global Disabled GVRP port interface Disabled Traffic Prioritization Ingress Port Priority 0 Weighted Round Robin Queue 01234 5 6 7 Weight 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 IP Precedence Priority Disabled IP DSCP Priority Disabled System Defaults 1 Table 1 2 System Defaults Function Parameter Default IP Settings IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 DHCP Client Enabled BOOTP Disabled DNS Server Lookup Disabled Multicast Filtering IGMP Snooping Snooping Enabled Querier Enabled System Log Status Enabled Messages Logged Levels 0 7 all Messages Logged to Flash Levels 0 3 SMTP Email Alerts Event Handler Disabled SNTP Clock Synchronization Disabled 4A Introduction Chapter 2 Initial Configuration Connecting to the Switch Configuration Options The switch includes a built in network management agent The agen
170. ation to hosts on a TCP IP network DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol BOOTP adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration options Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL EAPOL is a client authentication protocol used by this switch to verify the network access rights for any device that is plugged into the switch A user name and password is requested by the switch and then passed to an authentication server e g RADIUS for verification EAPOL is implemented as part of the IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication standard Glossary 1 Glossary GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP Defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register necessary VLAN members on ports along the Spanning Tree so that VLANs defined in each switch can work automatically over a Spanning Tree network Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP GARP is a protocol that can be used by endstations and switches to register and propagate multicast group membership information in a switched environment so that multicast data frames are propagated only to those parts of a switched LAN containing registered endstations Formerly called Group Address Registration Protocol Generic Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP GMRP allows network devices to register end stations with multicast groups GMRP requires that any participating network devices or end stations com
171. atus Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled e Oper Status Indicates if the link is Up or Down e Speed Duplex Status Shows the current speed and duplex mode Auto or fixed choice e Flow Control Status Indicates the type of flow control currently in use IEEE 802 3x Back Pressure or None e Autonegotiation Shows if auto negotiation is enabled or disabled 3 64 Port Configuration 3 Forced Mode Shows the forced preferred port type to use for combination ports 21 24 or 45 48 Copper Forced Copper Preferred Auto SFP Forced SFP Preferred Auto Trunk Member Shows if port is a trunk member Creation Shows if a trunk is manually configured or dynamically set via LACP Port Information only Trunk Information only Da Web Click Port Port Information or Trunk Information Port Information PortName Type Admin Status Oper Status Speed Duplex Status Flow Control Status Autonegotiation Forced Mode Trunk Member 1 Enabled Up 100full None Enabled None 2 Enabled Down a JI None Enabled None 3 Enabled Down None Enabled None 4 Enabled Down None Enabled 5 Enabled Down None Enabled 6 Enabled Down None Enabled 7 Enabled Down None Enabled None 8 Enabled Down None Enabled None 9 Enabled Down None Enabled None 10 Enabled Down None Enabled N Enabled Down None Enabled 12 Enabled Down None Enabled 13 Enabled Down None Enabled Non 4 Enabled Down None Enabled None 15 Enabled Dow
172. ault Setting Shows all sessions Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the currently configured source port destination port and mirror mode i e RX TX RX TX 4 137 4 Command Line Interface Example The following shows mirroring configured from port 6 to port 11 Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 6 Console config if end Console show port monitor Port Mirroring Destination port listen port Eth1 1 Source port monitored port Eth1 6 Mode RX TX Console Rate Limit Commands This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the network Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks When an interface is configured with this feature the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to verify conformity Non conforming traffic is dropped conforming traffic is forwarded without any changes Table 4 44 Rate Limit Commands Command Function Mode Page rate limit Configures the maximum input or output rate for a port IC 4 138 rate limit This command defines the rate limit for a specific interfa
173. aximum Addresses 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet 4 76 Authentication Commands A Command Usage If you enable port security the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted First use the port security max mac count command to set the number of addresses and then use the port security command to enable security on the port Use the no port security max mac count command to disable port security and reset the maximum number of addresses to the default You can also manually add secure addresses with the mac address table static command A secure port has the following restrictions Cannot use port monitoring Cannot be a multi VLAN port Cannot be connected to a network interconnection device Cannot be a trunk port If a port is disabled due to a security violation it must be manually re enabled using the no shutdown command Example The following example enables port security for port 5 and sets the response to a security violation to issue a trap message Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if port security action trap Related Commands shutdown 4 130 mac address table static 4 150 show mac address table 4 151 4 77 A Command Line Interface 802 1x Port Authenticati
174. b Enables or disables the specified VLAN Enable VLAN is operational Disable VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets State CLI Enables or disables the specified VLAN Active VLAN is operational Suspend VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets Add Adds a new VLAN group to the current list Remove Removes a VLAN group from the current list If any port is assigned to this group as untagged it will be reassigned to VLAN group 1 as untagged 3 115 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static List To create a new VLAN enter the VLAN ID and VLAN name mark the Enable checkbox to activate the VLAN and then click Add VLAN Static List Current New 1 DefaultVian Enabled VLAN ID 1 4094 2 lt lt Add VLAN Name R amp D Remove l Status W Enable Figure 3 64 VLAN Static List Creating VLANs CLI This example creates a new VLAN Console config vlan database 4 173 Console config vlan vlan 2 name R amp D media ethernet state active 4 174 Console config vlan end Console show vlan 4 181 VLAN Type Name Status Ports Channel groups 1 Static DefaultVlan Active Ethl1 1 Eth1 2 2 Static R amp D Active Ethl1 3 Eth1 4 3 Static Active Ethl 5 Eth1 6 4 Static Active Ethl 7 Eth1 8 5 Static Active Ethl1 9 Eth1 10 6 Static Active Eth1 11 Eth1 12 7 Static Active Eth1 13 Eth1 14 8 Static Active Eth1 15 Eth1 16 Console config
175. b interface access requirements 3 1 configuration buttons 3 3 home page 3 2 menu list 3 3 3 4 panel display 3 3 Index 4 ES4512C ES4524C ES4548C E052005 R02
176. bal Configuration 4 196 map ip precedence Interface Configuration 4 197 map ip dscp Global Configuration 4 198 map ip dscp Interface Configuration 4 198 show map ip port 4 199 show map ip precedence 4 200 show map ip dscp 4 201 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 202 IGMP Snooping Commands 4 202 ip igmp snooping 4 203 ip igmp snooping vlan static 4 203 ip igmp snooping version 4 204 show ip igmp snooping 4 204 show mac address table multicast 4 205 Contents IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 4 206 ip igmp snooping querier 4 206 ip igmp snooping query count 4 206 ip igmp snooping query interval 4 207 ip igmp snooping query max response time 4 208 ip igmp snooping router port expire time 4 208 Static Multicast Routing Commands 4 209 ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter 4 209 show ip igmp snooping mrouter 4 210 IP Interface Commands 4 211 ip address 4 211 ip dhcp restart 4 212 ip default gateway 4 213 show ip interface 4 213 show ip redirects 4 214 ping 4 214 Appendix A Software Specifications A 1 Software Features A 1 Management Features A 2 Standards A 2 Management Information Bases A 3 Appendix B Troubleshooting B 1 Problems Accessing the Management Interface B 1 Using System Logs B 2 Glossary Index xi Contents xii Tables Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 3 6 Table 3 7 Table 3 8 Table 3 9 Table 3 10 Table 3 11 Table 3 12 Table 3 13 Tab
177. be assigned to a specific interface on this switch Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table Command Attributes e Static Address Counts The number of manually configured addresses e Current Static Address Table Lists all the static addresses Interface Port or trunk associated with the device assigned a static address MAC Address Physical address of a device mapped to this interface e VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 Web Only 3 88 Address Table Settings 3 Web Click Address Table Static Addresses Specify the interface the MAC address and VLAN then click Add Static Address Then set this as a permanent address or to be deleted on reset Static Addresses Static Address Counts none Current Static Address Table Interface Port 1 gt C Trunk MAC Address a VLAN 1 B Add Static Address Remove Static Address Permanent Delete on Reset Figure 3 51 Static Addresses CLI This example adds an address to the static address table but sets it to be deleted when the switch is reset Console config mac address table static 00 e0 29 94 34 de interface Console config ethernet 1 1 vlan 1 delete on reset 4 150 Displaying the Address Table The Dynamic Address Table contains the MA
178. bling SNMP Management Access The switch can be configured to accept management commands from Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP applications such as HP OpenView You can configure the switch to 1 respond to SNMP requests or 2 generate SNMP traps When SNMP management stations send requests to the switch either to return information or to set a parameter the switch provides the requested data or sets the specified parameter The switch can also be configured to send information to SNMP managers without being requested by the managers through trap messages which inform the manager that certain events have occurred Community Strings Community strings are used to control management access to SNMP stations as well as to authorize SNMP stations to receive trap messages from the switch You therefore need to assign community strings to specified users or user groups and set the access level The default strings are public with read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects private with read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Note If you do not intend to utilize SNMP we recommend that you delete both of the default community strings If there are no community strings then SNMP management access to the switch is disabled To prevent unauthorized access to the switch via SNMP it is recommended that you change the de
179. cally assigned to an interface on the switch You can use the Multicast Router Port Information page to display the ports on this switch attached to a neighboring multicast router switch for each VLAN ID Command Attributes e VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 e Multicast Router List Multicast routers dynamically discovered by this switch or those that are statically assigned to an interface on this switch Web Click IGMP Snooping Multicast Router Port Information Select the required VLAN ID from the scroll down list to display the associated multicast routers Multicast Router Port Information VLAN ID 1 gt Multicast Router List Unit Portl1 Static Figure 3 84 Multicast Router Port Information CLI This example shows that Port 11 has been statically configured as a port attached to a multicast router Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 4 212 VLAN M cast Router Port Type 1 Eth 1 11 Static console 3 142 Multicast Filtering 3 Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your switch you can manually configure the interface and a specified VLAN to join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router This can en
180. can be applied to individual ports or trunks When an interface is configured with this feature the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to verify conformity Non conforming traffic is dropped conforming traffic is forwarded without any changes Command Attribute e Rate Limit Sets the output rate limit for an interface Default Status Disabled Default Rate 1000 Mbps Range 1 1000 Mbps Web Click Rate Limit Input Output Port Trunk Configuration Set the Input Rate Limit Status or Output Rate Limit Status then set the rate limit for the individual interfaces and click Apply Output Rate Limit Port Configuration Port Output Rate Limit Status Output Rate Limit Mbps Trunk Enabled v Disabled v Disabled Disabled v Disabled v Disabled v Disabled Disabled Disabled v Ol Di Ni nin amp win oO ee UUEL TTT Disabled v Figure 3 49 Rate Limit Configuration CLI This example sets the rate limit for input and output traffic passing through port 1 to 600 Mbps Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 125 Console config if rate limit input 600 4 138 Console config if rate limit output 600 Console config if 3 83 3 Configuring the Switch Showing Port Statistics You can display standard statistics on network traffic from the Interfaces Group and Ethernet like MIBs as well as a detailed breakdown of t
181. carry VLAN or CoS information Untagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be untagged that is not carry a tag and therefore not carry VLAN or CoS information Note that an interface must be assigned to at least one group as an untagged port Forbidden Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the VLAN via GVRP For more information see Automatic VLAN Registration on page 3 111 None Interface is not a member of the VLAN Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To add a trunk to the selected VLAN use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static Table Select a VLAN ID from the scroll down list Modify the VLAN name and status if required Select the membership type by marking the appropriate radio button in the list of ports or trunks Click Apply VLAN Static Table VLAN fez Name R amp D Status Enable Port Tagged Untagged Forbidden None Trunk Member 1 O 2 O O C 3 ic 4 GC e Cc e Figure 3 65 VLAN Static Table Adding Static Members 3 117 3 Configuring the Switch CLI The following example adds tagged and untagged ports to VLAN 2 Console Console Console Console Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 125 config if switchport allowed v
182. ccess for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server key green Console config radius server retransmit This command sets the number of retries Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server retransmit number_of_retries no radius server retransmit number_of_retries Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server Range 1 30 Default Setting 2 Command Mode Global Configuration 4 72 Authentication Commands 4 Example Console config radius server retransmit 5 Console config radius server timeout This command sets the interval between transmitting authentication requests to the RADIUS server Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server timeout number_of_seconds no radius server timeout number_of_seconds Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending a request Range 1 65535 Default Setting 5 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server timeout 10 Console config show radius server This command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show radius server Remote radius server configuration Server IP address
183. ccess through IEEE 802 1x security or static address filtering e Filter packets using Access Control Lists ACLs e Configure up to 255 IEEE 802 1Q VLANs Enable GVRP automatic VLAN registration e Configure IGMP multicast filtering e Upload and download system firmware via TFTP Upload and download switch configuration files via TFTP e Configure Spanning Tree parameters e Configure Class of Service CoS priority queuing e Configure up to 6 static or LACP trunks 2 Initial Configuration e Enable port mirroring Set broadcast storm control on any port e Display system information and statistics Required Connections The switch provides an RS 232 serial port that enables a connection to a PC or terminal for monitoring and configuring the switch A null modem console cable is provided with the switch Attach a VT100 compatible terminal or a PC running a terminal emulation program to the switch You can use the console cable provided with this package or use a null modem cable that complies with the wiring assignments shown in the Installation Guide To connect a terminal to the console port complete the following steps 1 Connect the console cable to the serial port on a terminal or a PC running terminal emulation software and tighten the captive retaining screws on the DB 9 connector 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RS 232 serial port on the switch 3 Make sure the terminal emulation software is set as
184. ce Table B 1 Troubleshooting Chart Symptom Action Cannot connect using Telnet web browser or SNMP software Be sure the switch is powered up Check network cabling between the management station and the switch Check that you have a valid network connection to the switch and that the port you are using has not been disabled Be sure you have configured the VLAN interface through which the management station is connected with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway Be sure the management station has an IP address in the same subnet as the switch s IP interface to which it is connected e If you are trying to connect to the switch via the IP address for a tagged VLAN group your management station and the ports connecting intermediate switches in the network must be configured with the appropriate tag e Ifyou cannot connect using Telnet you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet SSH sessions permitted Try connecting again at a later time Cannot connect using Secure Shell Cannot access the on board configuration program via a serial port connection Forgot or lost the password e If you cannot connect using SSH you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet SSH sessions permitted Try connecting again at a later time e Be sure the control parameters for the SSH server are properly configured on the switch and that the SSH client software is
185. ce Use this command without specifying a rate to restore the default rate Use the no form to restore the default status of disabled Syntax rate limit input output rate no rate limit input output input Input rate output Output rate e rate Maximum value in Mbps Range 1 to 1000 Mbps Default Setting 1000 Mbps Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 138 Link Aggregation Commands 4 Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if rate limit input 600 Console config if Link Aggregation Commands Ports can be statically grouped into an aggregate link i e trunk to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Or you can use the Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP to automatically negotiate a trunk link between this switch and another network device For static trunks the switches have to comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard For dynamic trunks the switches have to comply with LACP This switch supports up to six trunks For example a trunk consisting of two 1000 Mbps ports can support an aggregate bandwidth of 4 Gbps when operating at full duplex Table 4 45 Link Aggregation Commands Command Function Mode Page Manual Configuration Commands interface port channel Configures a trunk and enters interface GC 4 125 configuration mode for t
186. ce 0 are global settings that apply to the IST page 3 92 the settings for other instances only apply to the local spanning tree Console show spanning tree mst 0 4 170 Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode MSTP Spanning tree enable disable enable nstance 0 Vlans configuration 21 4094 Priority 232768 Bridge Hello Time sec 2 Bridge Max Age sec 20 Bridge Forward Delay sec 715 Root Hello Time sec 2 Root Max Age sec 220 Root Forward Delay sec 15 Max hops 2 20 Remaining hops 20 Designated Root 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 Current root port i Current root cost 200000 Number of topology changes Last topology changes time sec 645 Transmission limit 23 Path Cost Method long 3 107 3 Configuring the Switch Eth 1 1 information Admin status enable Role root State forwarding External path cost 100000 Internal path cost 100000 Priority 128 Designated cost 200000 Designated port 128 24 Designated root 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 Designated bridge 32768 0 0030F1552000 Fast forwarding disable Forward transitions 1 Admin edge port enable Oper edge port disable Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to point Spanning Tree Status enable Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP You can configure the STA interface settings for an MST Instance using the MSTP Port Configuration and MSTP Trunk Configuration pages Field Attributes
187. ce 4 1 Accessing the CLI 4 1 Console Connection 4 1 Telnet Connection 4 1 Entering Commands 4 3 Keywords and Arguments 4 3 Minimum Abbreviation 4 3 Command Completion 4 3 Getting Help on Commands 4 3 Showing Commands 4 4 Partial Keyword Lookup 4 5 Negating the Effect of Commands 4 5 Using Command History 4 5 Understanding Command Modes 4 6 Exec Commands 4 6 Configuration Commands 4 7 Command Line Processing 4 9 Command Groups 4 10 Line Commands 4 11 line 4 12 login 4 12 password 4 13 exec timeout 4 14 password thresh 4 15 silent time 4 15 databits 4 16 parity 4 17 speed 4 17 stopbits 4 18 Contents disconnect 4 18 show line 4 19 General Commands 4 20 enable 4 20 disable 4 21 configure 4 21 show history 4 22 reload 4 22 end 4 23 exit 4 23 quit 4 24 System Management Commands 4 24 Device Designation Commands 4 25 prompt 4 25 hostname 4 25 User Access Commands 4 26 username 4 26 enable password 4 27 IP Filter Commands 4 28 management 4 28 show management 4 29 Web Server Commands 4 30 ip http port 4 30 ip http server 4 30 ip http secure server 4 31 ip http secure port 4 32 Telnet Server Commands 4 33 ip telnet port 4 33 ip telnet server 4 33 Secure Shell Commands 4 34 ip ssh server 4 36 ip ssh timeout 4 37 ip ssh authentication retries 4 37 ip ssh server key size 4 38 delete public key 4 38 ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 39 ip ssh crypto zeroize 4 39 ip ssh save host key 4 40 show ip ssh 4 40 show ssh 4
188. ch in the address interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 e vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 sort Sort by address vlan or interface Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The MAC Address Table contains the MAC addresses associated with each interface Note that the Type field may include the following types Learned Dynamic address entries Permanent Static entry Delete on reset Static entry to be deleted when system is reset The mask should be hexadecimal numbers representing an equivalent bit mask in the form xx xx xx xx xx xx that is applied to the specified MAC address Enter hexadecimal numbers where an equivalent binary bit O means to match a bit and 1 means to ignore a bit For example a mask of 4 151 4 Command Line Interface 00 00 00 00 00 00 means an exact match and a mask of FF FF FF FF FF FF means any The maximum number of address entries is 8191 Example Console show mac address table Interface Mac Address vlan Type Eth 1 1 00 e0 29 94 34 de 1 Delete on reset Console mac address table aging time This command sets the aging time for entries in the address table Use the no form to restore the default aging time Syntax mac address table aging time seconds no mac address table aging time seconds Aging time Range 10 1000000 seconds 0 to d
189. chedules based on strict or Weighted Round Robin WRR Up to eight separate traffic priorities are defined in IEEE 802 1p The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard as shown in the following table Table 3 10 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues Queue 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Priority 2 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 The priority levels recommended in the IEEE 802 1p standard for various network applications are shown in the following table However you can map the priority levels to the switch s output queues in any way that benefits application traffic for your own network Table 3 11 CoS Priority Levels Priority Level Traffic Type 1 Background 2 Spare 0 default Best Effort 3 Excellent Effort 4 Controlled Load 5 6 7 Video less than 100 milliseconds latency and jitter Voice less than 10 milliseconds latency and jitter Network Control Command Attributes e Priority CoS value Range 0 7 where 7 is the highest priority e Traffic Class Output queue buffer Range 0 7 where 7 is the highest CoS priority queue CLI shows Queue ID 3 127 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Priority Traffic Classes Mark an interface and click Select to display the current mapping of CoS values to output queues Assign priorities to the traffic classes i e output queues for the selected interfac
190. ck Add To delete an IP address click the entry in the SMTP Server List and click Remove Specify up to five email addresses to receive the alert messages and click Apply SMTP Admin Status F Enabled Email Source Address Matrix V Series this c Severity 4 Warning gt SMTP Server List New 192 168 1 4 192 168 1 5 a SMTP Server Email Destination Address List New chris this company com steve this company com lt lt Add Email Destination Address Remove Figure 3 15 Enabling and Configuring SMTP Alerts 3 24 Basic Configuration 3 CLI Enter the IP address of at least one SMTP server set the syslog severity level to trigger an email message and specify the switch source and up to five recipient destination email addresses Enable SMTP with the logging sendmail command to complete the configuration Use the show logging sendmail command to display the current SMTP configuration Console config logging sendmail host 192 168 1 4 4 49 Console config logging sendmail level 3 4 49 Console config logging sendmail source email big wheels matel com 4 50 Console config logging sendmail destination email chris matel com 4 50 Console config logging sendmail 4 51 Console config exit Console show logging sendmail 4 47 SMTP servers Active SMTP server 0 0 0 0 SMTP minimum severity level 4 SMTP destination email addresses 1 chrisethis company com 0 SMT
191. config ext acl permit tcp 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any control flag 2 2 Console config ext acl 3 56 Access Control Lists 3 Configuring a MAC ACL Command Attributes Action An ACL can contain all permit rules or all deny rules Default Permit rules Source Destination MAC Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to indicate a specific MAC address or MAC to specify an address range with the Address and Bitmask fields Options Any Host MAC Default Any Source Destination MAC Address Source or destination MAC address Source Destination MAC Bitmask Hexidecimal mask for source or destination MAC address VID VLAN ID Range 1 4095 VID Mask VLAN bitmask Range 1 4095 Ethernet Type This option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets Range 600 fff hex A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060 A few of the more common types include 0800 IP 0806 ARP 8137 IPX Ethernet Type Mask Protocol bitmask Range 600 fff hex Packet Format This attribute includes the following packet types Any Any Ethernet packet type Untagged eth2 Untagged Ethernet Il packets Untagged 802 3 Untagged Ethernet 802 3 packets Tagged eth2 Tagged Ethernet II packets Tagged 802 3 Tagged Ethernet 802 3 packets Command Usage Egress MAC ACLs only work for destination mac known packets
192. control Rate Limiting Input and output rate limiting per port Port Mirroring One or more ports mirrored to single analysis port Port Trunking Supports up to 6 trunks using either static or dynamic trunking LACP Broadcast Storm Supported Control Static Address Up to 16K MAC addresses in the forwarding table IEEE 802 1D Bridge Supports dynamic data switching and addresses learning Store and Forward Switching Supported to ensure wire speed switching while eliminating bad frames Spanning Tree Protocol Supports standard STP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP Virtual LANs Up to 255 using IEEE 802 1Q port based protocol based or private VLANs Traffic Prioritization Default port priority traffic class map queue scheduling IP Precedence or Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP and TCP UDP Port Multicast Filtering Supports IGMP snooping and query 4 Introduction Description of Software Features The switch provides a wide range of advanced performance enhancing features Flow control eliminates the loss of packets due to bottlenecks caused by port saturation Broadcast storm suppression prevents broadcast traffic storms from engulfing the network Untagged port based tagged and protocol based VLANs plus support for automatic GVRP VLAN registration provide traffic security and efficient use of network bandwidth CoS priority que
193. ct Telnet connections Example To enter console line mode enter the following command Console config line console Console config line Related Commands show line 4 19 show users 4 61 login This command enables password checking at login Use the no form to disable password checking and allow connections without a password Syntax login local no login local Selects local password checking Authentication is based on the user name specified with the username command Default Setting login local Command Mode Line Configuration 4 12 Line Commands 4 Command Usage There are three authentication modes provided by the switch itself at login login selects authentication by a single global password as specified by the password line configuration command When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE mode login local selects authentication via the user name and password specified by the username command i e default setting When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE or Privileged Exec PE mode depending on the user s privilege level 0 or 15 respectively no login selects no authentication When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE mode This command controls login authentication via the switch itself To configure user names and passwords for remote authentication servers you must use
194. ctivity across the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTI settings Command Attributes MST Instance Instance identifier of this spanning tree Default 0 Priority The priority of a spanning tree instance Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Default 32768 VLANs in MST Instance VLANs assigned this instance MST ID Instance identifier to configure Range 0 4094 Default 0 VLAN ID VLAN to assign to this selected MST instance Range 1 4094 The other global attributes are described under Displaying Global Settings page 3 95 The attributes displayed by the CLI for individual interfaces are described under Displaying Interface Settings page 3 99 Web Click Spanning Tree MSTP VLAN Configuration Select an instance identifier from the list set the instance priority and click Apply To add the VLAN members to an MSTI instance enter the instance identifier the VLAN identifier and click Add MSTP VLAN Configuration MST Instance ID 0 gt Spanning Tree State Enabled Designated Root 32768 0 000043420080 Bridge ID 32768 0 0000A3420080 Root Port 0 Max Age 20 Root Path Cost 0 Hello Time 2 Configuration Changes 1 Forward Delay 15 __ Last Topology Change 0 d 0 h5 min 15 s Priority 0 61440 32768 MSTP VLAN Configuration VLAN in MST
195. d by the MSTP to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Note that when the Path Cost Method is set to short page 3 63 the maximum path cost is 65 535 e Range Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 e Default Ethernet Half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 Fast Ethernet Half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet Full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 Web Click Spanning Tree MSTP Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Enter the priority and path cost for an interface and click Apply MSTP Port Configuration MST Instance ID 9 7 Priority MST Path Cost Port STA State 0 240 1200000000 1 Forwarding hes fioo Discarding hee fioo Discarding fiee foo Discarding ooo pooo Discarding fes fioooo zi Figure 3 60 MSTP Port Configuration Trunk Oo e win CLI This example sets the MSTP attributes for port 4 Console config interface ethernet 1 4 4 125 Console config if spanning tree mst port priority 0 4 168 Console config if spanning tree mst cost 50 4 167 Console config if 3 109 3 Configuring the Switch VLAN Configuration IEEE 802 1Q VLA
196. d priority e instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 e priority Priority of the a spanning tree instance Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage e MST priority is used in selecting the root bridge and alternate bridge of the specified instance The device with the highest priority i e lowest numerical value becomes the MSTI root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device e You can set this switch to act as the MSTI root device by specifying a priority of 0 or as the MSTI alternate device by specifying a priority of 16384 Example Console config mstp mst 1 priority 4096 Console config mstp name This command configures the name for the multiple spanning tree region in which this switch is located Use the no form to clear the name Syntax name name name Name of the spanning tree Default Setting Switch s MAC address Command Mode MST Configuration 4 161 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage The MST region name and revision number page 4 162 are used to designate a unique MST region A bridge i e spanning tree compliant device such as this switch can only belong to one MST region And all brid
197. d the internal spanning tree IST that connects these instances use a hop count to specify the maximum number of bridges that will propagate a BPDU Each bridge decrements the hop count by one before passing on the BPDU When the hop count reaches zero the message is dropped Example Console config mstp max hops 30 Console config mstp spanning tree spanning disabled This command disables the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface Use the no form to reenable the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface Syntax no spanning tree spanning disabled Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example This example disables the spanning tree algorithm for port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree spanning disabled Console config if 4 163 4 Command Line Interface spanning tree cost This command configures the spanning tree path cost for the specified interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree cost cost no spanning tree cost cost The path cost for the port Range 1 200 000 000 The recommended range is e Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 e Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 Default Setting e Ethernet half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 e Fast Ethernet half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100
198. d the CLI session enter Exit Vty 0 Note You can open up to four sessions to the device via Telnet Entering Commands 4 Entering Commands This section describes how to enter CLI commands Keywords and Arguments A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments Keywords identify a command and arguments specify configuration parameters For example in the command show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 show interfaces and status are keywords ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type and 1 5 specifies the unit port You can enter commands as follows To enter a simple command enter the command keyword To enter multiple commands enter each command in the required order For example to enable Privileged Exec command mode and display the startup configuration enter Console gt enable Console show startup config To enter commands that require parameters enter the required parameters after the command keyword For example to set a password for the administrator enter Console config username admin password 0 smith Minimum Abbreviation The CLI will accept a minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a command For example the command configure can be entered as con If an entry is ambiguous the system will prompt for further input Command Completion If you terminate input with a Tab key the CLI will print the remaining characters of a partial keywor
199. d to a Class of Service value by the switch and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue Because different priority information may be contained in the traffic this switch maps priority values to the output queues in the following manner e The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port Priority IP Precedence or DSCP Priority and then Default Port Priority IP Precedence and DSCP Priority cannot both be enabled Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other Selecting IP Precedence DSCP Priority The switch allows you to choose between using IP Precedence or DSCP priority Select one of the methods or disable this feature Command Attributes e Disabled Disables both priority services This is the default setting IP Precedence Maps layer 3 4 priorities using IP Precedence IP DSCP Maps layer 3 4 priorities using Differentiated Services Code Point Mapping Web Click Priority IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status Select Disabled IP Precedence or IP DSCP from the scroll down menu IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status IP Precedence v Figure 3 76 IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status CLI The following example enables IP Precedence service on the switch Console config map ip precedence 4 197 Console config 3 131 3 Configuring the Switch Mapping IP Precedence The Type of Service ToS octet in the I
200. d to the serial port Some baud rates available on devices connected to the port might not be supported The system indicates if the speed you selected is not supported If you select the auto option the switch will automatically detect the baud rate configured on the attached terminal and adjust the speed accordingly Example To specify 57600 bps enter this command Console config line speed 57600 Console config line stopbits This command sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax stopbits 1 2 1 One stop bit e 2 Two stop bits Default Setting 1 stop bit Command Mode Line Configuration Example To specify 2 stop bits enter this command Console config line stopbits 2 Console config line disconnect Use this command to terminate an SSH Telnet or console connection Syntax disconnect session id session id The session identifier for an SSH Telnet or console connection Range 0 4 Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 18 Line Commands 4 Command Usage Specifying session identifier 0 will disconnect the console connection Specifying any other identifiers for an active session will disconnect an SSH or Telnet connection Example Console disconnect 1 Console Related Commands show ssh 4 41 show users 4 61 show line This command displays the terminal line s param
201. d up to the point of ambiguity In the logging history example typing log followed by a tab will result in printing the command up to logging Getting Help on Commands You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help command You can also display command syntax by using the character to list keywords or parameters 4 Command Line Interface Showing Commands If you enter a at the command prompt the system will display the first level of keywords for the current command class Normal Exec or Privileged Exec or configuration class Global ACL Interface Line VLAN Database or MSTP You can also display a list of valid keywords for a specific command For example the command show displays a list of possible show commands Console show access group access list bridge ext calendar dns dot1x garp gvrp history hosts interfaces ip lacp line logging mac mac address table management map marking port protocol vlan public key pvlan queue radius server running config snmp sntp spanning tree ssh startup config system tacacs server users Access groups Access lists Bridge extend information Date information DNS information how 802 1x content arp property how GVRP information of interface nformation of history ost information nformation of interfaces P information how lacp statistic TY line information how the cont
202. de to enable 802 1x on port 2 and allows up to ten clients to connect to this port Console config interface ethernet 1 2 4 125 Console config if dot1lx port control auto 4 80 Console config if dot1lx operation mode multi host max count 10 4 80 Console config if Displaying 802 1x Statistics This switch can display statistics for dot1x protocol exchanges for any port Table 3 5 802 1x Statistics Parameter Description Rx EAPOL Start The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAPOL Logoff The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAPOL Invalid The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized Rx EAPOL Total The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP Resp ld The number of EAP Resp Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator 3 48 User Authentication 3 Table 3 5 802 1x Statistics Parameter Description Rx EAP Resp Oth The number of valid EAP Response frames other than Resp Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP LenError The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid Rx Last EAPOLVer The protocol version number carried in the most
203. dhcp restart This command submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command issues a BOOTP or DHCP client request for any IP interface that has been set to BOOTP or DHCP mode via the ip address command DHCP requires the server to reassign the client s last address if available Ifthe BOOTP or DHCP server has been moved to a different domain the network portion of the address provided to the client will be based on this new domain Example In the following example the device is reassigned the same address Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address dhcp Console config if end Console ip dhcp restart Console show ip interface IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode DHCP Console 4 214 IP Interface Commands 4 Related Commands ip address 4 213 ip default gateway This command establishes a static route between this switch and management stations that exist on another network segment Use the no form to remove the static route Syntax ip default gateway gateway no ip default gateway gateway IP address of the default gateway Default Setting No static route is established Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage A gateway must be defined if the management station is located in a different IP segment Example The following example defines a default gat
204. disabled before you can configure or force the interface to use the Speed Duplex Mode or Flow Control options Web Click Port Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Modify the required interface settings and click Apply Port Configuration Port Name Admin ons Flow Control Autonegatiation Forced Mode Trunk 5 Enabled vj M 10h W 1100n M 1000n M Sym z FZ Enable H Fio M1001 F 10001 TF None Enabled v M 10h M 100r F 10007 TF sym None F Enable a iz tor M1001 F 10007 M Fe ona Enabled R ton M 1100h M 1000 FT sym F Enable ja Fi ior M1001 10007 M FC None Enabled gt R toh M 1100h M 1000 TF sym None FZ Enable El ior M1001 1000 M FC ona Enabled F 10h 1001 M 1000n M Sym None i lag a zi Fio Faia F 10007 M FC None zj Figure 3 40 Port Port Configuration CLI Select the interface and then enter the required settings Console config interface ethernet 1 13 4 125 Console config if description RD SW 13 4 126 Console config if shutdown 4 130 Console config if no shutdown Console config if no negotiation 4 127 Console config if speed duplex 100half 4 126 Console config if lowcontrol 4 129 Console config if negotiation Console config if capabilities 100half 4 128 Console config if capabilities 100full Console config if capabilities flowcontrol Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 21
205. dmin status Shows if this interface is enabled External path cost The path cost for the IST This parameter is used by the STA to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Internal path cost The path cost for the MST See the proceeding item 3 100 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 e Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm If the path cost for all ports on a switch is the same the port with the highest priority i e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Algorithm is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with the lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Designated root The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device Fast forwarding This field provides the same information as Admin Edge port and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products Admin Edge Port You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forw
206. dministrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 Console config if 4 142 Link Aggregation Commands 4 lacp admin key Ethernet Interface This command configures a port s LACP administration key Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner admin key key no lacp actor partner admin key actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link e key The port admin key must be set to the same value for ports that belong to the same link aggregation group LAG Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage e Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if 1 the LACP system priority matches 2 the LACP port admin key matches and 3 the LACP port channel admin key matches if configured Ifthe port channel admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed i e it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP
207. download select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name and then click Transfer from Server Transfer Configuration File from Server TFTP Server IP Address 10 1 0 19 Source File Name config Destination File Name C none G startup Transfer from Server H Figure 3 10 Downloading Configuration Settings If you download to a new file name then select the new file from the drop down box for Startup Configuration File and press Apply Changes To use the new settings reboot the system via the System Reset menu Start Up Configuration File File Name startup Apply Changes E m Figure 3 11 Setting the Startup Configuration Settings CLI Enter the IP address of the TFTP server specify the source file on the server set the startup file name on the switch and then restart the switch Console copy tftp startup config TFTP server ip address 192 168 1 19 Source configuration file name config 1 Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console reload 3 18 Basic Configuration 3 If you download the startup configuration file under a new file name you can set this file as the startup file at a later time and then restart the switch Console config Console config boot system config startup new 4 67 Console config exit Console reload 4 22 Configuring Event Logging The s
208. ds Server Timeout 10 seconds Re authentication Max Count 2 Figure 3 26 802 1x Information CLI This example shows the default protocol settings for 802 1x For a description of the additional entries displayed in the CLI See show dot1x on page 4 83 tx period reauth max max req 802 1X Port Port Name 1 1 1 2 1 47 1 48 802 1X Port Console show dot1x Global 802 1X Parameters reauth enabled yes reauth period 3600 quiet period 60 30 supp timeout 30 server timeout 30 2 2 Summary Status disabled disabled disabled enabled Details Operation Mode Single Host Single Host Single Host Single Host 802 1X is disabled on port 1 1 802 1X is disabled on port 1 2 802 1X is disabled on port 1 47 Mode ForceAuthorized ForceAuthorized ForceAuthorized Auto 4 83 Authorized n a n a n a yes 3 45 3 Configuring the Switch 802 1X is enabled on port 1 48 Status Authorized Operation mode Single Host Max count 5 Port control Auto Supplicant 00 00 e8 49 5e dc Current Identifier 3 Authenticator State Machine State Authenticated Reauth Count 0 Backend State Machine State Idle Request Count 0 Identifier Server 2 Reauthentication State Machine State Initialize Console Configuring 802 1x Global Settings The dot1x protocol includes global parameters that control the client authentication process that runs between the client a
209. duling weights 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 for queues 0 through 7 respectively This is the default selection e Strict Services the egress queues in sequential order transmitting all traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues Web Click Priority Queue Mode Select Strict or WRR then click Apply Queue Mode Queue Mode Wrr gt Figure 3 74 Queue Mode CLI The following sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode Console config queue mode strict 4 192 Console config exit Console show queue mode 4 195 Queue mode strict Console Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes This switch uses the Weighted Round Robin WRR algorithm to determine the frequency at which it services each priority queue As described in Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues on page 3 127 the traffic classes are mapped to one of the eight egress queues provided for each port You can assign a weight to each of these queues and thereby to the corresponding traffic priorities This weight sets the frequency at which each queue will be polled for service and subsequently affects the response time for software applications assigned a specific priority value Command Attributes WRR Setting Table Displays a list of weights for each traffic class i e queue Weight Value Set a new weight for the selected traffic class Range 1 15 CLI shows Queue ID 3 1
210. e 300 sec IGMP snooping version Version 2 Console show mac address table multicast This command shows known multicast addresses Syntax show mac address table multicast vlan vian id user igmp snooping e vian id VLAN ID 1 to 4094 e user Display only the user configured multicast entries igmp snooping Display only entries learned through IGMP snooping Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Member types displayed include IGMP or USER depending on selected options Example The following shows the multicast entries learned through IGMP snooping for VLAN 1 Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 igmp snooping VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type I 224 1 2 3 Eth1 11 IGMP Console 4 207 4 Command Line Interface IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 Table 4 67 IGMP Query Commands Layer 2 Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping querier Allows this device to act as the querier for IGMP snooping GC 4 208 ip igmp snooping Configures the query count GC 4 208 query count ip igmp snooping Configures the query interval GC 4 209 query interval ip igmp snooping Configures the report delay GC 4 210 query max response time ip igmp snooping Configures the query timeout GC 4 210 router port expire time ip igmp snooping querier This command enables the switch as an IGMP querier Use the no form to di
211. e Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Use the VLAN database command mode to add change and delete VLANs After finishing configuration changes you can display the VLAN settings by entering the show vlan command Use the interface vlan command mode to define the port membership mode and add or remove ports from a VLAN The results of these commands are written to the running configuration file and you can display this file by entering the show running config command Example Console config vlan database Console config vlan Related Commands show vlan 4 181 4 173 4 Command Line Interface vlan This command configures a VLAN Use the no form to restore the default settings or delete a VLAN Syntax vlan vlan id name vlan name media ethernet state active suspend no vlan vlan id name state e vian id ID of configured VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes name Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name vlan name ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters media ethernet Ethernet media type state Keyword to be followed by the VLAN state active VLAN is operational suspend VLAN is suspended Suspended VLANs do not pass packets Default Setting By default only VLAN 1 exists and is active Command Mode VLAN Database Configuration Command Usage no vlan vian id deletes the VLAN no vlan vian id name removes the VLAN name no vlan vian id state re
212. e then click Apply Traffic Classes Priority Traffic Class o ik e 1 fo o N slo am w m n BG Figure 3 73 Traffic Classes CLI The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments to a one to one mapping Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if queue cos map 0 0 Console config if queue cos map 1 1 Console config if queue cos map 2 2 Console config if end Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 Information of Eth 1 1 CoS Value gt 01234567 Priority Queue 01234567 console 4 125 4 194 4 196 Mapping specific values for CoS priorities is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch 3 128 Class of Service Configuration 3 Selecting the Queue Mode You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are serviced or use Weighted Round Robin WRR queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue This prevents the head of line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing Command Attributes WRR Weighted Round Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using sche
213. e 1 to CoS value 0 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip dscp 1 cos 0 Console config if show map ip port This command shows the IP port priority map Syntax show map ip port interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 4 201 4 Command Line Interface Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example The following shows that HTTP traffic has been mapped to CoS value 0 Console show map ip port ethernet 1 5 TCP port mapping status enabled Port Port no Cos Eth 1 5 80 o Console Related Commands map ip port Global Configuration 4 197 map ip port Interface Configuration 4 198 show map ip precedence This command shows the IP precedence priority map Syntax show map ip precedence interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 202 Priority Commands 4 Example Console show map ip precedence ethernet 1 5 Precedence mapping status disabled Port Precedence COS Eth 1 5 o o Eth 1 5 Te I Eth 1 5 2 2 Eth 1 5 3 3 Eth 1 5 4 4 Eth 1 5 5 5 Eth 1 5 6 6 Eth 1 5 7 7 Console Related Commands map ip port Global Configuration 4 197 map ip precedence Interface Configuration 4 199 sho
214. e 3 59 Figure 3 60 Figure 3 61 Figure 3 62 Figure 3 63 Figure 3 64 Figure 3 65 Figure 3 66 Figure 3 67 Figure 3 68 Figure 3 69 Figure 3 70 Figure 3 71 Figure 3 72 Figure 3 73 Figure 3 74 Figure 3 75 Figure 3 76 Figure 3 77 Figure 3 78 Figure 3 79 Figure 3 80 Figure 3 81 Figure 3 82 Figure 3 83 Figure 3 84 Figure 3 85 Figure 3 86 Figure 3 87 xvi LACP Aggregation Port LACP Port Counters Information LACP Port Internal Information LACP Port Neighbors Information Port Broadcast Control Mirror Port Configuration Rate Limit Configuration Port Statistics Static Addresses Dynamic Addresses Address Aging STA Information STA Configuration STA Port Information STA Port Configuration MSTP VLAN Configuration MSTP Port Information MSTP Port Configuration Globally Enabling GVRP VLAN Basic Information VLAN Current Table VLAN Static List Creating VLANs VLAN Static Table Adding Static Members VLAN Static Membership by Port VLAN Port Configuration Private VLAN Status Private VLAN Link Status Protocol VLAN Configuration Protocol VLAN Port Configuration Default Port Priority Traffic Classes Queue Mode Queue Scheduling IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status IP Precedence Priority IP DSCP Priority IP Port Priority Status IP Port Priority ACL CoS Priority ACL Marker IGMP Configuration Multicast Router Port Information Static Multicast Router Port Configurati
215. e allowed management access to the switch through the web interface SNMP or Telnet Command Usage The management interfaces are open to all IP addresses by default Once you add an entry to a filter list access to that interface is restricted to the specified addresses If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid address the switch will reject the connection enter an event message in the system log and send a trap message to the trap manager IP address can be configured for SNMP web and Telnet access respectively Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses either individual addresses or address ranges When entering addresses for the same group i e SNMP web or Telnet the switch will not accept overlapping address ranges When entering addresses for different groups the switch will accept overlapping address ranges You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range You must delete the entire range and reenter the addresses You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address or by specifying both the start address and end address Command Attributes Web IP Filter Configures IP address es for the web group SNMP IP Filter Configures IP address es for the SNMP group Telnet IP Filter Configures IP address es for the Telnet group IP Filter List IP address which are allowed management access to this interface
216. e binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and then compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned e You can specify both Precedence and ToS in the same rule However if DSCP is used then neither Precedence nor ToS can be specified The control code bitmask is a decimal number representing an equivalent bit mask that is applied to the control code Enter a decimal number where the equivalent binary bit 1 means to match a bit and O means to ignore a bit The following bits may be specified 1 fin Finish 2 syn Synchronize 4 rst Reset 8 psh Push 16 ack Acknowledgement 32 urg Urgent pointer For example use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the following flags set SYN flag valid use control code 2 2 Both SYN and ACK valid use control code 18 18 SYN valid and ACK invalid use control code 2 18 Example This example accepts any incoming packets if the source address is within subnet 10 7 1 x For example if the rule is matched i e the rule 10 7 1 0 amp 255 255 255 0 equals the masked address 10 7 1 2 amp 255 255 255 0 the packet passes through Console config ext acl permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any Console config ext acl This allows TCP
217. e separated list of numbers The CoS value is a number from 0 to 7 where 7 is the highest priority 4 194 Default Setting Priority Commands 4 This switch supports Class of Service by using eight priority queues with Weighted Round Robin queuing for each port Eight separate traffic classes are defined in IEEE 802 1p The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard as shown below Table 4 61 Default CoS Priority Levels Queue 0 1 2 3 4 5 Priority 2 0 1 3 4 5 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage CoS values assigned at the ingress port are also used at the egress port This command sets the CoS priority for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments to a one to one mapping Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Infor Cos Prio Conso config interface ethernet 1 1 config if queue cos map 0 0 config if queue cos map 1 1 config if queue cos map 2 2 e config if exit e show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 mation of Eth 1 1 Value 7 0 1 2 rity Queue 0 1 2 e ooo o 345 345 OV OV 7 Z Related Commands show queue cos map 4 196 show This command shows the current queue mode Defau N queue mode It Setting one Command Mode P rivileged Exec 4 195 4 Co
218. e servers for dynamic lookup Static Host Table Configures static entries for domain name to address mapping 3 148 Cache Displays cache entries discovered by designated name servers 3 150 Basic Configuration 3 Basic Configuration Displaying System Information You can easily identify the system by displaying the device name location and contact information Field Attributes e System Name Name assigned to the switch system Object ID MIB I object ID for switch s network management subsystem e Location Specifies the system location e Contact Administrator responsible for the system System Up Time Length of time the management agent has been up These additional parameters are displayed for the CLI MAC Address The physical layer address for this switch Web server Shows if management access via HTTP is enabled Web server port Shows the TCP port number used by the web interface Web secure server Shows if management access via HTTPS is enabled Web secure server port Shows the TCP port used by the HTTPS interface Telnet server Shows if management access via Telnet is enabled Telnet server port Shows the TCP port used by the Telnet interface Authentication login Shows the user login authentication sequence e POST result Shows results of the power on self test Web Click System System Information Specify the system name location
219. e the port Syntax no ip access group acl_name in out acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e in Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets e out Indicates that this list applies to egress packets Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage A port can only be bound to one ACL Ifa port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL the switch will replace the old binding with the new one e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port Example Console config int eth 1 25 Console config if ip access group david in Console config if Related Commands show ip access list 4 92 show ip access group This command shows the ports assigned to IP ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip access group Interface ethernet 1 25 IP access list david in Console 4 97 4 Command Line Interface Related Commands ip access group 4 97 map access list ip This command sets the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule The specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output queue it is not written to the packet itself Use the no form to remove the CoS mapping Syntax no map access list ip ac _name cos cos value acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters cos value CoS value
220. e the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames The current switch chip only supports symmetric pause frames FC Supports flow control Flow control can eliminate frame loss by blocking traffic from end stations or segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill When enabled back pressure is used for half duplex operation and IEEE 802 3x for full duplex operation Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually required to solve a problem Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub Default Autonegotiation enabled Advertised capabilities for 1000BASE T 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full 1000BASE SX LX LH 1000full e Forced Mode Shows the forced preferred port type to use for the combination ports 21 24 or 45 48 Copper Forced Always uses the built in RJ 45 port Copper Preferred Auto Uses the built in RJ 45 port if both combination types are functioning and the RJ 45 port has a valid link SFP Forced Always uses the SFP port even if module is not installed SFP Preferred Auto Uses SFP port if both combination types are functioning and the SFP port has a valid link 3 67 3 Configuring the Switch Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To create trunks and select port members see Creating Trunk Groups on page 3 69 Note Auto negotiation must be
221. ec Example Console clear dns cache Console show dns cache NO FLAG TYPE IP TTL DOMAIN Console 4 124 Interface Commands 4 Interface Commands These commands are used to display or set communication parameters for an Ethernet port aggregated link or VLAN Table 4 41 Interface Commands Command Function Mode Page interface Configures an interface type and enters interface configuration GC 4 125 mode description Adds a description to an interface configuration IC 4 126 speed duplex Configures the speed and duplex operation of a given interface IC 4 126 when autonegotiation is disabled negotiation Enables autonegotiation of a given interface IC 4 127 capabilities Advertises the capabilities of a given interface for use in IC 4 128 autonegotiation flowcontrol Enables flow control on a given interface IC 4 129 combo forced mode Force port type selected for combination ports IC 4 130 shutdown Disables an interface IC 4 130 switchport broadcast Configures the broadcast storm control threshold IC 4 131 packet rate clear counters Clears statistics on an interface PE 4 132 show interfaces status Displays status for the specified interface NE PE 4 133 show interfaces Displays statistics for the specified interfaces NE PE 4 134 counters show interfaces Displays the administrative and operational status of an NE PE 4 135 switchport
222. ed back pressure is used for half duplex operation and IEEE 802 3x for full duplex operation To force flow control on or off with the flowcontrol or no flowcontrol command use the no negotiation command to disable auto negotiation on the selected interface When using the negotiation command to enable auto negotiation the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command To enable flow control under auto negotiation flowcontrol must be included in the capabilities list for any port Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually required to solve a problem Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub 4 129 4 Command Line Interface Example The following example enables flow control on port 5 Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 5 config if flowcontrol config if no negotiation config if Related Commands negotiation 4 127 capabilities flowcontrol symmetric 4 128 combo forced mode This command forces the port type selected for combination ports 21 24 45 48 Use the no form to restore the default mode Syntax combo forced mode mode no combo forced mode mode copper forced Always uses the built in RJ 45 port copper preferred auto Uses the built in RJ 45 port if both combination types are functioning and the RJ 45 port has a valid link
223. ed Discarding 0 200000 61440 0 0000E9313131 128 5 an to Enabled Disabled oint xj Figure 3 56 STA Port Information 3 101 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example shows the STA attributes for port 5 Console show spanning tree ethernet 1 5 4 170 Eth 1 5 information Admin status enable Role disable State discarding External path cost 10000 Internal path cost 10000 Priority 128 Designated cost 200000 Designated port 128 5 Designated root 61440 0 0000E9313131 Designated bridge 61440 0 0000E9313131 Fast forwarding enable Forward transitions 0 Admin edge port enable Oper edge port enable Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to point Spanning Tree Status enable Console Configuring Interface Settings You can configure RSTP and MSTP attributes for specific interfaces including port priority path cost link type and edge port You may use a different priority or path cost for ports of the same media type to indicate the preferred path link type to indicate a point to point connection or shared media connection and edge port to indicate if the attached device can support fast forwarding Command Attributes The following attributes are read only and cannot be changed e STA State Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree See Displaying Interface Settings on page 3 99 for additional information e Discarding Port receiv
224. ed VLANs The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped into a common VLAN This may require non standard devices to pass traffic between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a specific protocol This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits of VLANs including security and easy accessibility To avoid these problems you can configure this switch with protocol based VLANs that divide the physical network into logical VLAN groups for each required protocol When a frame is received at a port its VLAN membership can then be determined based on the protocol type being used by the inbound packets Command Usage To configure protocol based VLANs follow these steps 1 First configure VLAN groups for the protocols you want to use page 3 115 Although not mandatory we suggest configuring a separate VLAN for each major protocol running on your network Do not add port members at this time 2 Create a protocol group for each of the protocols you want to assign to a VLAN using the Protocol VLAN Configuration page 3 Then map the protocol for each interface to the appropriate VLAN using the Protocol VLAN Port Configuration page 3 122 VLAN Configuration 3 Configuring Protocol Groups Create a protocol group for one or more protocols Command Attributes Protocol Group ID Group identifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 e Frame
225. ed for VLANs for which the ingress port is not a member Default Disabled Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be flooded to all other ports except for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be discarded Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames such as GVRP or STP However they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames such as GMRP GVRP Status Enables disables GVRP for the interface GVRP must be globally enabled for the switch before this setting can take effect See Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities on page 3 12 When disabled any GVRP packets received on this port will be discarded and no GVRP registrations will be propagated from other ports Default Disabled GARP Join Timer The interval between transmitting requests queries to participate in a VLAN group Range 20 1000 centiseconds Default 20 GARP Leave Timer The interval a port waits before leaving a VLAN group This time should be set to more than twice the join time This ensures that after a Leave 3 119 3 Configuring the Switch or LeaveAll message has been issued the applicants can rejoin before the port actually leaves the group Range
226. ement station to fast forwarding i e enable Admin Edge Port to improve the switch s response time to management commands issued through the web interface See Configuring Interface Settings on page 3 102 3 Configuring the Switch Navigating the Web Browser Interface To access the web browser interface you must first enter a user name and password The administrator has Read Write access to all configuration parameters and statistics The default user name and password for the administrator is admin Home Page When your web browser connects with the switch s web agent the home page is displayed as shown below The home page displays the Main Menu on the left side of the screen and System Information on the right side The Main Menu links are used to navigate to other menus and display configuration parameters and statistics Note The screen captures used in this manual are based on either the ES4512C ES4524C or ES4548C but are all the same for both switches except for the port count famed Mode Acive x moooncuia Zweelee paa LogOut aera aE eee eal 20 10 100 1000 ports 4 Gigabit Combo ports L2 L4 managed BUI System r Baie standalone switch AA SNMP l a Security System Name l aE Port Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 6 1051 a PoE _ S UUU GaAddress Table Location Spanning Tree Contact System Up Time 0 days 1 hours 4 minutes and 11 54 seconds
227. enabled or disabled e LACP Shows if LACP is enabled or disabled e Port Security Shows if port security is enabled or disabled Max MAC count Shows the maximum number of MAC address that can be learned by a port 0 20 addresses e Port security action Shows the response to take when a security violation is detected shutdown trap trap and shutdown e Combo forced mode Shows the forced preferred port type to use for combination ports 21 24 or 45 48 copper forced copper preferred auto SFP forced SFP preferred auto Current status e Link Status Indicates if the link is up or down Operation speed duplex Shows the current speed and duplex mode Flow control type Indicates the type of flow control currently in use IEEE 802 3x Back Pressure or none CLI This example shows the connection status for Port 5 Console show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 4 133 Information of Eth 1 13 Basic information Port type 1000T Mac address 00 30 f 1 47 58 46 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full Broadcast storm Enabled Broadcast storm limit 500 packets second Flow control Disabled Lacp Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Port security action None Combo forced mode None Current status Link status Down Operation speed duplex 100full Flow control type None Console
228. ent VLANs It simplifies network management provides for even faster convergence than RSTP by limiting the size of each region and prevents VLAN members from being segmented from the rest of the group as sometimes occurs with IEEE 802 1D STP Virtual LANs The switch supports up to 255 VLANs A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network The switch supports tagged VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard Members of VLAN groups can be dynamically learned via GVRP or ports can be manually assigned to a specific set of VLANs This allows the switch to restrict traffic to the VLAN groups to which a user has been assigned By segmenting your network into VLANs you can Eliminate broadcast storms which severely degrade performance in a flat network e Simplify network management for node changes moves by remotely configuring VLAN membership for any port rather than having to manually change the network connection e Provide data security by restricting all traffic to the originating VLAN Use private VLANs to restrict traffic to pass only between data ports and the uplink ports thereby isolating adjacent ports within the same VLAN and allowing you to limit the total number of VLANs that need to be configured Use protocol VLANs to restrict traffic to specified interfaces based on protocol type Traffic Prioritization T
229. ents of logging buffers MAC access lists Set configuration of the address table Show management ip filter Map priority Specify marker Characteristics of the port P S T I UNHU UHHEHAQUA rotocol vlan information how information of public key nformation of private VLAN nformation of priority queue RADIUS server information The system configuration of running SNMP statistics Sntp Specify spanning tree S T ecure shell he system configuration of starting up Information of system Login by tacacs server Display information about terminal lines version System hardware and software status vlan Switch VLAN Virtual Interface Console show The command show interfaces will display the following information Console Console counters protocol vlan status switchport show interfaces Information of interfaces Protocol vlan information Information of interfaces Information of interfaces counters status switchport Entering Commands 4 Partial Keyword Lookup If you terminate a partial keyword with a question mark alternatives that match the initial letters are provided Remember not to leave a space between the command and question mark For example s shows all the keywords starting with s Console show s snmp sntp spanning tree ssh startup config system console show s Negating the Effect of Commands For many configuration commands
230. erfaces You can configure VLAN behavior for specific interfaces including the default VLAN identifier PVID accepted frame types ingress filtering GVRP status and GARP timers Command Usage GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across the network e GARP Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP to register or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN The default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data rate These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties with GVRP registration deregistration Command Attributes e PVID VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames received on the interface Default 1 Ifan interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member For all other VLANs an interface must first be configured as an untagged member before you can assign its PVID to that group Acceptable Frame Type Sets the interface to accept all frame types including tagged or untagged frames or only tagged frames When set to receive all frame types any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN Option All Tagged Default All e Ingress Filtering Determines how to process frames tagg
231. erier When enabled the switch can serve as the Querier which is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic Default Enabled IGMP Query Count Sets the maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the multicast group Range 2 10 Default 2 e IGMP Query Interval Sets the frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host query messages Range 60 125 seconds Default 125 IGMP Report Delay Sets the time between receiving an IGMP Report for an IP multicast address on a port before the switch sends an IGMP Query out of that port and removes the entry from its list Range 5 30 seconds Default 10 e IGMP Query Timeout The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port i e the interface which had been receiving query packets to have expired Range 300 500 seconds Default 300 IGMP Version Sets the protocol version for compatibility with other devices on the network Range 1 2 Default 2 Notes 1 All systems on the subnet must support the same version 2 Some attributes are only enabled for IGMPv2 including IGMP Report Delay and IGMP Query Timeout 3 140 required and then click Apply The default settings are shown below IGMP Configuration Multicast Filtering 3 Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Configuration Adjust the IGMP settings as
232. ermine the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames The current switch ASIC only supports symmetric pause frames Default Setting e 100BASE TX 10half 10full 100half 100full e 1000BASE T 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full e 1000BASE SX LX LH 1000full Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage When auto negotiation is enabled with the negotiation command the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilites command When auto negotiation is disabled you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed duplex and flowcontrol commands 4 128 Interface Commands 4 Example The following example configures Ethernet port 5 capabilities to 100half 100full and flow control Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if capabilities 100half Console config if capabilities 100full Console config if capabilities flowcontrol Console config if Related Commands negotiation 4 127 speed duplex 4 126 flowcontrol 4 129 flowcontrol This command enables flow control Use the no form to disable flow control Syntax no flowcontrol Default Setting Flow control enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Flow control can eliminate frame loss by blocking traffic from end stations or segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill When enabl
233. ernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show map access list mac Access list to COS of Eth 1 5 Access list M5 cos 0 Console Related Commands map access list mac 4 108 4 109 4 Command Line Interface match access list mac This command changes the IEEE 802 1p priority of a Layer 2 frame matching the defined ACL rule This feature is commonly referred to as ACL packet marking Use the no form to remove the ACL marker Syntax match access list mac acl_name set priority priority no match access list mac acl_name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e priority Class of Service value in the IEEE 802 1p priority tag Range 0 7 7 is the highest priority Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage You must configure an ACL mask before you can change frame priorities based on an ACL rule Example Console config interface ethernet 1 12 Console config if match access list mac jerry set priority 0 Console config if Related Commands show marking 4 100 4 110 Access Control List Commands 4 ACL Information Table 4 37 ACL Information Commands Command Function Mode Page show access list Show all ACLs and associated rules PE 4 111 show access group Shows the ACLs assigned to each port PE 4 111
234. es STA configuration messages but does not forward packets Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses e Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Configuration only The following interface attributes can be configured e Spanning Tree Enables disables STA on this interface Default Enabled e Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority i e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree 3 102 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 Protocol is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled e Default 128 e Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Path Cost This parameter is used by the STP to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Note that when the Pat
235. ess Control List Port Configuration Displaying Connection Status Configuring Interface Connections Creating Trunk Groups Statically Configuring a Trunk Enabling LACP on Selected Ports Configuring LACP Parameters Displaying LACP Port Counters 3 19 3 20 3 22 3 23 3 25 3 26 3 26 3 27 3 28 3 28 3 29 3 30 3 30 3 31 3 34 3 35 3 36 3 38 3 40 3 41 3 43 3 44 3 46 3 47 3 48 3 50 3 52 3 52 3 53 3 53 3 55 3 57 3 59 3 59 3 60 3 62 3 63 3 64 3 64 3 67 3 69 3 70 3 71 3 73 3 76 Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds Configuring Port Mirroring Configuring Rate Limits Showing Port Statistics Address Table Settings Setting Static Addresses Displaying the Address Table Changing the Aging Time Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration Displaying Global Settings Configuring Global Settings Displaying Interface Settings Configuring Interface Settings Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees Displaying Interface Settings for MSTP Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP VLAN Configuration IEEE 802 1Q VLANs Enabling or Disabling GVRP Global Setting Displaying Basic VLAN Information Displaying Current VLANs Creating VLANs Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index Adding Static Members to VLANs Port Index Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces Configuring Private VLANs Enabling Private VLANs Configuring Uplink and
236. ess and the mask for an address range Then click Add Standard ACL Name david Action Address SubMask Remove Permit ho 1 1 21 255 255 255 255 Remove Action Permit gt IP Ip Address 168 92 16 0 SubMask 255 255 240 0 aa Figure 3 32 ACL Configuration Standard IP CLI This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10 1 1 21 and another rule for the address range 168 92 16 x 168 92 31 x using a bitmask Console config std acl permit host 10 1 1 21 Console config std acl permit 168 92 16 0 255 255 240 0 Console config std acl 4 89 3 54 Access Control Lists 3 Configuring an Extended IP ACL Command Attributes Action An ACL can contain either all permit rules or all deny rules Default Permit rules Src Dst IP Specifies the source or destination IP address Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to specify a specific host address in the Address field or IP to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields Options Any Host IP Default Any Src Dst Address Source or destination IP address Src Dst SubMask Subnet mask for source or destination address See the description for SubMask on page 3 53 Service Type Packet priority settings based on the following criteria Precedence IP precedence level Range 0 7 TOS Type of Service level Range 0 15
237. estination file name V1 0 Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console config Console config boot system opcode V1 0 4 67 Console config exit Console reload 4 22 Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings You can upload download configuration settings to from a TFTP server The configuration file can be later downloaded to restore the switch s settings Command Attributes TFTP Server IP Address The IP address of a TFTP server e File Name The configuration file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ Note The maximum number of user defined configuration files is limited only by available flash memory space 3 17 3 Configuring the Switch Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server You can download the configuration file under a new file name and then set it as the startup file or you can specify the current startup configuration file as the destination file to directly replace it Note that the file Factory_Default_Config cfg can be copied to the TFTP server but cannot be used as the destination on the switch Web Click System File Configuration Enter the IP address of the TFTP server enter the name of the file to
238. et frame type RFC 1060 The following restrictions apply to ACLs e This switch supports ACLs for both ingress and egress filtering However you can only bind one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for ingress filtering and one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for egress filtering In other words only four ACLs can be bound to an interface Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL and Egress MAC ACL e When an ACL is bound to an interface as an egress filter all entries in the ACL must be deny rules Otherwise the bind operation will fail e Each ACL can have up to 32 rules e The maximum number of ACLs is also 32 e However due to resource restrictions the average number of rules bound the ports should not exceed 20 e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule The switch does not support the explicit deny any any rule for the egress IP ACL or the egress MAC ACLs If these rules are included in ACL and you attempt to bind the ACL to an interface for egress checking the bind operation will fail Egress MAC ACLs only work for destination mac known packets not for multicast broadcast or destination mac unknown packets The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows 1 User defined rules in the Egress MAC ACL for egress ports 2 User defined rules in the Egress IP ACL for egress ports 4 86 Acces
239. eters Syntax show line console vty console Console terminal line e vty Virtual terminal for remote console access i e Telnet Default Setting Shows all lines Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example To show all lines enter this command Console show line Console configuration Password threshold 3 times Interactive timeout Disabled Silent time Disabled Baudrate 9600 Databits 8 Parity none Stopbits 1 Vty configuration Password threshold 3 times Interactive timeout 600 sec Console 4 19 A Command Line Interface General Commands Table 4 6 General Commands Command Function Mode Page enable Activates privileged mode NE 4 20 disable Returns to normal mode from privileged mode PE 4 21 configure Activates global configuration mode PE 4 21 show history Shows the command history buffer NE PE 4 22 reload Restarts the system PE 4 22 end Returns to Privileged Exec mode any 4 23 config mode exit Returns to the previous configuration mode or exits the CLI any 4 23 quit Exits a CLI session NE PE 4 24 help Shows how to use help any NA Shows options for command completion context sensitive any NA enable This command activates Privileged Exec mode In privileged mode additional commands are available and certain commands display additional information See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 6 Syntax e
240. ets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion This switch supports CoS with eight priority queues for each port Data packets in a port s high priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower priority queues You can set the default priority for each interface and configure the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch s priority queues Layer 2 Queue Settings Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces You can specify the default port priority for each interface on the switch All untagged packets entering the switch are tagged with the specified default port priority and then sorted into the appropriate priority queue at the output port Command Usage e This switch provides four priority queues for each port It uses Weighted Round Robin to prevent head of queue blockage The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types i e receives both untagged and tagged frames This priority does not apply to IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frames If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frame the IEEE 802 1p User Priority bits will be used Ifthe output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission Command Attributes Default Priority The priority that is assigned to untagged frames received on the specified interface Range 0 7 Default 0
241. eway for this device Console config ip default gateway 10 1 1 254 Console config Related Commands show ip redirects 4 216 show ip interface This command displays the settings of an IP interface Default Setting All interfaces Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip interface IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode User specified Console 4 215 4 Command Line Interface Related Commands show ip redirects 4 216 show ip redirects This command shows the default gateway configured for this device Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip redirects ip default gateway 10 1 0 254 Console Related Commands ip default gateway 4 215 ping This command sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network Syntax ping host size size count count e host IP address or IP alias of the host size Number of bytes in a packet Range 32 512 default 32 The actual packet size will be eight bytes larger than the size specified because the switch adds header information count Number of packets to send Range 1 16 default 5 Default Setting This command has no default for the host Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be reached Following are some results of the p
242. fault community strings 2 6 Basic Configuration 2 To configure a community string complete the following steps 1 From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type snmp server community string mode where string is the community access string and mode is rw read write or ro read only Press lt Enter gt Note that the default mode is read only 2 To remove an existing string simply type no snmp server community string where string is the community access string to remove Press lt Enter gt Console config snmp server community admin rw Console config snmp server community private Console config Trap Receivers You can also specify SNMP stations that are to receive traps from the switch To configure a trap receiver complete the following steps 1 From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type snmp server host host address community string where host address is the IP address for the trap receiver and community string is the string associated with that host Press lt Enter gt 2 In order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications you must enter at least one snmp server enable traps command Type snmp server enable traps type where type is either authentication or link up down Press lt Enter gt Console config snmp server enable traps link up down Console config
243. fier will be enabled Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree port priority 0 Related Commands spanning tree cost 4 164 spanning tree edge port This command specifies an interface as an edge port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax no spanning tree edge port Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device This command has the same effect as the spanning tree portfast 4 165 4 Command Line Interface Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree edge port Console config if Related Commands spanning tree portfast 4
244. figuration Digest 0xAC36177F50283CD4583821D8AB26DE62 Region Revision 0 65535 fo Region Name foo 00 e8 aa aa 00 Max Hop Count 1 40 Figure 3 55 STA Configuration 3 98 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 CLI This example enables Spanning Tree Protocol sets the mode to MST and then configures the STA and MSTP parameters Console config spanning tree 4 154 Console config spanning tree mode mst 4 154 Console config spanning tree priority 45056 4 157 Console config spanning tree hello time 5 4 156 Console config spanning tree max age 14 4 157 Console config spanning tree forward time 20 4 155 Console config spanning tree pathcost method long 4 158 Console config spanning tree transmission limit 4 4 159 Console config spanning tree mst configuration 4 159 Console config mstp revision 1 4 162 Console config mstp name R amp D 4 161 Console config mstp max hops 30 4 163 Console config mstp Displaying Interface Settings The STA Port Information and STA Trunk Information pages display the current status of ports and trunks in the Spanning Tree Field Attributes e Spanning Tree Shows if STA has been enabled on this interface e STA Status Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree e Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets e Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an inte
245. figuration name 00 00 a3 42 00 80 Revision level 0 Instance Vlans 0 1 4094 Console VLAN Commands A VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment This section describes commands used to create VLAN groups add port members specify how VLAN tagging is used and enable automatic VLAN registration for the selected interface Table 4 52 VLAN Commands Command Groups Function Page Editing VLAN Groups Sets up VLAN groups including name VID and state 4 173 Configuring VLAN Configures VLAN interface parameters including ingress and egress 4 175 Interfaces tagging mode ingress filtering PVID and GVRP Displaying VLAN Displays VLAN groups status port members and MAC addresses 4 181 Information Configuring Private VLANs Configures private VLANs including uplink and downlink ports 4 182 Configuring Protocol VLANs Configures protocol based VLANs based on frame type and protocol 4 183 4 172 VLAN Commands 4 Editing VLAN Groups Table 4 53 Editing VLAN Groups Command Function Mode Page vlan database Enters VLAN database mode to add change and delete GC 4 173 VLANs vian Configures a VLAN including VID name and state ve 4 174 vlan database This command enters VLAN database mode All commands in this mode will take effect immediately Default Setting Non
246. figure the client s keys ip ssh server Use this command to enable the Secure Shell SSH server on this switch Use the no form to disable this service Syntax no ip ssh server Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The SSH server supports up to four client sessions The maximum number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions The SSH server uses DSA or RSA for key exchange when the client first establishes a connection with the switch and then negotiates with the client to select either DES 56 bit or 3DES 168 bit for data encryption e You must generate the host key before enabling the SSH server Example Console configure Console config ip ssh server Console config Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 39 show ssh 4 41 4 36 System Management Commands 4 ip ssh timeout Use this command to configure the timeout for the SSH server Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh timeout seconds no ip ssh timeout seconds The timeout for client response during SSH negotiation Range 1 120 Default Setting 10 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The timeout specifies the interval the switch will wait for a response from the client during the SSH negotiation phase Once an SSH session has been established the timeout for user input is controlled by the e
247. figured by these services Web Click System IP Configuration Specify the VLAN to which the management station is attached set the IP Address Mode to DHCP or BOOTP Click Apply to save your changes Then click Restart DHCP to immediately request a new address Note that the switch will also broadcast a request for IP configuration settings on each power reset IP Configuration Management VLAN fi gt IP Address Mode DHCP IP Address fisz168154 Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 Gateway IP Address 192 168 1253 MAC Address 00 30 F 1 12 34 56 Restart DHCP Figure 3 7 IP Interface Configuration DHCP Note If you lose your management connection use a console connection and enter show ip interface to determine the new switch address CLI Specify the management interface and set the IP address mode to DHCP or BOOTP and then enter the ip dhcp restart command Console config Console config interface vlan 1 4 125 Console config if ip address dhcp 4 213 Console config if end Console ip dhcp restart 4 214 Console show ip interface 4 215 IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode DHCP Console Renewing DCHP DHCP may lease addresses to clients indefinitely or for a specific period of time If the address expires or the switch is moved to another network segment you will lose management access to the switch In this case you can reboot the switch
248. from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords 4 27 4 Command Line Interface Example Console config enable password level 15 0 admin Console config Related Commands enable 4 20 IP Filter Commands Table 4 11 IP Filter Commands Command Function Mode Page management Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access GC 4 28 show management Displays the switch to be monitored or configured from a PE 4 29 browser management This command specifies the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch through various protocols Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax no management all client http client snmp client telnet client Start address end address all client Adds IP address es to the SNMP Web and Telnet groups e http client Adds IP address es to the Web group e snmp client Adds IP address es to the SNMP group telnet client Adds IP address es to the Telnet group start address A single IP address or the starting address of a range end address The end address of a range Default Setting All addresses Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Ifanyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid address the switch will reject the connection enter an event message in the system log and send a trap messa
249. g sendmail destination email This command specifies the email recipients of alert messages Use the no form to remove a recipient Syntax no logging sendmail destination email email address email address The source email address used in alert messages Range 1 41 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 4 50 System Management Commands 4 Command Usage You can specify up to five recipients for alert messages However you must enter a separate command to specify each recipient Example Console config logging sendmail destination email ted this company com Console config logging sendmail This command enables SMTP event handling Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no logging sendmail Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config logging sendmail Console config show logging sendmail This command displays the settings for the SMTP event handler Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show logging sendmail SMTP servers Active SMTP server 192 168 1 19 SMTP minimum severity level 7 SMTP destination email addresses 1 tedathis company com SMTP source email address bill this company com SMTP status Enable Console 4 51 4 Command Line Interface Time Commands The system clock can be dynamically set by polling a set of specified
250. g sendmail host 192 168 1 19 Console config logging sendmail level This command sets the severity threshold used to trigger alert messages Syntax logging sendmail level evel level One of the system message levels page 4 44 Messages sent include the selected level down to level 0 Range 0 7 Default 7 Default Setting Level 7 Command Mode Global Configuration 4 49 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage The specified level indicates an event threshold All events at this level or higher will be sent to the configured email recipients For example using Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0 Example This example will send email alerts for system errors from level 3 through 0 Console config logging sendmail level 3 Console config logging sendmail source email This command sets the email address used for the From field in alert messages Syntax logging sendmail source email email address email address The source email address used in alert messages Range 1 41 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You may use a symbolic email address that identifies the switch or the address of an administrator responsible for the switch Example This example will send email alerts for system errors from level 3 through 0 Console config logging sendmail source email bill this company com Console config loggin
251. ge to the trap manager e IP address can be configured for SNMP Web and Telnet access respectively Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses either individual addresses or address ranges 4 28 System Management Commands 4 When entering addresses for the same group i e SNMP Web or Telnet the switch will not accept overlapping address ranges When entering addresses for different groups the switch will accept overlapping address ranges e You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range You must delete the entire range and reenter the addresses e You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address or by specifying both the start address and end address Example This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses Console config management all client 192 168 1 19 Console config management all client 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Console show management This command displays the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch through various protocols Syntax show management all client http client snmp client telnet client e all client Adds IP address es to the SNMP Web and Telnet groups e http client Adds IP address es to the Web group snmp client Adds IP address es to the SNMP group telnet client Adds IP address es to the Telnet group Command Mode Privileged Exec Example
252. gement station is attached Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Default 0 0 0 0 e Subnet Mask This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets Default 255 0 0 0 Gateway IP Address IP address of the gateway router between this device and management stations that exist on other network segments Default 0 0 0 0 e MAC Address The physical layer address for this switch 3 13 3 Configuring the Switch Manual Configuration Web Click System IP Configuration Select the VLAN through which the management station is attached set the IP Address Mode to Static enter the IP address subnet mask and gateway then click Apply IP Configuration Management VLAN fi gt IP Address Mode Static gt IP Address 92 168 154 Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 Gateway IP Address 192 168 1253 MAC Address 00 30 F 1 12 34 56 Restart DHCP Figure 3 6 IP Interface Configuration Manual CLI Specify the management interface IP address and default gateway Console config Console config interface vlan 1 4 125 Console config if ip address 10 1 0 254 255 255 255 0 4 213 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 192 168 1 254 4 215 Console config 3 14 Basic Configuration 3 Using DHCP BOOTP If your network provides DHCP BOOTP services you can configure the switch to be dynamically con
253. ges GC 4 49 logging sendmai Email address used for From field of alert messages GC 4 50 source email logging sendmai Email recipients of alert messages GC 4 50 destination email logging sendmai Enables SMTP event handling GC 4 51 show logging sendmail Displays SMTP event handler settings NE PE 4 51 4 48 System Management Commands 4 logging sendmail host This command specifies SMTP servers that will be sent alert messages Use the no form to remove an SMTP server Syntax no logging sendmail host ip_address ip_address IP address of an SMTP server that will be sent alert messages for event handling Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You can specify up to three SMTP servers for event handing However you must enter a separate command to specify each server e To send email alerts the switch first opens a connection sends all the email alerts waiting in the queue one by one and finally closes the connection To open a connection the switch first selects the server that successfully sent mail during the last connection or the first server configured by this command If it fails to send mail the switch selects the next server in the list and tries to send mail again If it still fails the system will repeat the process at a periodic interval A trap will be triggered if the switch cannot successfully open a connection Example Console config loggin
254. ges in the same region must be configured with the same MST instances Example Console config mstp name R amp D Console config mstp Related Commands revision 4 162 revision This command configures the revision number for this multiple spanning tree configuration of this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax revision number number Revision number of the spanning tree Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage The MST region name page 4 161 and revision number are used to designate a unique MST region A bridge i e spanning tree compliant device such as this switch can only belong to one MST region And all bridges in the same region must be configured with the same MST instances Example Console config mstp revision 1 Console config mstp Related Commands name 4 161 4 162 Spanning Tree Commands 4 max hops This command configures the maximum number of hops in the region before a BPDU is discarded Use the no form to restore the default Syntax max hops hop number hop number Maximum hop number for multiple spanning tree Range 1 40 Default Setting 20 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage A MSTI region is treated as a single node by the STP and RSTP protocols Therefore the message age for BPDUs inside a MSTI region is never changed However each spanning tree instance within a region an
255. ges to a remote server or limits the syslog messages saved to a remote server based on severity Use this command without a specified level to enable remote logging Use the no form to disable remote logging Syntax logging trap evel no logging trap level One of the level arguments listed below Messages sent include the selected level up through level 0 Refer to the table on page 4 44 Default Setting Disabled Level 7 0 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Using this command with a specified level enables remote logging and sets the minimum severity level to be saved Using this command without a specified level also enables remote logging but restores the minimum severity level to the default Example Console config logging trap 4 Console config clear logging This command clears messages from the log buffer Syntax clear logging flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset Default Setting Flash and RAM Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console clear logging Console 4 46 System Management Commands 4 Related Commands show logging 4 47 show logging This command displays the logging configuration along with any system and event messages stored in memory Syntax show logging flash ram sendmail trap
256. guration CLI The following example enables LACP for ports 1 to 6 Just connect these ports to LACP enabled trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 125 Console config if lacp 4 141 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 6 Console config if lacp Console config if end Console show interfaces status port channel 1 4 133 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type 1000T Mac address 22 22 22 22 22 2d Configuration Name Port admin status Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full Flow control status Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Port security action None Combo forced mode None Current status Created by Lacp Link status Up Port operation status Up Operation speed duplex 1000full Flow control type None Member Ports Ethl 1 Eth1 2 Eth1 3 Ethl 4 Eth1 5 Eth1 6 Console 3 72 Port Configuration 3 Configuring LACP Parameters Dynamically Creating a Port Channel Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria e Ports must have the same LACP System Priority e Ports must have the same LACP port Admin Key e However if the port channel Admin Key is set page 4 142 then the port Admin Key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group Note If the port channel admin key lacp
257. guration Controls the order in which ACL rules are checked 3 59 Port Binding Binds a port to the specified ACL 3 63 IP Filter Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access 3 50 Port 3 64 Port Information Displays port connection status 3 64 Trunk Information Displays trunk connection status 3 64 Port Configuration Configures port connection settings 3 67 Trunk Configuration Configures trunk connection settings 3 67 Trunk Membership Specifies ports to group into static trunks 3 70 LACP 3 71 Configuration Allows ports to dynamically join trunks 3 71 Aggregation Port Configures system priority admin key and port priority 3 73 Port Counters Information Displays statistics for LACP protocol messages 3 76 Port Internal Information Displays settings and operational state for local side 3 77 Port Neighbors Information Displays settings and operational state for remote side 3 79 Port Broadcast Control Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each port 3 80 Trunk Broadcast Control Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each trunk 3 80 Mirror Port Configuration Sets the source and target ports for mirroring 3 82 Rate Limit 3 83 Input Port Configuration Sets the input rate limit for each port 3 83 Input Trunk Configuration Sets the input rate limit for each trunk 3 83 Output Port Configuration Sets the output rate limit for each port 3 83 Output Trunk Configuration Sets the output rate limit for each trunk 3 83 Port Statistics Lists Ethernet
258. h Cost Method is set to short page 3 63 the maximum path cost is 65 535 e Range Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 e Default Ethernet Half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 Fast Ethernet Half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet Full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 Admin Link Type The link type attached to this interface e Point to Point A connection to exactly one other bridge Shared A connection to two or more bridges e Auto The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point to point link or to shared media This is the default setting Admin Edge Port Fast Forwarding You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be
259. h1 30 Eth1 31 Eth1 32 Eth1 33 Eth1 34 Eth1 35 Eth1 36 Eth1 37 Eth1 38 Eth1 39 Eth1 40 Eth1 41 Eth1 42 Eth1 43 Eth1 44 Eth1 45 Eth1 46 Eth1 47 Eth1 48 Console 4 181 4 Command Line Interface Configuring Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN This section describes commands used to configure private VIANs Table 4 56 Private VLAN Commands Command Function Mode Page pvlan Enables and configured private VLANS GC 4 182 show pvlan Displays the configured private VLANS PE 4 183 pvlan This command enables or configures a private VLAN Use the no form to disable the private VLAN Syntax pvlan up link interface list down link interface list no pvian up link Specifies an uplink interface e down link Specifies a downlink interface Default Setting No private VLANs are defined Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage A private VLAN provides port based security and isolation between ports within the VLAN Data traffic on the downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from the uplink port Private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch Entering the pvlan command without any parameters enables the private VLAN Entering no pvlan disables the private VLAN Example This example enables the private VLAN and then sets port 24 as the uplink and ports 1 4 as
260. he entire network If multiple VLANs are implemented on a network the path between specific VLAN members may be inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops thus isolating group members When operating multiple VLANs we recommend selecting the MSTP option Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits as described below STP Mode If the switch receives an 802 1D BPDU after a port s migration delay timer expires the switch assumes it is connected to an 802 1D bridge and starts using only 802 1D BPDUs RSTP Mode If RSTP is using 802 1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires RSTP restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port e Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To allow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration allowing them to participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible VLAN instance assignments Becareful when switching between spanning tree modes Changing modes stops all spanning tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the system in the new mode temporarily disrupting user traffic Example The foll
261. he switch maps HTTP traffic on port 5 to CoS value 0 and then displays the IP Port Priority settings for that port Console config map ip port 4 197 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip port 80 cos 0 4 198 Console config if end Console show map ip port ethernet 1 5 4 201 TCP port mapping status disabled Port Port no COS Eth 1 5 80 o Console Mapping specific values for IP Precedence is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch Mapping CoS Values to ACLs Use the ACL CoS Mapping page to set the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule as shown in the following table Note that the specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output queue it is not written to the packet itself For information on mapping the CoS values to output queues see page 3 127 Table 3 14 Mapping CoS Values to IP ACLs Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 Command Usage You must configure an ACL mask before you can map CoS values to the rule Command Attributes e Port Port identifier e Name Name of ACL Type Type of ACL IP or MAC e CoS Priority CoS value used for packets matching an IP ACL rule Range 0 7 For information on configuring ACLs see page 3 52 3 136 Class of Service Configuration 3 Web Click Priori
262. he trunk channel group Adds a port to a trunk IC Port Channel 4 140 Dynamic Configuration Command lacp Configures LACP for the current interface IC Ethernet 4 141 lacp system priority Configures a port s LACP system priority IC Ethernet 4 142 lacp admin key Configures a port s administration key IC Ethernet 4 143 lacp admin key Configures an port channel s administration key IC PortChannel 4 144 lacp port priority Configures a port s LACP port priority IC Ethernet 4 144 Trunk Status Display Command port channel show lacp Shows LACP information PE 4 145 Guidelines for Creating Trunks General Guidelines Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop A trunk can have up to eight ports The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports All ports in a trunk must be configured in an identical manner including communication mode i e speed duplex mode and flow control VLAN assignments and CoS settings 4 139 Command Line Interface All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN via the specified port channel e STP VLAN and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk via the specified port channel Dynamically Creating a Port Channel Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria e Ports
263. his switch prioritizes each packet based on the required level of service using eight priority queues with strict or Weighted Round Robin Queuing It uses IEEE 802 1p and 802 1Q tags to prioritize incoming traffic based on input from the end station application These functions can be used to provide independent priorities for delay sensitive data and best effort data This switch also supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3 4 traffic to meet application requirements Traffic can be prioritized based on the priority bits in the IP frame s Type of Service ToS octet or the number of the TCP UDP port When these services are enabled the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the switch and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue Multicast Filtering Specific multicast traffic can be assigned to its own VLAN to ensure that it does not interfere with normal network traffic and to guarantee real time delivery by setting the required priority level for the designated VLAN The switch uses IGMP Snooping and Query to manage multicast group registration System Defaults System Defaults 1 The switch s system defaults are provided in the configuration file Factory_Default_Config cfg To reset the switch defaults this file should be set as the startup configuration file page 3 18 The following table lists some of the basic system defaults Table 1 2 System Defaults
264. ic for each port Any broadcast packets exceeding the specified threshold will then be dropped Command Usage Broadcast Storm Control is enabled by default The default threshold is 500 packets per second Broadcast control does not effect IP multicast traffic e The specified threshold applies to all ports on the switch Command Attributes Port Port number Type Indicates the port type 1OOOBASE T or SFP Protect Status Shows whether or not broadcast storm control has been enabled Default Enabled Threshold Threshold as percentage of port bandwidth Range 500 262143 packets per second Default 500 Trunk Shows if port is a trunk member 3 80 Port Configuration 3 Web Click Port Port Trunk Broadcast Control Check the Enabled box for any interface set the threshold and click Apply Port Broadcast Control Port Type Protect Status Threshold 500 262143 Trunk 1 1000Base T Enable Eo packets sec 2 000Base T M Enable fo packets sec 3 1000Base T Vv Enable foo packets sec 4 1000Base T F Enable S00 packets sec 5 1000Base T M Enable Bo t packets sec 6 1000Base T M Enable Bo tC S packets sec xl Figure 3 47 Port Broadcast Control CLI Specify any interface and then enter the threshold The following disables broadcast storm control for port 1 and then sets broadcast suppression at 600 packets per second for
265. ically increase the throughput across any connection and provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk should fail The switch supports up to 6 trunks Broadcast Storm Control Broadcast suppression prevents broadcast traffic from overwhelming the network When enabled on a port the level of broadcast traffic passing through the port is restricted If broadcast traffic rises above a pre defined threshold it will be throttled until the level falls back beneath the threshold Static Addresses A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table Static addresses can be used to provide network security by restricting access for a known host to a specific port IEEE 802 1D Bridge The switch supports IEEE 802 1D transparent bridging The address table facilitates data switching by learning addresses and then filtering or forwarding traffic based on this information The address table supports up to 16K addresses Store and Forward Switching The switch copies each frame into its memory before forwarding them to another port This ensures that all frames are a standard Ethernet size and have been verified for accuracy with the cyclic redundancy check CRC This prevents bad frames from entering the
266. ied IP ACLs Command Mode Global Configuration 4 92 Access Control List Commands 4 Command Usage A mask can only be used by all ingress ACLs or all egress ACLs The precedence of the ACL rules applied to a packet is not determined by order of the rules but instead by the order of the masks i e the first mask that matches a rule will determine the rule that is applied to a packet e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule Example Console config access list ip mask precedence in Console config ip mask acl Related Commands mask IP ACL 4 93 ip access group 4 97 mask IP ACL This command defines a mask for IP ACLs This mask defines the fields to check in the IP header Use the no form to remove a mask Syntax no mask protocol any host source bitmask any host destination bitmask precedence tos dscp source port port bitmask destination port port bitmask control flag flag bitmask protocol Check the protocol field any Any address will be matched host The address must be for a host device not a subnetwork e source bitmask Source address of rule must match this bitmask e destination bitmask Destination address of rule must match this bitmask precedence Check the IP precedence field tos Check the TOS field e dscp Check
267. ific VLAN members may be inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops thus isolating group members When operating multiple VLANs we recommend selecting the MSTP option Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits as described below STP Mode If the switch receives an 802 1D BPDU i e STP BPDU after a port s migration delay timer expires the switch assumes it is connected to an 802 1D bridge and starts using only 802 1D BPDUs RSTP Mode If RSTP is using 802 1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires RSTP restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port 3 95 3 Configuring the Switch e Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Toallow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration allowing them to participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible VLAN instance assignments Be careful when switching between spanning tree modes Changing modes stops all spanning tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the system in the new mode temporarily disrupting user traffic Command Attributes Basic Configuration of Global Settings e S
268. ignificant condition such as cold start 4 Warning Warning conditions e g return false unexpected return 3 Error Error conditions e g invalid input default used 2 Critical Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted 1 Alert Immediate action needed 0 Emergency System unusable There are only Level 2 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release 3 19 3 Configuring the Switch e RAM Level Limits log messages saved to the switch s temporary RAM memory for all levels up to the specified level For example if level 7 is specified all messages from level 0 to level 7 will be logged to RAM Range 0 7 Default 7 Note The Flash Level must be equal to or less than the RAM Level Web Click System Logs System Logs Specify System Log Status set the level of event messages to be logged to RAM and flash memory then click Apply System Logs System Log Status Disabied Flash Level 0 7 EE Ram Level 0 7 7 Figure 3 12 System Logs CLI Enable system logging and then specify the level of messages to be logged to RAM and flash memory Use the show logging command to display the current settings Console config logging on 4 43 Console config logging history ram 0 4 44 Console config Console show logging flash Syslog logging Disable History logging in FLASH level errors Console Remote L
269. ime requests Range 16 16384 seconds Default Setting 16 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command is only applicable when the switch is set to SNTP client mode Example Console config sntp poll 60 Console Related Commands sntp client 4 52 show sntp This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the SNTP client and indicates whether or not the local time has been properly updated Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the current time the poll interval used for sending time synchronization requests and the current SNTP mode i e unicast Example Console show sntp Current time Jul 10 05 13 28 2003 Poll interval 16 Current mode broadcast Console 4 54 System Management Commands 4 clock timezone This command sets the time zone for the switch s internal clock Syntax clock timezone name hour hours minute minutes before utc after utc name Name of timezone usually an acronym Range 1 29 characters e hours Number of hours before after UTC Range 0 12 hours minutes Number of minutes before after UTC Range 0 59 minutes before utc Sets the local time zone before east of UTC after utc Sets the local time zone after west of UTC Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coo
270. ine Interface logging history This command limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on severity The no form returns the logging of syslog messages to the default level Syntax logging history flash ram evel no logging history flash ram flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset level One of the levels listed below Messages sent include the selected level down to level 0 Range 0 7 Table 4 17 Logging Levels Level Name Level Description debugging 7 Debugging messages informational 6 Informational messages only notifications 5 Normal but significant condition such as cold start warnings 4 Warning conditions e g return false unexpected return errors 3 Error conditions e g invalid input default used critical 2 Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted alerts 1 Immediate action needed emergencies 0 System unusable There are only Level 2 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release Default Setting Flash errors level 3 0 RAM warnings level 7 0 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The message level specified for flash memory must be a higher priority i e numerically lower than that specified for RAM Example Console config logging history
271. ing command Normal response The normal response occurs in one to ten seconds depending on network traffic Destination does not respond If the host does not respond a timeout appears in ten seconds Destination unreachable The gateway for this destination indicates that the destination is unreachable 4 216 IP Interface Commands 4 Network or host unreachable The gateway found no corresponding entry in the route table e Press lt Esc gt to stop pinging Example Console ping 10 1 0 9 Type ESC to abort PING to 10 1 0 9 by 5 32 byte payload ICMP packets timeout is 5 seconds response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 0 ms Ping statistics for 10 1 0 9 5 packets transmitted 5 packets received 100 0 packets lost 0 Approximate round trip times Minimum 0 ms Maximum 10 ms Average 8 ms Console Related Commands interface 4 125 4 217 4 Command Line Interface 4 218 Appendix A Software Specifications Software Features Authentication Local RADIUS TACACS Port 802 1x HTTPS SSH Port Security Access Control Lists IP MAC up to 32 lists DHCP Client DNS Server Port Configuration 1000BASE T 10 100 Mbps at half full duplex 1000 Mbps at full duplex 1000BASE SX LX LH 1000 Mbps full duplex Flow Control Full Duplex IEEE 802 3x Half Duplex Back pressure Broadcast Storm Control Traffic throt
272. ink is enabled i e collection is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Synchronization The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC i e it has been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator and the identity of the Link Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted Aggregation The system considers this link to be aggregatable i e a potential candidate for aggregation Long timeout Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate LACP Activity Activity control value with regard to this link 0 Passive 1 Active 4 147 4 Command Line Interface Admin Key 0 Oper Key 4 Admin State Oper State Partner Admin System ID Partner Oper System ID Partner Admin Port Number 1 Partner Oper Port Number 1 Port Admin Priority Port Oper Priority Console show lacp 1 neighbors Channel group 1 neighbors 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 32768 32768 32768 32768 defaulted distributing collecting synchronization long timeout distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity Table 4 48 show lacp neighbors display description Field Description Partner Admin System ID Partner Oper System ID LA
273. ion State Machine State Initialize Console 4 85 4 Command Line Interface Access Control List Commands Access Control Lists ACL provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type To filter packets first create an access list add the required rules specify a mask to modify the precedence in which the rules are checked and then bind the list to a specific port Access Control Lists An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses MAC addresses or other more specific criteria This switch tests ingress or egress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule If no rules match for a list of all permit rules the packet is dropped and if no rules match for a list of all deny rules the packet is accepted There are three filtering modes Standard IP ACL mode STD ACL filters packets based on the source IP address e Extended IP ACL mode EXT ACL filters packets based on source or destination IP address as well as protocol type and protocol port number If the TCP protocol is specified then you can also filter packets based on the TCP control code e MAC ACL mode MAC ACL filters packets based on the source or destination MAC address and the Ethern
274. ions 3 10 Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities 3 11 Setting the Switch s IP Address 3 13 Manual Configuration 3 14 Using DHCP BOOTP 3 15 Managing Firmware 3 16 Downloading System Software from a Server 3 16 Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings 3 17 Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server 3 18 Configuring Event Logging 3 19 Contents System Log Configuration Remote Log Configuration Displaying Log Messages Sending Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Alerts Resetting the System Setting the System Clock Configuring SNTP Setting the Time Zone Simple Network Management Protocol Setting Community Access Strings Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types User Authentication Configuring the Logon Password Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication Configuring HTTPS Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate Configuring the Secure Shell Generating the Host Key Pair Configuring the SSH Server Configuring Port Security Configuring 802 1x Port Authentication Displaying 802 1x Global Settings Configuring 802 1x Global Settings Configuring Port Authorization Mode Displaying 802 1x Statistics Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access Access Control Lists Configuring Access Control Lists Setting the ACL Name and Type Configuring a Standard IP ACL Configuring an Extended IP ACL Configuring a MAC ACL Configuring ACL Masks Specifying the Mask Type Configuring an IP ACL Mask Configuring a MAC ACL Mask Binding a Port to an Acc
275. isable aging Default Setting 300 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The aging time is used to age out dynamically learned forwarding information Example Console config mac address table aging time 100 Console config show mac address table aging time This command shows the aging time for entries in the address table Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac address table aging time Aging time 300 sec Console 4 152 Spanning Tree Commands 4 Spanning Tree Commands This section includes commands that configure the Spanning Tree Algorithm STA globally for the switch and commands that configure STA for the selected interface Table 4 51 Spanning Tree Commands Command Function Mode Page spanning tree Enables the spanning tree protocol GC 4 154 spanning tree mode Configures STP RSTP or MSTP mode GC 4 154 spanning tree forward time Configures the spanning tree bridge forward time GC 4 155 spanning tree hello time Configures the spanning tree bridge hello time GC 4 156 spanning tree max age Configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age GC 4 157 spanning tree priority Configures the spanning tree bridge priority GC 4 157 spanning tree Configures the path cost method for RSTP MSTP GC 4 158 path cost method spanning tree Configures the transmission limit fo
276. ise it is only necessary to add at most one VLAN as untagged and this should correspond to the native VLAN for the interface Ifa VLAN on the forbidden list for an interface is manually added to that interface the VLAN is automatically removed from the forbidden list for that interface Example The following example shows how to add VLANs 1 2 5 and 6 to the allowed list as tagged VLANs for port 1 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 1 2 5 6 tagged Console config if 4 179 4 Command Line Interface switchport forbidden vlan This command configures forbidden VLANs Use the no form to remove the list of forbidden VLANs Syntax switchport forbidden vlan add vian list remove vian list no switchport forbidden vlan add vlan list List of VLAN identifiers to add remove vlan list List of VLAN identifiers to remove e vian list Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs Do not enter leading zeros Range 1 4094 Default Setting No VLANs are included in the forbidden list Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e This command prevents a VLAN from being automatically added to the specified interface via GVRP Ifa VLAN has been added to the set of allowed VLANs for an interface then you cannot add it to the set of forbidden VLANs f
277. ity number for untagged ingress traffic The priority is a number from 0 to 7 Seven is the highest priority Default Setting The priority is not set and the default value for untagged frames received on the interface is zero Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types i e receives both untagged and tagged frames This priority does not apply to IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frames If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frame the IEEE 802 1p User Priority bits will be used e This switch provides eight priority queues for each port It is configured to use Weighted Round Robin which can be viewed with the show queue bandwidth command Inbound frames that do not have VLAN tags are tagged with the input port s default ingress user priority and then placed in the appropriate priority queue at the output port The default priority for all ingress ports is zero Therefore any inbound frames that do not have priority tags will be placed in queue 0 of the output port Note that if the output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission Example The following example shows how to set a default priority on port 3 to 5
278. k the Enable field for the port you want to bind to an ACL for ingress or egress traffic select the required ACL from the drop down list then click Apply ACL Port Binding IP IN l OUT M Enable david 7 B Enable david M Enable j I Enable fiery l M Enable david gt I Enable avia E I Enable jer I Enable fiery Zl Ir Enable david I Enable davie I Enable jer I Enable fiery I Enable david I Enable david E I Enable jer I Enable fiery I Enable david Z I Enable david Enable jery 1 I Enable jery z1 I Enable david I Enable davia I Enable jerm I Enable jery Figure 3 38 ACL Port Binding CLI This examples assigns an IP and MAC ingress ACL to port 1 and an IP ingress ACL to port 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 125 Console config if ip access group david in 4 97 Console config if mac access group jerry in 4 107 Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if ip access group david in Console config if exit Console config if Port Configuration Displaying Connection Status You can use the Port Information or Trunk Information pages to display the current connection status including link state speed duplex mode flow control and auto negotiation Field Attributes Web e Name Interface label e Type Indicates the port type 1000BASE T or SFP e Admin St
279. ket marking Use the no form to remove the ACL marker Syntax match access list ip ac _name set priority priority set precedence precedence_value set dscp dscp_value no match access list ip ac _name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e priority Class of Service value in the IEEE 802 1p priority tag Range 0 7 7 is the highest priority precedence_value IP Precedence value Range 0 7 e dscp_value Differentiated Services Code Point value Range 0 63 Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet 4 99 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage e You must configure an ACL mask before you can change frame priorities based on an ACL rule e Traffic priorities may be included in the IEEE 802 1p priority tag This tag is also incorporated as part of the overall IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tag To specify this priority use the set priority keywords e The IP frame header also includes priority bits in the Type of Service ToS octet The Type of Service octet may contain three bits for IP Precedence or six bits for Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP service To specify the IP precedence priority use the set tos keywords To specify the DSCP priority use the set dscp keywords Note that the IP frame header can include either the IP Precedence or DSCP priority type The precedence for priority mapping by this switch is IP Precedence or DSCP Priority and
280. l 100half 1000full 100full 4 125 4 125 4 140 4 133 1000full Enabling LACP on Selected Ports Command Usage To avoid creating a loop in the network be sure you enable LACP before connecting the ports and also disconnect the ports before disabling LACP If the target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports the trunk will be activated automatically A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned the next available trunk ID If more than four ports attached to the same target dynamically enabled AS Erbe A active backup links LL link TE T T T O configured members switch have LACP enabled the additional ports will be placed in standby mode and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails All ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be con by forced mode or auto negotiation figured for full duplex either 3 71 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Port LACP Configuration Select any of the switch ports from the scroll down port list and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply LACP Configuration Member List Current New Unit Port Uniti Port Unit Port3 Unit Port4 Uniti PortS Unit Port Unit Port Unit Port8 gt lt lt Add Port 1 z Remove _ Figure 3 42 LACP Trunk Confi
281. l parameters that can be configured for this switch as described in the preceding pages including reauth enabled page 4 81 reauth period page 4 82 quiet period page 4 82 tx period page 4 83 and max req 4 83 4 Command Line Interface 4 84 page 4 79 It also displays the following global parameters which are set to a fixed value including the following items supp timeout Supplicant timeout server timeout Server timeout reauth max Maximum number of reauthentication attempts 802 1X Port Summary Displays the port access control parameters for each interface including the following items Status Administrative state for port access control Operation Mode Dot1x port operation mode page 4 80 Mode Dot1x port control mode page 4 80 Authorized Authorization status yes or n a not authorized 802 1X Port Details Displays detailed port access control settings for each interface as described in the preceding pages including Operation mode page 4 80 Max count page 4 80 Port control page 4 80 and Current Identifier It also displays the following information Status Authorization status authorized or unauthorized Supplicant MAC address of authorized client Authenticator State Machine State Current state including initialize disconnected connecting authenticating authenticated aborting held force_authorized force_unautho
282. l id Range 1 6 Default Setting Shows the counters for all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed For a description of the items displayed by this command see Showing Port Statistics on page 3 84 Example Console show interfaces counters ethernet 1 7 Ethernet 1 7 Iftable stats Octets input 30658 Octets output 196550 Unicast input 6 Unicast output 5 Discard input 0 Discard output 0 Error input 0 Error output 0 Unknown protos input 0 QLen output 0 Extended iftable stats Multi cast input 0 Multi cast output 3064 Broadcast input 262 Broadcast output 1 Ether like stats Alignment errors 0 FCS errors 0 Single Collision frames 0 Multiple collision frames 0 SQE Test errors 0 Deferred transmissions 0 Late collisions 0 Excessive collisions 0 Internal mac transmit errors 0 Internal mac receive errors 0 Frame too longs 0 Carrier sense errors 0 Symbol errors 0 RMON stats Drop events 0 Octets 227208 Packets 3338 Broadcast pkts 263 Multi cast pkts 3064 Undersize pkts 0 Oversize pkts 0 Fragments 0 Jabbers 0 CRC align errors 0 Collisions 0 Packet size lt 64 octets 3150 Packet size 65 to 127 octets 139 Packet size 128 to 255 octets 49 Packet size 256 to 511 octets 0 Packet size 512 to 1023 octets 0 Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets 0 Console 4 134 Inte
283. l it establishes a connection with the target device Field Attributes Host Name Name of a host device that is mapped to one or more IP addresses Range 1 64 characters IP Address Internet address es associated with a host name Range 1 8 addresses e Alias Displays the host names that are mapped to the same address es as a previously configured entry 3 148 Configuring Domain Name Service 3 Web Select DNS Static Host Table Enter a host name and one or more corresponding addresses then click Apply Static Host Table Host Name IP Address Alias rd5 10 1 0 55 rd Delete Edit 192 168 1 55 Delete Clear Add Static Host Host Name IP Address 1 IP Address 2 IP Address 3 IP Address 4 IP Address 5 IP Address 6 IP Address 7 IP Address 8 Add Figure 3 89 z DNS Static Host Table CLI This example maps two address to a host name and then configures an alias host name for the same addresses Hostname rads Alias 1 rd6 Console Inet address 10 1 0 55 192 168 12 55 Console config ip host rd5 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 4 117 Console config ip host rd6 10 1 0 55 Console config end Console show hosts 4 122 3 149 3 Configuring the Switch Displaying the DNS Cache You can display entries in the DNS cache that have been learned via the designated name servers Field Attributes
284. lan add 2 tagged 4 179 config if exit config interface ethernet 1 2 config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 untagged config if exit config interface ethernet 1 13 config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged Adding Static Members to VLANs Port Index Use the VLAN Static Membership by Port menu to assign VLAN groups to the selected interface as a tagged member Command Attributes e Interface Port or trunk identifier Member VLANs for which the selected interface is a tagged member Non Member VLANs for which the selected interface is not a tagged member Web Open VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static Membership Select an interface from the scroll down box Port or Trunk Click Query to display membership information for the interface Select a VLAN ID and then click Add to add the interface as a tagged member or click Remove to remove the interface After configuring VLAN membership for each interface click Apply VLAN Static Membership by Port Interface Pon 3 Zi C Trunk 7 Query Member Non Member Vian El Figure 3 66 VLAN Static Membership by Port CLI This example adds Port 3 to VLAN 1 as a tagged port and removes Port 3 from VLAN 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 4 125 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 1 tagged 4 179 Console config if switchport allowed vlan remove 2 3 118 VLAN Configuration lt 3 Configuring VLAN Behavior for Int
285. le 3 14 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 4 4 Table 4 5 Table 4 6 Table 4 7 Table 4 8 Table 4 9 Table 4 10 Table 4 11 Table 4 12 Table 4 13 Table 4 14 Table 4 15 Table 4 16 Table 4 17 Table 4 18 Table 4 19 Table 4 20 Table 4 21 Table 4 22 Table 4 23 Table 4 24 Table 4 25 Table 4 26 Key Features System Defaults Web Page Configuration Buttons Switch Main Menu Logging Levels HTTPS System Support 802 1x Statistics LACP Port Counters LACP Internal Configuration Information LACP Neighbor Configuration Information Port Statistics Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues CoS Priority Levels Mapping IP Precedence Mapping DSCP Priority Mapping CoS Values to IP ACLs General Command Modes Configuration Command Modes Keystroke Commands Command Group Index Line Commands General Commands System Management Commands Device Designation Commands User Access Commands Default Login Settings IP Filter Commands Web Server Commands HTTPS System Support re Shell Commands show ssh display description Event Logging Commands Logging Levels show logging flash ram display description show logging trap display description SMTP Alert Commands Time Commands System Status Commands Frame Size Commands Flash File Commands File Directory Information Authentication Commands 1 1 1 5 3 3 3 4 3 19 3 35 3 48 3 76 3 77 3 79 3 84 3 127 3 127 3 132 3 133 3 136 4 6 4 8
286. lic keys Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage f no parameters are entered all keys are displayed If the user keyword is entered but no user name is specified then the public keys for all users are displayed e When an RSA key is displayed the first field indicates the size of the host key e g 1024 the second field is the encoded public exponent e g 35 and the last string is the encoded modulus When a DSA key is displayed the first field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard DSS and the last string is the encoded modulus Example Console show public key host Host RSA 1024 35 1568499540186766925933394677505461732531367489083654725415020245593199868 5443583616519999233297817660658309586108259132128902337654680172627257141 3428762941301196195566782595664104869574278881462065194174677298486546861 5717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545240839717526463580581767 16709574804776117 DSA ssh dss AAAB3NzaClkc3MAAACBAPWKZTPbsRIB8ydEXcxM3 dyV yrDbKSt I1nzD Dg0h2Hxc YV44sXZ27XhamLK6 P8bvuiyacWbUW a4 PAtp1KMSdqsKeh3hKoA3vRRSy1N2XFfAKx15fwFfiv J1Pd0kFgzLGMinvSNYQwiQXbKTBHOZ4mUZpE85 PWxDZMaCNBPJj BrRAAAAFOQChb4vsdfQGNIjw bvwrNLaQ77isiwAAAIEAsy5YWDC99ebYHNRJ5kh4 7wY4i8cZvH p9cnrfwFTMUO1VFD1ly3IR 2G3 95NLy50d7ZDxfA9mCOfLT yyEfbobMIZi 80GCst SNOxrZZVnMqwrTYfdrKX7YKBw Kjw6Bm iFq70 jAh 1Dg451loAc27s6TLdtny1lwRq ow2eTCD5nekAAACBAJ 8 rMccXTxHLFAczWS7Ej Oy
287. lity of the network connection Syntax copy file file running config startup config tftp copy running config file startup config tftp copy startup config file running config tftp copy tftp file running config startup config https certificate public key file Keyword that allows you to copy to from a file running config Keyword that allows you to copy to from the current running configuration startup config The configuration used for system initialization tftp Keyword that allows you to copy to from a TFTP server https certificate Copies an HTTPS certificate from an TFTP server to the switch e public key Keyword that allows you to copy a SSH key from a TFTP server Secure Shell Commands on page 4 34 Default Setting None 4 63 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The system prompts for data required to complete the copy command e The destination file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ Due to the size limit of the flash memory the switch supports only two operation code files The maximum number of user defined configuration files depends on available memory You can
288. lled from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network This switch uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol over LANs EAPOL F og 802 1x to exchange authentication client protocol messages with the client and a remote RADIUS authentication server to verify user identity and access RADIUS rights When a client i e ER Supplicant connects to a switch port the switch i e Authenticator responds with an EAPOL identity request The client provides its identity such as a user name in an EAPOL response to the switch which it forwards to the RADIUS server The RADIUS server verifies the client identity and sends an access challenge back to the client The EAP packet from the RADIUS server contains not only the challenge but the authentication method to be used The client can reject the authentication method and request another depending on the configuration of the client software and the RADIUS server The authentication method currently supported is MD5 only The client responds to the appropriate method with its password The RADIUS server verifies the client credentials and responds with an accept or reject packet If authentication is successful the switch allows the client to access the network Otherwise network access is denied and the port remains blocked m jail eye EYES ieies ALAA 1 Client
289. lt Domain Name sample com Domain Name List sample com jp sample com uk Name Server List 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 Console show dns cache This command displays entries in the DNS cache Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show dns cache NO FLAG TYPE IP TTL DOMAIN 0 4 CNAME 10 2 44 96 893 pttch_pc accton com tw 1 4 CNAME 10 2 44 3 898 ahten accton com tw 2 4 CNAME 66 218 71 84 298 www yahoo akadns net 3 4 CNAME 66 218 71 83 298 www yahoo akadns net 4 4 CNAME 66 218 71 81 298 www yahoo akadns net 5 4 CNAME 66 218 71 80 298 www yahoo akadns net 6 4 CNAME 66 218 71 89 298 www yahoo akadns net 7 4 CNAME 66 218 71 86 298 www yahoo akadns net 8 4 ALIAS POINTER TO 7 298 www yahoo com Console Table 4 40 show dns cache display description Field Description NO The entry number for each resource record FLAG The flag is always 4 indicating a cache entry and therefore unreliable TYPE This field includes CNAME which specifies the canonical or primary name for the owner and ALIAS which specifies multiple domain names which are mapped to the same IP address as an existing entry IP The IP address associated with this record TTL The time to live reported by the name server DOMAIN The domain name associated with this record 4 123 4 Command Line Interface clear dns cache This command clears all entries in the DNS cache Command Mode Privileged Ex
290. lticast group Example The following shows how to configure the maximum response time to 20 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping query max response time 20 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping version 4 206 ip igmp snooping router port expire time This command configures the query timeout Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping router port expire time seconds no ip igmp snooping router port expire time seconds The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port i e the interface which had been receiving query packets to have expired Range 300 500 4 210 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 Default Setting 300 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The switch must use IGMPv2 for this command to take effect Example The following shows how to configure the default timeout to 300 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping router port expire time 300 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping version 4 206 Static Multicast Routing Commands Table 4 68 Static Multicast Routing Commands Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping vlan Adds a multicast router port GC 4 211 mrouter show ip igmp snooping Shows multicast router ports PE 4 212 mrouter ip igmp snooping vian mrouter This command statically configures a multicast router port Use the no form
291. mation Spanning Tree Spanning Tree State Enabled Designated Root 32768 0000AB8C D0000 Bridge ID 2768 0000ABCD0000 Root Port 0 Max Age 20 Root Path Cost 0 Hello Time 2 Configuration Changes 2 Forward Delay 15 Last Topology Change OdO h0 min 35 s Figure 3 54 STA Information 3 94 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 CLI This command displays global STA settings followed by settings for each port Console show spanning tree 4 170 Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode MSTP Spanning tree enable disable enable Instance 0 Vlans configuration 21 4094 Priority 232768 Bridge Hello Time sec 2 Bridge Max Age sec 20 Bridge Forward Delay sec 15 Root Hello Time sec 2 Root Max Age sec 720 Root Forward Delay sec 15 Max hops 220 Remaining hops 20 Designated Root 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 Current root port Current root cost 200000 Number of topology changes Last topology changes time sec 13380 Transmission limit Path Cost Method long Note The current root port and current root cost display as zero when this device is not connected to the network Configuring Global Settings Global settings apply to the entire switch Command Usage Spanning Tree Protocol Uses RSTP for the internal state machine but sends only 802 1D BPDUs This creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network If multiple VLANs are implemented on a network the path between spec
292. me it classifies the frame in one of two ways If the frame is untagged the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port But if the frame is tagged the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still need to communicate you can connect them by using a Layer 3 router or switch Untagged VLANs Untagged or static VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets However you should use IEEE 802 3 tagged VLANs with GVRP whenever possible to fully automate VLAN registration Automatic VLAN Registration GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a system whereby the switch can automatically learn the VLANs to which each end station should be assigned If an end station or its network adapter supports the IEEE 802 1Q VLAN protocol it can be configured to broadcast a message to your network indicating the VLAN groups it w
293. membership mode Indicates membership mode as Trunk or Hybrid page 4 176 4 135 4 Command Line Interface Table 4 42 interfaces switchport display description Field Description Ingress rule Shows if ingress filtering is enabled or disabled page 4 177 Acceptable frame type Shows if acceptable VLAN frames include all types or tagged frames only page 4 176 Native VLAN Indicates the default Port VLAN ID page 4 178 Priority for untagged traffic Indicates the default priority for untagged frames page 4 191 Gvrp status Shows if GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is enabled or disabled page 4 188 Allowed Vlan Shows the VLANs this interface has joined where u indicates untagged and t indicates tagged page 4 179 Forbidden Vlan Shows the VLANs this interface can not dynamically join via GVRP page 4 180 Mirror Port Commands This section describes how to mirror traffic from a source port to a target port Table 4 43 Mirror Port Commands Command Function Mode Page port monitor Configures a mirror session IC 4 136 show port monitor Shows the configuration for a mirror port PE 4 137 port monitor This command configures a mirror session Use the no form to clear a mirror session Syntax port monitor interface rx tx both no port monitor interface interface ethernet unit port source port unit Switch unit 1
294. meters for RADIUS or TACACS authentication if selected and click Apply Authentication Settings Authentication RADIUS Settings Server IP Address 10 1 0 1 Server Port Number 1 65535 1812 Secret Text String Number of Server Transmits 1 30 2 Timeout for a reply 1 65535 5 sec TACACS Settings Server IP Address i 0 11 12 13 Server Port Number 1 65535 49 Secret Text String Figure 3 21 Authentication Server Settings 3 33 3 Configuring the Switch CLI Specify all the required parameters to enable logon authentication Console config Console config Console config Console config Console config Console config Communication Console config Console config Console config Console config Console config Communication Console radius server radius server radius server radius server radius server Console show radius server Remote radius server configuration Server IP address tacacs server tacacs server tacacs server end Console show tacacs server Remote TACACS server configuration Server IP address 192 168 1 key with radius server Server port number 1812 Retransmit times 5 Request timeout 10 authentication login tacacs authentication login radius host 192 168 1 25 port 181 key green retransmit 5 timeout 10 25 host 10 20 30 40 port 200 key green 10 20 30 40 key with tacacs
295. min and guest When the administrator user name and password is entered the CLI displays the Console prompt and enters privileged access mode i e Privileged Exec But when the guest user name and password is entered the CLI displays the Console gt prompt and enters normal access mode i e Normal Exec 2 Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks 3 When finished exit the session with the quit or exit command After connecting to the system through the console port the login screen displays User Access Verification Username admin Password CLI session with the 44 10 100 1000 ports 4 Gigabit Combo ports L2 L4 managed standalone switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console Telnet Connection Telnet operates over the IP transport protocol In this environment your management station and any network device you want to manage over the network must have a valid IP address Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Each address consists of a network portion and host portion For example the IP address assigned to this switch 10 1 0 1 consists of a network portion 10 1 0 and a host portion 1 Note The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default 4 Command Line Interface To access the switch through a Telnet session you must first set the IP address for the switch and set the default
296. mmand Line Interface Example Console show queue mode Queue mode strict Console show queue bandwidth This command displays the weighted round robin WRR bandwidth allocation for the eight priority queues Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show queue bandwidth Information of Eth 1 1 Queue ID Weight 0 1 a 2 2 4 3 6 4 8 5 10 6 12 7 14 Console show queue cos map This command shows the class of service priority map Syntax show queue cos map interface interface e ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 196 Priority Commands 4 Example Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 Information of Eth 1 1 CoS Value 01234567 Priority Queue 01234567 Console Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 Table 4 62 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 Command Function Mode Page map ip port Enables TCP class of service mapping GC 4 197 map ip port Maps TCP socket to a class of service IC 4 198 map ip precedence Enables IP precedence class of service mapping GC 4 198 map ip precedence Maps IP precedence value to a class of service IC 4 199 map ip dscp Enables IP DSCP class of service mapping GC 4 200 map ip dscp Maps IP DSCP value to a class of service IC 4 200 map access list ip Se
297. mmand Line Interface spanning tree This command enables the Spanning Tree Algorithm globally for the switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no spanning tree Default Setting Spanning tree is enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The Spanning Tree Algorithm STA can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STA compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down Example This example shows how to enable the Spanning Tree Algorithm for the switch Console config spanning tree Console config spanning tree mode This command selects the spanning tree mode for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mode stp rstp mstp no spanning tree mode stp Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D e rstp Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w e mstp Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1s Default Setting mstp Command Mode Global Configuration 4 154 Spanning Tree Commands 4 Command Usage Spanning Tree Protocol Uses RSTP for the internal state machine but sends only 802 1D BPDUs This creates one spanning tree instance for t
298. n Syntax no ip http server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration 4 30 System Management Commands 4 Example Console config ip http server Console config Related Commands ip http port 4 30 ip http secure server This command enables the secure hypertext transfer protocol HTTPS over the Secure Socket Layer SSL providing secure access i e an encrypted connection to the switch s Web interface Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip http secure server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Both HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch However you cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same UDP port If you enable HTTPS you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your browser https device port_number When you start HTTPS the connection is established in this way The client authenticates the server using the server s digital certificate The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data e The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5 x and Netscape Navigator 4 x or later versions The following Web browsers and operating systems currently su
299. n 0 sll None Enabled None 16 Enabled Down 1000full None Enabled None 17 Enabled Down 1000full None Enabled None E Figure 3 39 Port Port Information Field Attributes CLI Basic information Port type Indicates the port type 1000BASE T or SFP MAC address The physical layer address for this port To access this item on the web see Setting the Switch s IP Address on page 3 13 Configuration e Name Interface label Port admin Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled i e up or down e Speed duplex Shows the current speed and duplex mode Auto or fixed choice e Capabilities Specifies the capabilities to be advertised for a port during auto negotiation To access this item on the web see Configuring Interface Connections on page 3 48 The following capabilities are supported e 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation e 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation e 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation e 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation e 1000full Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation e Sym Transmits and receives pause frames for flow control e FC Supports flow control 3 65 3 Configuring the Switch Broadcast storm Shows if broadcast storm control is enabled or disabled Broadcast storm limit Shows the broadcast storm threshold 500 262143 packets per second Flow control Shows if flow control is
300. n ACL name in the Name field select the list type IP Standard IP Extended or MAC and click Add to open the configuration page for the new list ACL Configuration Type Name Remove Edit Name david Type Standard he Add Figure 3 31 Selecting ACL Type CLI This example creates a standard IP ACL named bill Console config access list ip standard bill 4 88 Console config std acl Configuring a Standard IP ACL Command Attributes e Action An ACL can contain all permit rules or all deny rules Default Permit rules e IP Specifies the source IP address Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to specify a specific host address in the Address field or IP to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields Options Any Host IP Default Any Address Source IP address e SubMask A subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore 3 53 3 Configuring the Switch The mask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Select the address type Any Host or IP If you select Host enter a specific address If you select IP enter a subnet addr
301. n id ID of the configured VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following example shows how to set the interface configuration mode to VLAN 1 and then assign an IP address to the VLAN Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 254 255 255 255 0 Console config if Related Commands shutdown 4 130 4 175 4 Command Line Interface switchport mode This command configures the VLAN membership mode for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport mode trunk hybrid no switchport mode trunk Specifies a port as an end point for a VLAN trunk A trunk is a direct link between two switches so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN Note that frames belonging to the port s default VLAN i e associated with the PVID are also transmitted as tagged frames hybrid Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames Default Setting All ports are in hybrid mode with the PVID set to VLAN 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example The following shows how to set the configuration mode to port 1 and then set the switchport mode to hybrid Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport mode hybrid Console config if Related Commands switchport accept
302. n this switch that is closest to the root This switch communicates with the root device through this port If there is no root port then this switch has been accepted as the root device of the Spanning Tree network Root Path Cost The path cost from the root port on this switch to the root device Configuration Changes The number of times the Spanning Tree has been reconfigured Last Topology Change Time since the Spanning Tree was last reconfigured These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI Spanning tree mode Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1w MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1s Instance Instance identifier of this spanning tree This is always 0 for the CIST Vlans configuration VLANs assigned to the CIST Priority Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Root Hello Time Interval in seconds at which this device transmits a configuration message Root Maximum Age The maximum time in seconds this device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated po
303. nable evel level Privilege level to log into the device The device has two predefined privilege levels 0 Normal Exec 15 Privileged Exec Enter level 15 to access Privileged Exec mode Default Setting Level 15 Command Mode Normal Exec Command Usage e super is the default password required to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec To set this password see the enable password command on page 4 27 The character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that system is in privileged access mode 4 20 the General Commands 4 Example Console gt enable Password privileged level password Console Related Commands disable 4 21 enable password 4 27 disable This command returns to Normal Exec mode from privileged mode In normal access mode you can only display basic information on the switch s configuration or Ethernet statistics To gain access to all commands you must use the privileged mode See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The gt character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in normal access mode Example Console disable Console gt Related Commands enable 4 20 configure This command activates Global Configuration mode You must enter this mode to modify any settings on the switch Y
304. nabled 20 60 M Enabled 30 90 GARP GARP GARP LeaveAll Join Leave Timer Timer Timer Centi Mode Centi Centi Seconds Seconds Seconds 6500 20 1000 60 3000 18000 l Enabled 20 60 1000 Hybrid l Enabled 20 60 1000 Hybrid fiooo Hybrid 1000 Hybrid 2o00 Hybrid l Enabled 20 60 1000 Hybrid v Trunk Member 3 120 Figure 3 67 VLAN Port Configuration VLAN Configuration 3 CLI This example sets port 3 to accept only tagged frames assigns PVID 3 as the native VLAN ID enables GVRP sets the GARP timers and then sets the switchport mode to hybrid Console config interface ethernet 1 3 4 125 Console config if switchport acceptable frame types tagged 4 176 Console config if switchport ingress filtering 4 177 Console config if switchport native vlan 3 4 178 Console config if switchport gvrp 4 188 Console config if garp timer join 20 4 189 Console config if garp timer leave 90 4 189 Console config if garp timer leaveall 2000 4 189 Console config if switchport mode hybrid 4 176 Console config if Configuring Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from uplink ports Note that private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch Uplink Ports Primary VLAN promiscuous ports
305. nation IP address entries community string Password like community string sent with the notification operation Although you can set this string using the snmp server host command by itself we recommend that you define this string using the snmp server community command prior to using the snmp server host command Maximum length 32 characters version Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP v1 or v2c traps Default Setting Host Address None SNMP Version 1 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e If you do not enter an snmp server host command no notifications are sent In order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications you must enter at least one snmp server host command In order to enable multiple hosts you must issue a separate snmp server host command for each host The snmp server host command is used in conjunction with the snmp server enable traps command Use the snmp server enable traps command to specify which SNMP notifications are sent globally For a host to receive notifications at least one snmp server enable traps command and the snmp server host command for that host must be enabled e Some notification types cannot be controlled with the snmp server enable traps command For example some notification types are always enabled e The switch can send SNMP version 1 or version 2c notifications to a host IP address depending on the SNMP version that the management station su
306. nd Attributes 802 1X Re authentication Indicates if switch port requires a client to be re authenticated after a certain period of time 802 1X Max Request Count The maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Timeout For Quiet Period Indicates the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Timeout For Re authentication Period Indicates the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Timeout For Tx Period The time period during an authentication session that the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet Supplicant Timeout The time the switch waits for a client response to an EAP request Server Timeout The time the switch waits for a response from the authentication server RADIUS to an authentication request Re authentication Max Count The number of times the switch will attempt to re authenticate a connected client before the port becomes unauthorized 3 44 Web Click Security 802 1x Information User Authentication 3 802 1X Information 802 1X Re authentication Disabled 802 1X Max Request Count 2 Timeout For Quiet Period 60 seconds Timeout For Re authentication Period 3600 seconds Timeout For Tx Period 30 seconds Supplicant Timeout 30 secon
307. nd also disconnect the ports before removing a static trunk via the configuration interface active links EMET Web Click Port Trunk Membership Enter a trunk ID of 1 6 in the Trunk field select any of the switch ports from the scroll down port list and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply Trunk Membership Member List Current New Trunk1 Unit Portl Trunk Unit Port2 Add Tukas Remove Pon fi Figure 3 41 Static Trunk Configuration 3 70 CLI This example creates trunk 2 with ports 1 and 2 two static trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk Port Configuration 3 Just connect these ports to Console config interface port channel 1 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if channel group 1 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if channel group 1 Console config if end Console show interfaces status port channel 1 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type 1000T Mac address 00 00 E8 AA AA 01 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half Flow control Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Current status Created by User Link status Down Operation speed duplex Flow control type None Member Ports Eth1 1 Eth1 2 Console 10ful
308. nd the switch i e authenticator as well as the client identity lookup process that runs between the switch and authentication server The configuration options for parameters are described in this section Command Attributes 802 1X Re authentication Sets the client to be re authenticated after the interval specified by the Timeout for Re authentication Period Re authentication can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port Default Disabled 802 1X Max Request Count Sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Range 1 10 Default 2 Timeout For Quiet Period Sets the time that a switch port waits after the dot1X Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Range 1 65535 seconds Default 60 seconds e Timeout For Re authentication Period Sets the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Range 1 65535 seconds Default 3600 seconds e Timeout For Tx Period Sets the time period during an authentication session that the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet Range 1 65535 Default 30 seconds e authentication dot1x default Sets the default authentication server type Note that the specified authentication server type must be enabled and properly configured for dot1x to function properly Options radius
309. ne Interface Example Console show startup config building startup config please wait username admin access level 15 username admin password 0 admin username guest access level 0 username guest password 0 guest enable password level 15 0 super snmp server community public ro snmp server community private rw vlan database vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active interface vlan 1 ip address dhcp line console line vty end Console Related Commands show running config 4 58 show running config This command displays the configuration information currently in use Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e Use this command in conjunction with the show startup config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non volatile memory e This command displays settings for key command modes Each mode group is separated by symbols and includes the configuration mode command and corresponding commands This command displays the following information SNMP community strings Users names access levels and encrypted passwords VLAN database VLAN ID name and state 4 58 System Management Commands 4 VLAN configuration settings for each interface Multiple spanning tree instances name and interfaces IP address configured for VLANs Spanning tree settings Any configured settings fo
310. ne of these priority types will automatically disable the other type Example The following example shows how to enable IP DSCP mapping globally Console config map ip dscp Console config map ip dscp Interface Configuration This command sets IP DSCP priority i e Differentiated Services Code Point priority Use the no form to restore the default table Syntax map ip dscp dscp value cos cos value no map ip dscp dscp value DSCP value Range 0 63 cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7 4 200 Priority Commands 4 Default Setting The DSCP default values are defined in the following table Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0 Table 4 64 Mapping IP DSCP to CoS Values IP DSCP Value CoS Value 0 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 48 46 56 NLD om BI wl mp gt o Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority DSCP priority values are mapped to default Class of Service values according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard and then subsequently mapped to the eight hardware priority queues This command sets the IP DSCP priority for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to map IP DSCP valu
311. nel Command Usage When auto negotiation is enabled the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilities command When auto negotiation is disabled you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed duplex and flowcontrol commands 4 127 4 Command Line Interface e If autonegotiation is disabled auto MDI MDI X pin signal configuration will also be disabled for the RJ 45 ports Example The following example configures port 11 to use autonegotiation Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if negotiation Console config if Related Commands capabilities 4 128 speed duplex 4 126 capabilities This command advertises the port capabilities of a given interface during autonegotiation Use the no form with parameters to remove an advertised capability or the no form without parameters to restore the default values Syntax no capabilities 1000full 100full 100half 10full 10half flowcontrol symmetric 1000full Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation flowcontrol Supports flow control symmetric Gigabit only When specified the port transmits and receives pause frames when not specified the port will auto negotiate to det
312. network and wasting bandwidth To avoid dropping frames on congested ports the switch provides 1 MB for frame buffering for the ES4512 24C and 2 MB for the ES4548C This buffer can queue packets awaiting transmission on congested networks Spanning Tree Protocol The switch supports these spanning tree protocols Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D This protocol adds a level of fault tolerance by allowing two or more redundant connections to be created between a pair of LAN segments When there are multiple physical paths between segments this protocol will choose a single path and disable all others to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network This prevents the creation of network loops However if the chosen path should fail for any reason an alternate path will be activated to maintain the connection Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w This protocol reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10 of that required by the older IEEE 802 1D STP standard It is intended as a complete replacement for STP but can still interoperate with switches running the older standard by automatically reconfiguring ports to STP compliant mode if they detect STP protocol messages from attached devices 4A Introduction Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 1s This protocol is a direct extension of RSTP It can provide an independent spanning tree for differ
313. nge is Ethernet 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2 000 200 000 4 167 4 Command Line Interface Default Setting e Ethernet half duplex 2 000 000 full duplex 1 000 000 trunk 500 000 e Fast Ethernet half duplex 200 000 full duplex 100 000 trunk 50 000 e Gigabit Ethernet full duplex 10 000 trunk 5 000 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Each spanning tree instance is associated with a unique set of VLAN IDs e This command is used by the multiple spanning tree algorithm to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to interfaces attached to faster media and higher values assigned to interfaces with slower media e Path cost takes precedence over interface priority Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree mst 1 cost 50 Console config if Related Commands spanning tree mst port priority 4 168 spanning tree mst port priority This command configures the interface priority on a spanning instance in the Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mst instance_id port priority priority no spanning tree mst instance_id port priority e instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes e priority Priority for an interface Range 0 240
314. ngress port s default VID 3 112 VLAN Configuration 3 Enabling or Disabling GVRP Global Setting GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network VLANs are dynamically configured based on join messages issued by host devices and propagated throughout the network GVRP must be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch Default Disabled Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN GVRP Status Enable or disable GVRP and click Apply GVRP Status GYRP I Enable Figure 3 61 Globally Enabling GVRP CLI This example enables GVRP for the switch Console config bridge ext gvrp 4 187 Console config Displaying Basic VLAN Information The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type supported by the switch Field Attributes VLAN Version Number The VLAN version used by this switch as specified in the IEEE 802 1Q standard Maximum VLAN ID Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this switch Maximum Number of Supported VLANs Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on this switch Web Only Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Basic Information VLAN Basic Information VLAN Version Number 1 Maximum VLAN ID 4094 Maximum Number of Supported VLANs 255 Figure 3 62 VLAN Basic Information 3 113
315. nloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example This example shows how the set the access level and password for a user Console config username bob access level 15 Console config username bob password 0 smith Console config enable password After initially logging onto the system you should set the Privileged Exec password Remember to record it in a safe place This command controls access to the Privileged Exec level from the Normal Exec level Use the no form to reset the default password Syntax enable password level evel 0 7 password no enable password level evel e level eve Level 15 for Privileged Exec Levels 0 14 are not used e 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password password password for this privilege level Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting e The default is level 15 e The default password is super Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You cannot set a null password You will have to enter a password to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec with the enable command page 4 20 The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file
316. nnot be a multi VLAN port It cannot be used as a member of a static or dynamic trunk It should not be connected to a network interconnection device The default maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a secure port is Zero You must configure a maximum address count from 1 20 for the port to allow access 3 41 3 Configuring the Switch e Ifa port is disabled shut down due to a security violation it must be manually re enabled from the Port Port Configuration page page 3 67 Command Attributes e Port Port number e Name Descriptive text page 4 126 e Action Indicates the action to be taken when a port security violation is detected None No action should be taken This is the default Trap Send an SNMP trap message Shutdown Disable the port Trap and Shutdown Send an SNMP trap message and disable the port e Security Status Enables or disables port security on the port Default Disabled Max MAC Count The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port Range 0 20 e Trunk Trunk number if port is a member page 3 70 and 3 71 Web Click Security Port Security Set the action to take when an invalid address is detected on a port mark the checkbox in the Status column to enable security for a port set the maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a port and click Apply Port Security Configuration Port Name Action
317. nooping mrouter vlan 1 VLAN M cast Router Port Type 1 Eth 1 11 Static 2 Eth 1 12 Dynamic Console 4 212 IP Interface Commands 4 IP Interface Commands An IP addresses may be used for management access to the switch over your network The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server when it is powered on You may also need to a establish a default gateway between this device and management stations or other devices that exist on another network segment Table 4 69 IP Interface Commands Command Function Mode Page ip address Sets the IP address for the current interface IC 4 213 ip dhcp restart Submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request PE 4 214 ip default gateway Defines the default gateway through which this switch can reach GC 4 215 other subnetworks show ip interface Displays the IP settings for this device PE 4 215 show ip redirects Displays the default gateway configured for this device PE 4 216 ping Sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the NE 4 216 network PE ip address This command sets the IP address for the currently selected VLAN interface Use the no form to restore the default IP address Syntax ip address ip address netmask bootp dhcp no ip address jp address IP address e netmask Network mask for the associated
318. nsole config if spanning tree link type auto 4 167 Console config if no spanning tree edge port 4 165 Console config if Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees MSTP generates a unique spanning tree for each instance This provides multiple pathways across the network thereby balancing the traffic load preventing wide scale disruption when a bridge node in a single instance fails and allowing for faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree MST Instance 0 that connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region This switch supports up to 65 instances You should try to group VLANs which cover the same general area of your network However remember that you must configure all bridges within the same MSTI Region page 3 97 with the same set of instances and the same instance on each bridge with the same set of VLANs Also note that RSTP treats each MSTI region as a single node connecting all regions to the Common Spanning Tree To use multiple spanning trees 1 Set the spanning tree type to MSTP STA Configuration page 3 95 2 Enter the spanning tree priority for the selected MST instance MSTP VLAN Configuration 3 Add the VLANs that will share this MSTI MSTP VLAN Configuration Note All VLANs are automatically added to the IST Instance 0 3 104 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 To ensure that the MSTI maintains conne
319. nsole config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224 0 0 12 ethernet 1 5 Console config 4 205 4 Command Line Interface ip igmp snooping version This command configures the IGMP snooping version Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping version 1 2 no ip igmp snooping version 1 IGMP Version 1 2 IGMP Version 2 Default Setting IGMP Version 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage All systems on the subnet must support the same version If there are legacy devices in your network that only support Version 1 you will also have to configure this switch to use Version 1 Some commands are only enabled for IGMPv2 including ip igmp query max response time and ip igmp query timeout Example The following configures the switch to use IGMP Version 1 Console config ip igmp snooping version 1 Console config show ip igmp snooping This command shows the IGMP snooping configuration Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage See Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters on page 3 140 for a description of the displayed items 4 206 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 Example The following shows the current IGMP snooping configuration Console show ip igmp snooping Service status Enabled Querier status Enabled Query count 2 Query interval 125 sec Query max response time 10 sec Router port expire tim
320. nt image or first download the file using a different name from the current runtime code file and then set the new file as the startup file Web Click System File Firmware Enter the IP address of the TFTP server enter the file name of the software to download select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name then click Transfer from Server To start the new firmware reboot the system via the System Reset menu Transfer Operation Code Image File from Server Current Operation Code Version 0 0 2 24 TFTP Server IP Address 10 10 19 Source File Name M10000 bix Destination File Name C MO00224 bix V1 0 Transfer from Server Figure 3 8 Downloading Firmware to the Switch 3 16 Basic Configuration 3 If you download to a new destination file then select the file from the drop down box for the operation code used at startup and click Apply Changes To start the new firmware reboot the system via the System Reset menu Start Up Operation Code Image File File Name V1 0 Apply Changes x Figure 3 9 Setting the Startup Code CLI Enter the IP address of the TFTP server select config or opcode file type then enter the source and destination file names set the new file to start up the system and then restart the switch Console copy tftp file 4 63 TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 19 Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode lt 1 2 gt 2 Source file name M100000 bix D
321. o 4096 entries in permanent flash memory Web Click System Log Logs Logs Error Message Level 6 Module 6 functions 1 error number 1 Information VLAN 1 link up notification Error Message Level 6 Module 6 functions 1 error number 1 Information STA topology change notification Error Message Level 6 Module 6 functions 1 error number 1 Information Unit 1 Port 21 link up notification Error Message Level 6 Module 6 functions 1 error number 1 Information System coldStart notification Figure 3 14 Displaying Logs 3 22 Basic Configuration 3 CLI This example shows that system logging is enabled the message level for flash memory is errors i e default level 3 0 the message level for RAM is debugging i e default level 7 0 and lists one sample error Console show logging flash 4 47 Syslog logging Enable History logging in FLASH level errors 0 0 0 5 1 1 1 PRI_MGR_InitDefault function fails level 3 module 13 function 0 and event no 0 Console show logging ram 4 47 Syslog logging Enable History logging in RAM level debugging 0 0 0 5 1 1 1 PRI_MGR_InitDefault function fails level 3 module 13 function 0 and event no 0 Console Sending Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Alerts To alert system administrators of problems the switch can use SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol to send email messages when triggered by logging events of a
322. o GC 4 112 SNMP commands snmp server contact Sets the system contact string GC 4 113 snmp server location Sets the system location string GC 4 113 snmp server host Specifies the recipient of an SNMP notification operation GC 4 114 snmp server enable traps Enables the device to send SNMP traps i e SNMP GC 4 115 notifications show snmp Displays the status of SNMP communications NE PE 4 115 snmp server community This command defines the community access string for the Simple Network Management Protocol Use the no form to remove the specified community string Syntax snmp server community string ro rw no snmp server community string string Community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol Maximum length 32 characters case sensitive Maximum number of strings 5 ro Specifies read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects rw Specifies read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Default Setting e public Read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects e private Read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The first snmp server community command you enter enables SNMP SNMPv1 The no snmp server community command disables SNMP
323. o configure access control masks Use the no form to delete the mask table Syntax no access list ip mask precedence in out in Ingress mask for ingress ACLs out Egress mask for egress ACLs Default Setting Default system mask Filter inbound packets according to specified MAC ACLs Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule A mask can only be used by all ingress ACLs or all egress ACLs The precedence of the ACL rules applied to a packet is not determined by order of the rules but instead by the order of the masks i e the first mask that matches a rule will determine the rule that is applied to a packet Example Console config access list mac mask precedence in Console config mac mask acl Related Commands mask MAC ACL 4 105 mac access group 4 107 4 104 Access Control List Commands 4 mask MAC ACL This command defines a mask for MAC ACLs This mask defines the fields to check in the packet header Use the no form to remove a mask Syntax no mask pktformat any host source bitmask any host destination bitmask vid vid bitmask ethertype ethertype bitmask pktformat Check the packet format field If this keyword must be used in the mask the packet format must be specified in ACL rule to match
324. og Configuration The Remote Logs page allows you to configure the logging of messages that are sent to syslog servers or other management stations You can also limit the event messages sent to only those messages at or above a specified level Command Attributes e Remote Log Status Enables disables the logging of debug or error messages to the remote logging process Default Disabled e Logging Facility Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages There are eight facility types specified by values of 16 to 23 The facility type is used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service The attribute specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages See RFC 3164 This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch However it may be used by the syslog server to process messages such as sorting or storing messages in the corresponding database Range 16 23 Default 23 3 20 Basic Configuration 3 e Logging Trap Limits log messages that are sent to the remote syslog server for all levels up to the specified level For example if level 3 is specified all messages from level 0 to level 3 will be sent to the remote server Range 0 7 Default 7 Host IP List Displays the list of remote server IP addresses that will receive syslog messages The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five Host IP Address Specifies a new server IP address
325. ol VLAN it is processed in the following manner Ifthe frame is tagged it will be processed according to the standard rules applied to tagged frames 3 123 3 Configuring the Switch If the frame is untagged and the protocol type matches the frame is forwarded to the appropriate VLAN If the frame is untagged but the protocol type does not match the frame is forwarded to the default VLAN for this interface Command Attributes Interface Port or trunk identifier Protocol Group ID Group identifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 e VLAN ID VLAN to which matching protocol traffic is forwarded Range 1 4094 Web Click VLAN Protocol VLAN Port Configuration Select a a port or trunk enter a protocol group ID the corresponding VLAN ID and click Apply Protocol Vlan Port Configuration Interface Port 1 C Trunk z Query Current New lt lt Add Protocol Gruop ID 1 2147483647 Remove Vian ID 18 Group 1 Vlan 3 Figure 3 71 Protocol VLAN Port Configuration CLI The following maps the traffic entering Port 1 which matches the protocol type specified in protocol group 1 to VLAN 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if protocol vlan protocol group 1 vlan 3 4 184 Console config if 3 124 Class of Service Configuration 3 Class of Service Configuration Class of Service CoS allows you to specify which data pack
326. ole config sntp poll 60 Console config sntp client Console config end Console show sntp Current time Jul 10 02 52 44 2003 Poll interval 60 Current mode unicast SNTP status Enabled SNTP server 137 92 140 80 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Current server 137 92 140 80 Console Related Commands sntp server 4 53 sntp poll 4 54 show sntp 4 54 sntp server This command sets the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time requests are issued Use the this command with no arguments to clear all time servers from the current list Syntax sntp server p7 ip2 ip3 ip IP address of an time server NTP or SNTP Range 1 3 addresses Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command specifies time servers from which the switch will poll for time updates when set to SNTP client mode The client will poll the time servers in the order specified until a response is received It issues time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command Example Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 Console Related Commands sntp client 4 52 sntp poll 4 54 show sntp 4 54 4 53 4 Command Line Interface sntp poll This command sets the interval between sending time requests when the switch is set to SNTP client mode Use the no form to restore to the default Syntax sntp poll seconds no sntp poll seconds Interval between t
327. on The switch supports IEEE 802 1x dot1x port based access control that prevents unauthorized access to the network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication Client authentication is controlled centrally by a RADIUS server using EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol Table 4 31 802 1x Port Authentication Commands Command Function Mode Page authentication dot1x default Sets the default authentication server type GC 4 78 dot1x default Resets all dot1x parameters to their default values GC 4 79 dot1x max req Sets the maximum number of times that the switch GC 4 79 retransmits an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session dot1x port control Sets dot1x mode for a port interface IC 4 80 dot1x operation mode Allows single or multiple hosts on an dot1x port IC 4 80 dot1x re authenticate Forces re authentication on specific ports PE 4 81 dot1x re authentication Enables re authentication for all ports GC 4 81 dot1x timeout quiet period Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max GC 4 82 Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client dot1x timeout re authperiod Sets the time period after which a connected client must GC 4 82 be re authenticated dot1x timeout tx period Sets the time period during an authentication session that GC 4 83 the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet
328. on IP Multicast Registration Table IGMP Member Port Table 3 74 3 76 3 78 3 79 3 81 3 82 3 83 3 87 3 89 3 90 3 91 3 94 3 98 3 101 3 104 3 105 3 107 3 109 3 113 3 113 3 114 3 116 3 117 3 118 3 120 3 121 3 122 3 123 3 124 3 126 3 128 3 129 3 130 3 131 3 132 3 134 3 135 3 135 3 137 3 138 3 141 3 142 3 143 3 144 3 145 Figures Figure 3 88 DNS General Configuration 3 147 Figure 3 89 DNS Static Host Table 3 149 Figure 3 90 DNS Cache 3 150 xvii Figures xviii Chapter 1 Introduction This switch provides a broad range of features for Layer 2 switching It includes a management agent that allows you to configure the features listed in this manual The default configuration can be used for most of the features provided by this switch However there are many options that you should configure to maximize the switch s performance for your particular network environment Key Features Table 1 1 Key Features Feature Description Configuration Backup and Restore Backup to TFTP server Authentication Console Telnet web User name password RADIUS TACACS Web HTTPS Telnet SSH SNMP Community strings IP address filtering Port IEEE 802 1x MAC address filtering Access Control Lists Supports up to 32 IP or MAC ACLs DHCP Client Supported DNS Server Supported Port Configuration Speed duplex mode and flow
329. on VLAN and then assign the multicast service to that VLAN group Command Usage e Static multicast addresses are never aged out e When a multicast address is assigned to an interface in a specific VLAN the corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports within that VLAN Command Attribute Interface Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list VLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router switch e Multicast IP The IP address for a specific multicast service Port or Trunk Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router switch Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Member Port Table Specify the interface attached to a multicast service via an IGMP enabled switch or multicast router indicate the VLAN that will propagate the multicast service specify the multicast IP address and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply IGMP Member Port Table IGMP Member Port List New Static IGMP Member Port VLAN 1 224 1 1 12 Unit 1 Port1 Interface Pot VLAN ID 15 lt lt Add R Multicast IP emove Port 18 Trunk z Figure 3 87 IGMP Member Port Table CLI This example assigns a multicast address to VLAN 1 and then displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224 1 1 12 ethernet 1 12 4 205 Console config exit Console sho
330. one Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows the information displayed by the whichboot command See the table under the dir command for a description of the file information displayed by this command Console whichboot file name file type startup size byte Unit1 Diag bix Boot Rom image T 818812 V11022 Operation Code ba 2402452 startup Config File Y 7606 Console boot system This command specifies the image used to start up the system Syntax boot system boot rom config opcode filename The type of file or image to set as a default includes boot rom Boot ROM config Configuration file opcode Run time operation code filename Name of the configuration file or image name The colon is required 4 67 A Command Line Interface Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e A colon is required after the specified file type e Ifthe file contains an error it cannot be set as the default file Example Console config Console config boot system config startup Related Commands dir 4 66 whichboot 4 67 Authentication Commands You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or RADIUS authentication methods You can also enable port based authentication for network client access using IEEE 802 1x Table 4 26 Authentication
331. onfig interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport native vlan 3 Console config if 4 178 VLAN Commands 4 switchport allowed vlan This command configures VLAN groups on the selected interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport allowed vlan add vian list tagged untagged remove vian list no switchport allowed vlan e add vian list List of VLAN identifiers to add remove vian list List of VLAN identifiers to remove e vian list Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs Do not enter leading zeros Range 1 4094 Default Setting All ports are assigned to VLAN 1 by default The default frame type is untagged Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage A port or a trunk with switchport mode set to hybrid must be assigned to at least one VLAN as untagged Ifa trunk has switchport mode set to trunk i e 1Q Trunk then you can only assign an interface to VLAN groups as a tagged member Frames are always tagged within the switch The tagged untagged parameter used when adding a VLAN to an interface tells the switch whether to keep or remove the tag from a frame on egress Ifnone of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs the interface should be added to these VLANs as an untagged member Otherw
332. onfiguration Settings on page 3 17 for more information Operation Code System software that is executed after boot up also known as run time code This code runs the switch operations and provides the CLI and Web management interfaces See Managing Firmware on page 3 16 for more information e Diagnostic Code Software that is run during system boot up also known as POST Power On Self Test Due to the size limit of the flash memory the switch supports only two operation code files However you can have as many diagnostic code files and configuration files as available flash memory space allows In the system flash memory one file of each type must be set as the start up file During a system boot the diagnostic and operation code files set as the start up file are run and then the start up configuration file is loaded Note that configuration files should be downloaded using a file name that reflects the contents or usage of the file settings If you download directly to the running config the system will reboot and the settings will have to be copied from the running config to a permanent file Chapter 3 Configuring the Switch Using the Web Interface This switch provides an embedded HTTP Web agent Using a Web browser you can configure the switch and view statistics to monitor network activity The Web agent can be accessed by any computer on the network using a standard Web browser Internet Explorer 5
333. onfigures the switch to operate as an SNTP client This requires at least one time server to be specified in the SNTP Server field Default Disabled SNTP Poll Interval Sets the interval between sending requests for a time update from a time server Range 16 16384 seconds Default 16 seconds e SNTP Server Sets the IP address for up to three time servers The switch attempts to update the time from the first server if this fails it attempts an update from the next server in the sequence Web Select SNTP Configuration Modify any of the required parameters and click Apply SNTP Configuration SNTP Client F Enabled SNTP Polling Interval 16 16384 16 SNIP Server fio1 0 19 137 82 140 80 128 250 36 2 Figure 3 17 Configuring SNTP 3 26 Basic Configuration 3 CLI This example configures the switch to operate as an SNTP client and then displays the current time and settings Console config sntp client 4 52 Console config sntp poll 16 4 54 Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 137 82 140 80 128 250 36 2 4 53 Console config exit Console show sntp 4 54 Current time Jan 6 14 56 05 2004 Poll interval 60 Current mode unicast SNTP status Enabled SNTP server 10 1 0 19 137 82 140 80 128 250 36 2 Current server 128 250 36 2 Console config Setting the Time Zone SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time or UTC formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT based on the
334. onnections between devices use the web interface or CLI to specify the trunk on the devices at both ends When using a port trunk take note of the following points Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop e You can create up to six trunks on the switch with up to eight ports per trunk The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports e When configuring static trunks on switches of different types they must be compatible with the Cisco EtherChannel standard e The ports at both ends of a trunk must be configured in an identical manner including communication mode i e speed duplex mode and flow control VLAN assignments and CoS settings All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN STP VLAN and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk 3 69 3 Configuring the Switch Statically Configuring a Trunk Command Usage When configuring static trunks you may not be able to link switches of different types statically depending on the manufacturer s configured implementation However note that the static HS trunks on this switch are Cisco EtherChannel memes palho oo o compatible e To avoid creating a loop in the network be sure you add a static trunk via the configuration interface before connecting the ports a
335. ontrol the order in which ACL rules are checked The switch includes two system default masks that pass filter packets matching the permit deny rules specified in an ingress ACL You can also configure up to seven user defined masks for an ingress or egress ACL A mask must be bound exclusively to one of the basic ACL types i e Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL or Egress MAC ACL but a mask can be bound to up to four ACLs of the same type Command Usage Up to seven entries can be assigned to an ACL mask Packets crossing a port are checked against all the rules in the ACL until a match is found The order in which these packets are checked is determined by the mask and not the order in which the ACL rules are entered First create the required ACLs and the ingress or egress masks before mapping an ACL to an interface You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule Specifying the Mask Type Use the ACL Mask Configuration page to edit the mask for the Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL or Egress MAC ACL Web Click Security ACL ACL Mask Configuration Click Edit for one of the basic mask types to open the configuration page ACL Mask Configuration Mask Type Mask Action Edit lp Ingress Edit le o Egress Edit IMAC Ingress Eai IMAC Egress Edit Figure 3 35 Selecting A
336. or submit a client request to restart DHCP service via the CLI Web If the address assigned by DHCP is no longer functioning you will not be able to renew the IP settings via the web interface You can only restart DHCP service via the web interface if the current address is still available 3 15 3 Configuring the Switch CLI Enter the following command to restart DHCP service Console ip dhcp restart 4 214 Console Managing Firmware You can upload download firmware to or from a TFTP server By saving runtime code to a file on a TFTP server that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore operation You can also set the switch to use new firmware without overwriting the previous version Command Attributes TFTP Server IP Address The IP address of a TFTP server e File Name The file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ Note Up to two copies of the system software i e the runtime firmware can be stored in the file directory on the switch The currently designated startup version of this file cannot be deleted Downloading System Software from a Server When downloading runtime code you can specify the destination file name to replace the curre
337. or that same interface Example The following example shows how to prevent port 1 from being added to VLAN 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport forbidden vlan add 3 Console config if 4 180 VLAN Commands 4 Displaying VLAN Information Table 4 55 Show VLAN Commands Command Function Mode Page show vlan Shows VLAN information NE PE 4 181 show interfaces status vlan Displays status for the specified VLAN interface NE PE 4 133 show interfaces switchport Displays the administrative and operational status ofan NE PE 4 135 interface show vlan This command shows VLAN information Syntax show vlan id vian id name vlan name e id Keyword to be followed by the VLAN ID vian id ID of the configured VLAN Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes name Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name vian name ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters Default Setting Shows all VLANs Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example The following example shows how to display information for VLAN 1 Console show vlan id 1 VLAN Type Name Status Ports Channel groups 1 Static DefaultVlan Active Eth1 1 Eth1 2 Eth1 3 Ethl 4 Eth1 5 Ethl 6 Ethl 7 Eth1 8 Eth1 9 Eth1 10 Eth1 11 Eth1 12 Eth1 13 Eth1 14 Eth1 15 Eth1 16 Eth1 17 Eth1 18 Eth1 19 Eth1 20 Eth1 21 Eth1 22 Eth1 23 Eth1 24 Eth1 25 Eth1 26 Eth1 27 Eth1 28 Eth1 29 Et
338. or this bridge consisting of the bridge priority and MAC address where the address is taken from the switch system Max Age The maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section mean interfaces which includes both ports and trunks 3 92 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 Hello Time Interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds the root device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Designated Root The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device Root Port The number of the port o
339. ord privileged level password Console Configuration Commands Configuration commands are privileged level commands used to modify switch settings These commands modify the running configuration only and are not saved when the switch is rebooted To store the running configuration in non volatile storage use the copy running config startup config command The configuration commands are organized into different modes Global Configuration These commands modify the system level configuration and include commands such as hostname and snmp server community e Access Control List Configuration These commands are used for packet filtering Interface Configuration These commands modify the port configuration such as speed duplex and negotiation e Line Configuration These commands modify the console port and Telnet configuration and include command such as parity and databits VLAN Configuration Includes the command to create VLAN groups e Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration These commands configure settings for the selected multiple spanning tree instance To enter the Global Configuration mode enter the command configure in Privileged Exec mode The system prompt will change to Console config which gives you access privilege to all Global Configuration commands Console configure Console config 4 Command Line Interface To enter the other modes at the configuration promp
340. ort port_number TACACS server TCP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default Setting 49 4 74 Authentication Commands 4 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config tacacs server port 181 Console config tacacs server key This command sets the TACACS encryption key Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server key key_string no tacacs server key key_string Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for the client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 20 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config tacacs server key green Console config show tacacs server This command displays the current settings for the TACACS server Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show tacacs server Remote TACACS server configuration Server IP address 10 11 12 13 Communication key with radius server green Server port number 49 Console 4 75 4 Command Line Interface Port Security Commands These commands can be used to enable port security on a port When using port security the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table for this port will be
341. ort priority This command configures LACP port priority Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner port priority priority no lacp actor partner port priority e actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link e priority LACP port priority is used to select a backup link Range 0 65535 Default Setting 32768 4 144 Link Aggregation Commands 4 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage Setting a lower value indicates a higher effective priority Ifan active port link goes down the backup port with the highest priority is selected to replace the downed link However if two or more ports have the same LACP port priority the port with the lowest physical port number will be selected as the backup port Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor port priority 128 show lacp This command displays LACP information Syntax show lacp port channel counters internal neighbors sysid port channel Local identifier for a link aggregation group Range
342. other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid network topology RSTP is designed as a general replacement for the slower legacy STP RSTP is also incorporated into MSTP RSTP achieves must faster reconfiguration i e around one tenth of the time required by STP by reducing the number of state changes before active ports start learning predefining an alternate route that can be used when a node or port fails and retaining the forwarding database for ports insensitive to changes in the tree structure when reconfiguration occurs When using STP or RSTP it may be difficult to maintain a stable path between all VLAN members Frequent changes in the tree structure can easily isolate some of the group members MSTP an extension of RSTP is designed to support independent spanning trees based on VLAN groups Once you specify the VLANs to include in a Multiple Spanning Tree Instance MSTI the protocol will automatically build an MSTI tree to maintain connectivity among each of the VLANs MSTP maintains contact with the global network because each instance is treated as an RSTP node in the Common Spanning Tree CST Displaying Global Settings You can display a summary of the current bridge STA information that applies to the entire switch using the STA Information screen Field Attributes e Spanning Tree State Shows if the switch is enabled to participate in an STA compliant network Bridge ID A unique identifier f
343. other system information Flash File Manages code image or switch configuration files 4 63 Authentication Configures logon access using local or remote authentication 4 68 also configures port security and IEEE 802 1x port access control Access Control List Provides filtering for IP frames based on address protocol TCP UDP 4 86 port number or TCP control code or non IP frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type SNMP Activates authentication failure traps configures community access 4 112 strings and trap managers also configures IP address filtering DNS Configures DNS services 4 117 Interface Configures the connection parameters for all Ethernet ports 4 125 aggregated links and VLANs Mirror Port Mirrors data to another port for analysis without affecting the data 4 136 passing through or the performance of the monitored port Rate Limiting Controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on a port 4 138 Link Aggregation Statically groups multiple ports into a single logical trunk configures 4 139 Link Aggregation Control Protocol for port trunks Address Table Configures the address table for filtering specified addresses displays 4 149 current entries clears the table or sets the aging time Spanning Tree Configures Spanning Tree settings for the switch 4 153 VLANs Configures VLAN settings and defines port membership for VLAN 4 172 groups also enables or configures private
344. ou must also enter Global Configuration mode prior to enabling some of the other configuration modes including Interface Configuration Line Configuration VLAN Database Configuration and Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration See Understanding Command Modes on page 4 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console configure Console config 4 21 4 Command Line Interface Related Commands end 4 23 show history This command shows the contents of the command history buffer Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The history buffer size is fixed at 10 Execution commands and 10 Configuration commands Example In this example the show history command lists the contents of the command history buffer Console show history Execution command history 2 config 1 show history Configuration command history 4 interface vlan 1 3 exit 2 interface vlan 1 1 end Console The command repeats commands from the Execution command history buffer when you are in Normal Exec or Privileged Exec Mode and commands from the Configuration command history buffer when you are in any of the configuration modes In this example the 2 command repeats the second command in the Execution history buffer config Console 2 Console config Console config reload This command restarts the system Note When the system
345. owing example configures the switch to use Rapid Spanning Tree Console config spanning tree mode rstp Console config spanning tree forward time This command configures the spanning tree bridge forward time globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree forward time seconds no spanning tree forward time seconds Time in seconds Range 4 30 seconds The minimum value is the higher of 4 or max age 2 1 4 155 4 Command Line Interface Default Setting 15 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the maximum time in seconds the root device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to the discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Example Console config spanning tree forward time 20 Console config spanning tree hello time This command configures the spanning tree bridge hello time globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree hello time time no spanning tree hello time time Time in seconds Range 1 10 seconds The maximum value is the lower of 10 or max age 2 1 Default
346. packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 to any destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 i e HTTP Console config ext acl permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any destination port 80 Console config ext acl This permits all TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 with the TCP control code set to SYN Console config ext acl permit tcp 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any control flag 2 2 Console config ext acl 4 91 4 Command Line Interface Related Commands access list ip 4 88 show ip access list This command displays the rules for configured IP ACLs Syntax show ip access list standard extended ac _name standard Specifies a standard IP ACL extended Specifies an extended IP ACL acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip access list standard IP standard access list david permit host 10 1 1 21 permit 168 92 0 0 0 0 15 255 Console Related Commands permit deny 4 89 ip access group 4 97 access list ip mask precedence This command changes to the IP Mask mode used to configure access control masks Use the no form to delete the mask table Syntax no access list ip mask precedence in out in Ingress mask for ingress ACLs out Egress mask for egress ACLs Default Setting Default system mask Filter inbound packets according to specif
347. panning Tree State Enables disables STA on this switch Default Enabled Spanning Tree Type Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D i e when this option is selected the switch will use RSTP set to STP forced compatibility mode RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1w MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1s MSTP is the default e Priority Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Note that lower numeric values indicate higher priority Default 32768 Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 e Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Root Device Configuration e Hello Time Interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message e Default 2 e Minimum 1 e Maximum The lower of 10 or Max Message Age 2 1 e Maximum Age The maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configura
348. pe Use the no form to remove a rule Syntax no permit deny any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid vid vid bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask Note The default is for Ethernet II packets no permit deny tagged eth2 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid vid vid bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask no permit deny untagged eth2 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask no permit deny tagged 802 3 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid vid vid bitmask no permit deny untagged 802 3 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask tagged eth2 Tagged Ethernet II packets untagged eth2 Untagged Ethernet II packets tagged 802 3 Tagged Ethernet 802 3 packets untagged 802 3 Untagged Ethernet 802 3 packets any Any MAC source or destination address host A specific MAC address source Source MAC address 4 102 Access Control List Commands 4 e destination Destination MAC address range with bitmask address bitmask Bitmask for MAC address in hexidecimal format e vid VLA
349. per State Distributing Vv Admin State Collecting V Oper State Collecting V Admin State Oper State v Synchronization Synchronization Admin State Aggregation Oper State Aggregation V Admin State Timeout Long Oper State Timeout 1 Long Admin State LACP Activity Oper State LACP Activity Vv Figure 3 46 LACP Port Neighbors Information 3 79 3 Configuring the Switch CLI The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and operational state for the remote side of port channel 1 Console show lacp 1 neighbors 4 145 Channel group 1 neighbors Partner Admin System ID 32768 00 00 00 00 00 00 Partner Oper System ID 32768 00 00 00 00 00 01 Partner Admin Port Number 1 Partner Oper Port Number 1 Port Admin Priority 32768 Port Oper Priority 32768 Admin Key 0 Oper Key 4 Admin State defaulted distributing collecting synchronization long timeout Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity Console Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds Broadcast storms may occur when a device on your network is malfunctioning or if application programs are not well designed or properly configured If there is too much broadcast traffic on your network performance can be severely degraded or everything can come to complete halt You can protect your network from broadcast storms by setting a threshold for broadcast traff
350. placement for Telnet When the client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol the switch generates a public key that the client uses along with a local user name and password for access authentication SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and SSH enabled management station clients and ensures that data traveling over the network arrives unaltered Note that you need to install an SSH client on the management station to access the switch for management via the SSH protocol Note The switch supports both SSH Version 1 5 and 2 0 Command Usage The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key authentication If password authentication is specified by the SSH client then the password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS remote authentication server as specified on the Authentication Settings page page 3 31 If public key authentication is specified by the client then you must configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the following section Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password authentication you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch SSH Host Key Settings and enable the SSH server Authentication Settings 3 36 User Authentication 3 To use the SSH server complete these steps 1 Generate a Host Key Pair On the SSH Host Key Settings page create a host public private key pai
351. playing version 3 10 4 61 downloading 3 16 4 63 Spanning Tree Protocol See STA specifications software A 1 SSH configuring 3 36 4 37 STA 3 91 4 151 edge port 3 101 3 103 4 163 global settings configuring 3 95 4 152 4 157 global settings displaying 3 92 4 168 interface settings 3 99 3 107 3 108 4 162 4 167 4 168 link type 3 101 3 103 4 165 path cost 3 93 3 100 4 162 path cost method 3 97 4 156 port priority 3 101 4 162 protocol migration 3 103 4 167 transmission limit 3 97 4 157 Index standards IEEE A 2 startup files creating 3 18 4 63 displaying 3 16 4 57 setting 3 16 4 67 static addresses setting 3 88 4 148 statistics port 3 84 4 132 STP 3 95 4 152 STP Also see STA system clock setting 3 26 4 52 system software downloading from server 3 16 4 63 T TACACS logon authentication 4 74 time setting 3 26 4 52 traffic class weights 3 129 4 192 trap manager 2 7 3 29 4 114 troubleshooting B 1 trunk configuration 3 69 4 137 LACP 3 71 4 139 static 3 70 4 138 U upgrading software 3 16 4 63 user password 3 30 4 26 4 27 V VLANs 3 110 3 122 4 170 4 181 adding static members 3 116 3 118 4 177 creating 3 115 4 172 description 3 110 displaying basic information 3 113 4 186 displaying port members 3 114 4 179 egress mode 3 120 4 174 interface configuration 3 119 4 174 4 178 private 3 121 4 180 protocol 3 122 4 181 Index 3 Index Ww We
352. plays the status for an interface Syntax show interfaces status interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 e vlan vian id Range 1 4094 Default Setting Shows the status for all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed For a description of the items displayed by this command see Displaying Connection Status on page 3 64 Example Console show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 Information of Eth 1 5 Basic information Port type 1000T Mac address 00 00 AB CD 00 01 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full Broadcast storm Enabled Broadcast storm limit 500 packets second Flow control Disabled Lacp Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Port security action None Combo forced mode None Current status Link status Up Operation speed duplex 1000full Flow control type None Console show interfaces status vlan 1 Information of VLAN 1 MAC address 00 00 A3 42 00 80 Console 4 133 4 Command Line Interface show interfaces counters This command displays interface statistics Syntax show interfaces counters interface interface e ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channe
353. ply with the IEEE 802 1p standard Group Attribute Registration Protocol GARP See Generic Attribute Registration Protocol IEEE 802 1D Specifies a general method for the operation of MAC bridges including the Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 10 VLAN Tagging Defines Ethernet frame tags which carry VLAN information It allows switches to assign endstations to different virtual LANs and defines a standard way for VLANs to communicate across switched networks IEEE 802 1p An IEEE standard for providing quality of service QoS in Ethernet networks The standard uses packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches to transmit packets based on the tagged priority value IEEE 802 1s An IEEE standard for the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP which provides independent spanning trees for VLAN groups IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first enter a user ID and password for authentication IEEE 802 3ac Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging Glossary 2 Glossary IEEE 802 3x Defines Ethernet frame start stop requests and timers used for flow control on full duplex links IGMP Snooping Listening to IGMP Query and IGMP Report packets transferred between IP Multicast Routers and IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast group members IGMP Query On each subnetwork one IGMP capable device will act as the querier that
354. port 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 125 Console config if no switchport broadcast 4 131 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if switchport broadcast packet rate 600 4 131 Console config if end Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 2 4 135 Information of Eth 1 2 Broadcast threshold Enabled 600 packets second Lacp status Disabled Ingress rate limit disable 1000M bits per second Egress rate limit disable 1000M bits per second VLAN membership mode Hybrid Ingress rule Disabled Acceptable frame type All frames Native VLAN 1 Priority for untagged traffic 0 Gvrp status Disabled Allowed Vlan 1 u Forbidden Vlan Console 3 81 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring Port Mirroring You can mirror traffic from any source port to a target port for real time analysis You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the AHAH target port and study the traffic crossing the Source Single source port in a completely unobtrusive manner port s target port Command Usage Monitor port speed should match or exceed source port speed otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port All mirror sessions have to share the same destination port e When mirroring port traffic the target port must be included in the same VLAN as the source port Command Attributes e Mirror Sessions
355. ports Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS compliant devices on the network Remote Monitoring RMON RMON provides comprehensive network monitoring capabilities It eliminates the polling required in standard SNMP and can set alarms on a variety of traffic conditions including specific error types Glossary 4 Glossary Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP RSTP reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10 of that required by the older IEEE 802 1D STP standard Secure Shell SSH A secure replacement for remote access functions including Telnet SSH can authenticate users with a cryptographic key and encrypt data connections between management clients and the switch Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP A standard host to host mail transport protocol that operates over TCP port 25 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network management services Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a Network Time Protocol NTP server Updates can be requested from a specific NTP server or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP servers Spanning Tree Protocol STP A technology that checks your network for any loops
356. pport HTTPS Table 4 13 HTTPS System Support Web Browser Operating System Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Netscape Navigator 4 76 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Solaris 2 6 To specify a secure site certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 35 Also refer to the copy command on page 4 63 4 31 4 Command Line Interface Example Console config ip http secure server Console config Related Commands ip http secure port 4 32 copy tftp https certificate 4 63 ip http secure port This command specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS SSL connection to the switch s Web interface Use the no form to restore the default port Syntax ip http secure port port_number no ip http secure port port_number The UDP port used for HTTPS SSL Range 1 65535 Default Setting 443 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same port e If you change the HTTPS port number clients attempting to connect to the HTTPS server must specify the port number in the URL in this format https device port_number Example Console config ip http secure port 1000 Console config Related Commands ip http secure server 4 31 4 32 System Management Commands
357. pports If the snmp server host command does not specify the SNMP version the default is to send SNMP version 1 notifications Example Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 23 batman Console config 4 114 SNMP Commands 4 Related Commands snmp server enable traps 4 115 snmp server enable traps This command enables this device to send Simple Network Management Protocol traps SNMP notifications Use the no form to disable SNMP notifications Syntax no snmp server enable traps authentication link up down e authentication Keyword to issue authentication failure traps link up down Keyword to issue link up or link down traps Default Setting Issue authentication and link up down traps Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If you do not enter an snmp server enable traps command no notifications controlled by this command are sent In order to configure this device to send SNMP notifications you must enter at least one snmp server enable traps command If you enter the command with no keywords both authentication and link up down notifications are enabled If you enter the command with a keyword only the notification type related to that keyword is enabled The snmp server enable traps command is used in conjunction with the snmp server host command Use the snmp server host command to specify which host or hosts receive SNMP notifications In order to send notifications
358. properly configured on the management station Be sure you have generated a public key on the switch and exported this key to the SSH client Be sure you have set up an account on the switch for each SSH user including user name authentication level and password e Be sure you have imported the client s public key to the switch if public key authentication is used Be sure you have set the terminal emulator program to VT100 compatible 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity and the baud rate set to any of the following 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps Check that the null modem serial cable conforms to the pin out connections provided in the Installation Guide Contact your local distributor B Troubleshooting Using System Logs If a fault does occur refer to the Installation Guide to ensure that the problem you encountered is actually caused by the switch If the problem appears to be caused by the switch follow these steps Enable logging Set the error messages reported to include all categories Designate the SNMP host that is to receive the error messages Repeat the sequence of commands or other actions that lead up to the error ak WON gt Make a list of the commands or circumstances that led to the fault Also make a list of any error messages displayed 6 Contact your distributor s service engineer For example Console config logging on Console config logging history flash 7
359. query max response time 4 210 ip igmp snooping query interval This command configures the query interval Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query interval seconds no ip igmp snooping query interval seconds The frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host query messages Range 60 125 Default Setting 125 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following shows how to configure the query interval to 100 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping query interval 100 Console config 4 209 4 Command Line Interface ip igmp snooping query max response time This command configures the query report delay Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query max response time seconds no ip igmp snooping query max response time seconds The report delay advertised in IGMP queries Range 5 25 Default Setting 10 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The switch must be using IGMPv2 for this command to take effect This command defines the time after a query during which a response is expected from a multicast client If a querier has sent a number of queries defined by the ip igmp snooping query count but a client has not responded a countdown timer is started using an initial value set by this command If the countdown finishes and the client still has not responded then that client is considered to have left the mu
360. r 2 Provide Host Public Key to Clients Many SSH client programs automatically import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch Otherwise you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management station and place the host public key in it An entry for a public key in the known hosts file would appear similar to the following example 10 1 0 54 1024 35 156849954018676692593339467 7505461 7325313674890836547254 15020245593 199868544358361651999923329781 766065830956 10825913212890233 76546801 72627257 141342876294 1301196195566782 595664 10486957427888146206 5194174677298486546861571773939016477935594230357 74 13098022737087794545 2408397 17526463580581 767 16709574804776117 3 Import Client s Public Key to the Switch Use the copy tftp public key command page 4 63 to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH client s granted management access to the switch Note that these clients must be configured locally on the switch via the User Accounts page as described on page 3 30 The clients are subsequently authenticated using these keys The current firmware only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the following example for an RSA Version 1 key 1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880 0555361616310517759408386863 1109291232226828519254374603100937187721199 69631781366277414168985132049117204830339254324 10163799759237 14490
361. r RSTP MSTP GC 4 159 transmission limit spanning tree Changes to MSTP configuration mode GC 4 159 mst configuration mst vlan Adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance MST 4 160 name Configures the name for the multiple spanning tree MST 4 161 revision en the revision number for the multiple spanning MST 4 162 ree max hops Configures the maximum number of hops allowed in the MST 4 163 region before a BPDU is discarded spanning tree Disables spanning tree for an interface IC 4 163 spanning disabled spanning tree cost Configures the spanning tree path cost of an interface IC 4 164 spanning tree port priority Configures the spanning tree priority of an interface IC 4 164 spanning tree edge port Enables fast forwarding for edge ports IC 4 165 spanning tree portfast Sets an interface to fast forwarding IC 4 166 spanning tree link type Configures the link type for RSTP MSTP IC 4 167 spanning tree mst cost Configures the path cost of an instance in the MST IC 4 167 spanning tree mst Configures the priority of an instance in the MST IC 4 168 port priority spanning tree Re checks the appropriate BPDU format PE 4 170 protocol migration show spanning tree Shows spanning tree configuration for the common PE 4 170 spanning tree i e overall bridge a selected interface or an instance within the multiple spanning tree show spanning tree mst Shows the multiple spanning tree configuration PE 4 172 configuration 4 153 4 Co
362. r server must support this feature Also when the connection is operating at full duplex all switches in the network between the two end nodes must be able to accept the extended frame size And for half duplex connections all devices in the collision domain would need to support jumbo frames Enabling jumbo frames will limit the maximum threshold for broadcast storm control to 64 packets per second See the switchport broadcast command on page 4 131 Example Flash File Commands 4 Console config jumbo frame Console config Flash File Commands These commands are used to manage the system code or configuration files Table 4 24 Flash File Commands Command Function Mode Page copy Copies a code image or a switch configuration to or from flash PE 4 63 memory or a TFTP server delete Deletes a file or code image PE 4 65 dir Displays a list of files in flash memory PE 4 66 whichboot Displays the files booted PE 4 67 boot system Specifies the file or image used to start up the system GC 4 67 copy This command moves upload download a code image or configuration file between the switch s flash memory and a TFTP server When you save the system code or configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore system operation The success of the file transfer depends on the accessibility of the TFTP server and the qua
363. r the console port and Telnet Example Console show running config building running config please wait phymap 00 00 a3 42 00 80 sntp server 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 snmp server community private rw snmp server community public ro username admin access level 15 username admin password 7 21232 297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3 username guest access level 0 username guest password 7 084e0343a0486ff 05530df6c705c8bb4 enable password level 15 7 1b3231655cebb7al1 783eddf 27d254ca logging sendmail destination email ted logging sendmail source email bill vlan database vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active spanning tree mst configuration interface ethernet 1 1 switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged switchport native vlan 1 interface vlan 1 ip address 10 1 0 1 255 255 255 0 no spanning tree no ip igmp snooping no map ip precedence no map ip dscp line console line vty end Console 4 59 4 Command Line Interface Related Commands show startup config 4 57 show system This command displays system information Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage e For a description of the items shown by this command refer to Displaying System Information on page 3 9 The POST results should all display PASS If any POST test indicates FAIL contact your distributor for assistance
364. raffic based on the RMON MIB Interfaces and Ethernet like statistics display errors on the traffic passing through each port This information can be used to identify potential problems with the switch such as a faulty port or unusually heavy loading RMON statistics provide access to a broad range of statistics including a total count of different frame types and sizes passing through each port All values displayed have been accumulated since the last system reboot and are shown as counts per second Statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds by default Note RMON groups 2 3 and 9 can only be accessed using SNMP management software such as HP OpenView Table 3 9 Port Statistics Parameter Description Interface Statistics Received Octets The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters Rece ived Unicast Packets The number of subnetwork unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol Rece ived Multicast Packets The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer Rece ived Broadcast Packets The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer Rece ived Discarded Packets The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been de
365. ram 0 Console config 4 44 System Management Commands 4 logging host This command adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging messages Use the no form to remove a syslog server host Syntax no logging host host_ip_address host_ip_address The IP address of a syslog server Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e By using this command more than once you can build up a list of host IP addresses The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five Example Console config logging host 10 1 0 3 Console config logging facility This command sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages Use the no form to return the type to the default Syntax no logging facility type type A number that indicates the facility used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service Range 16 23 Default Setting 23 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages See RFC 3164 This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch However it may be used by the syslog server to sort messages or to store messages in the corresponding database Example Console config logging facility 19 Console config 4 45 4 Command Line Interface logging trap This command enables the logging of system messa
366. ration Command Usage The databits command can be used to mask the high bit on input from devices that generate 7 data bits with parity If parity is being generated specify 7 data bits per character If no parity is required specify 8 data bits per character Example To specify 7 data bits enter this command Console config line databits 7 Console config line Related Commands parity 4 17 4 16 Line Commands 4 parity This command defines the generation of a parity bit Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax parity none even odd no parity none No parity even Even parity odd Odd parity Default Setting No parity Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage Communication protocols provided by devices such as terminals and modems often require a specific parity bit setting Example To specify no parity enter this command Console config line parity none Console config line speed This command sets the terminal line s baud rate This command sets both the transmit to terminal and receive from terminal speeds Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax speed bps no speed bps Baud rate in bits per second Options 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps or auto Default Setting auto Command Mode Line Configuration 4 17 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connecte
367. rd rules applied to tagged frames Ifthe frame is untagged and the protocol type matches the frame is forwarded to the appropriate VLAN Ifthe frame is untagged but the protocol type does not match the frame is forwarded to the default VLAN for this interface Example The following example maps the traffic entering Port 1 which matches the protocol type specified in protocol group 1 to VLAN 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if protocol vlan protocol group 1 vlan 2 Console config if show protocol vian protocol group This command shows the frame and protocol type associated with protocol groups Syntax show protocol vlan protocol group group id group id Group identifier for a protocol group Range 1 2147483647 Default Setting All protocol groups are displayed Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This shows protocol group 1 configured for IP over Ethernet Console show protocol vlan protocol group ProtocolGroup ID Frame Type Protocol Type Console 4 185 4 Command Line Interface show interfaces protocol vian protocol group This command shows the mapping from protocol groups to VLANs for the selected interfaces Syntax show interfaces protocol vlan protocol group interface interface e ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 Default Setting The mapping for all interfaces
368. rdinated Universal Time UTC formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT based on the earth s prime meridian zero degrees longitude To display a time corresponding to your local time you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east before or west after of UTC Example Console config clock timezone Japan hours 8 minute 0 after UTC Console config Related Commands show sntp 4 54 calendar set This command sets the system clock Syntax calendar set hour min sec day month year month day year hour Hour in 24 hour format Range 0 23 min Minute Range 0 59 sec Second Range 0 59 day Day of month Range 1 31 month january february march april may june july august september october november december e year Year 4 digit Range 2001 2101 4 55 4 Command Line Interface Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows how to set the system clock to 15 12 34 February 1st 2004 Console calendar set 15 12 34 1 February 2004 Console show calendar This command displays the system clock Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show calendar 15 12 34 February 1 2004 Console 4 56 System Management Commands 4 System Status Commands Table 4 22 System Status Commands Command Function Mode Page
369. rdware Version Internal Power Status Active Management Software Loader Version 2 1 03 Boot ROM Version 2 0 2 11 Operation Code Version 1 4 0 0 Role Master Figure 3 4 Switch Information CLI Use the following command to display version information Console show version 4 61 Unitl Serial number Hardware version Number of ports 24 Main power status up Redundant power status not present Agent master Unit id Loader version Boot rom version Operation code version Console RPNNEF BOR ono OorRW H 3 11 3 Configuring the Switch Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities The Bridge MIB includes extensions for managed devices that support Multicast Filtering Traffic Classes and Virtual LANs You can access these extensions to display default settings for the key variables Field Attributes Extended Multicast Filtering Services This switch does not support the filtering of individual multicast addresses based on GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol Traffic Classes This switch provides mapping of user priorities to multiple traffic classes Refer to Class of Service Configuration on page 3 125 Static Entry Individual Port This switch allows static filtering for unicast and multicast addresses Refer to Setting Static Addresses on page 3 88 VLAN Learning This switch uses Independent VLAN Learning IVL where each port maintain
370. re information and resources as though located on the same LAN XModem A protocol used to transfer files between devices Data is grouped in 128 byte blocks and error corrected Glossary 6 Index Symbols 3 31 Numerics 802 1x port authentication 3 43 4 78 A acceptable frame type 3 119 4 174 Access Control List See ACL ACL Extended IP 3 53 4 86 4 87 4 90 MAC 3 53 4 86 4 101 4 101 4 103 Standard IP 3 53 4 86 4 87 4 89 address table 3 88 4 147 aging time 3 91 4 150 B BOOTP 3 15 4 211 BPDU 3 92 broadcast storm threshold 3 80 4 129 Cc Class of Service See CoS CLI showing commands 4 4 command line interface See CLI community string 2 6 3 28 4 112 configuration settings saving or restoring 2 7 3 17 4 63 console port required connections 2 2 CoS configuring 3 125 4 189 DSCP 3 133 3 136 3 137 4 198 IP precedence 3 132 4 195 4 196 layer 3 4 priorities 3 131 4 195 queue mapping 3 127 4 192 queue mode _ 3 129 4 190 traffic class weights 3 129 4 192 D default gateway configuration 3 13 4 213 default priority ingress port 3 125 4 191 default settings system 1 5 DHCP 3 15 4 211 client 3 13 4 117 dynamic configuration 2 5 Differentiated Code Point Service See DSCP DNS default domain name 3 146 displaying the cache 3 150 domain name list 3 146 enabling lookup 3 146 name server list 3 146 static entries 3 148 Domain Name Service 3 146 downloading software
371. re Domain Naming System DNS services You can manually configure entries in the DNS domain name to IP address mapping table configure default domain names or specify one or more name servers to use for domain name to address translation Note that domain name services will not be enabled until at least one name server is specified with the ip name server command and domain lookup is enabled with the ip domain lookup command Table 4 39 DNS Commands Command Function Mode Page ip host Creates a static host name to address mapping GC 4 117 clear host Deletes entries from the host name to address table PE 4 118 ip domain name Defines a default domain name for incomplete host names GC 4 118 ip domain list Defines a list of default domain names for incomplete host names GC 4 119 ip name server Specifies the address of one or more name servers to use for host GC 4 120 name to address translation ip domain lookup Enables DNS based host name to address translation GC 4 121 show hosts Displays the static host name to address mapping table PE 4 122 show dns Displays the configuration for DNS services PE 4 123 show dns cache Displays entries in the DNS cache PE 4 123 clear dns cache Clears all entries from the DNS cache PE 4 124 ip host This command creates a static entry in the DNS table that maps a host name to an IP address Use the no form to remove an entry Syntax no ip host name add
372. receive machine is using defaulted operational partner information administratively configured for the partner Distributing If false distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled i e distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Collecting Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled i e collection is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Synchronization The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC i e it has been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator and the identity of the Link Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted Aggregation The system considers this link to be aggregatable i e a potential candidate for aggregation Long timeout Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate LACP Activity Activity control value with regard to this link 0 Passive 1 Active 3 77 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Port LACP Port Internal Information Select a port channel to display the corresponding information LACP Port Internal Information Member Port 1 x Trunk ID 2 Admin Key 120 Oper Key LACPDUS Interv
373. recently received EAPOL frame Rx Last EAPOLSrc The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame Tx EAPOL Total The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Tx EAP Req Id The number of EAP Req Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Tx EAP Req Oth The number of EAP Request frames other than Rq Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Web Select Security 802 1x Statistics Select the required port and then click Query Click Refresh to update the statistics 802 1X Statistics Pona Query Rx EXPOL Start O Rx EAP LenError 0 Rx EAPOL Logoff O Rx Last EAPOLVer 0 Rx EAPOL Invalid O Rx Last EAPOLSrc 00 00 00 00 00 00 Rx EAPOL Total O Tx EAPOL Total 1 Rx EAP Resp ld O Tx EAP Req ld 0 Rx EAP Resp Oth O Tx EAP Reg Oth 0 Refresh Figure 3 29 802 1x Port Statistics 3 49 3 Configuring the Switch CLI This example displays the 802 1x statistics for port 4 Console show dot1x statistics interface ethernet 1 4 4 83 Eth 1 4 Rx EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAP EAP EAP Start Logoff Invalid Total Resp Id Resp Oth LenError 2 0 0 1007 672 0 0 Last Last EAPOLVer EAPOLSrc 1 00 00 E8 98 73 21 Tx EAPOL EAP EAP Total Req Id Req Oth 2017 1005 0 Console Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access You can create a list of up to 16 IP addresses or IP address groups that ar
374. ree VLAN Database You must be in Privileged Exec mode to access the Global configuration mode You must be in Global Configuration mode to access any of the other configuration modes Exec Commands When you open a new console session on the switch with the user name and password guest the system enters the Normal Exec command mode or guest mode displaying the Console gt command prompt Only a limited number of the commands are available in this mode You can access all commands only from the Privileged Exec command mode or administrator mode To access Privilege Exec mode open a new console session with the user name and password admin The system will now display the Console command prompt You can also enter Privileged Exec mode from within Normal Exec mode by entering the enable command followed by the privileged level password super page 4 27 To enter Privileged Exec mode enter the following user names and passwords Username admin Password admin login password CLI session with the 44 10 100 1000 ports 4 Gigabit Combo ports L2 L4 managed standalone switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console Entering Commands 4 Username guest Password guest login password CLI session with the 44 10 100 1000 ports 4 Gigabit Combo ports L2 L4 managed standalone switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console enable Passw
375. ress1 address2 address8 name Name of the host Range 1 64 characters address1 Corresponding IP address e address2 address8 Additional corresponding IP addresses Default Setting No static entries Command Mode Global Configuration 4 117 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage Servers or other network devices may support one or more connections via multiple IP addresses If more than one IP address is associated with a host name using this command a DNS client can try each address in succession until it establishes a connection with the target device Example This example maps two address to a host name Console config ip host rd5 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 Console config end Console show hosts Hostname rd5 Inet address 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 Alias Console clear host This command deletes entries from the DNS table Syntax clear host name name Name of the host Range 1 64 characters e Removes all entries Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example clears all static entries from the DNS table Console clear host Console ip domain name This command defines the default domain name appended to incomplete host names i e host names passed from a client that are not formatted with dotted notation Use the no form to remove the current domain name Syntax ip domain name name no ip domain name name
376. rface Commands 4 show interfaces switchport This command displays the administrative and operational status of the specified interfaces Syntax show interfaces switchport interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 Default Setting Shows all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed Example This example shows the configuration setting for port 24 Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 24 Information of Eth 1 24 Broadcast threshold Enabled 500 packets second Lacp status Disabled Ingress rate limit disable 1000M bits per second Egress rate limit disable 1000M bits per second VLAN membership mode Hybrid Ingress rule Disabled Acceptable frame type All frames Native VLAN 1 Priority for untagged traffic 0 Gvrp status Disabled Allowed Vlan 1 u Forbidden Vlan Console Table 4 42 interfaces switchport display description Field Description Broadcast threshold Shows if broadcast storm suppression is enabled or disabled if enabled it also shows the threshold level page 4 131 Lacp status Shows if Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled or disabled page 4 141 Ingress Egress rate limit Shows if rate limiting is enabled and the current rate limit page 4 138 VLAN
377. ridge Extension Configuration IP Interface Configuration Manual IP Interface Configuration DHCP Downloading Firmware to the Switch Setting the Startup Code Downloading Configuration Settings Setting the Startup Configuration Settings System Logs Remote Logs Displaying Logs Enabling and Configuring SMTP Alerts Resetting the System Configuring SNTP Clock Time Zone Configuring SNMP Community Strings Configuring SNMP Trap Managers Authentication Server Settings HTTPS Settings SSH Host Key Settings SSH Server Settings Port Security 802 1x Information 802 1X Configuration 802 1x Port Configuration 802 1x Port Statistics IP Filter Selecting ACL Type ACL Configuration Standard IP ACL Configuration Extended IP ACL Configuration MAC Selecting ACL Mask Types ACL Mask Configuration IP ACL Mask Configuration MAC ACL Port Binding Port Port Information Port Port Configuration Static Trunk Configuration LACP Trunk Configuration 3 3 3 9 3 11 3 12 3 14 3 15 3 16 3 17 3 18 3 18 3 20 3 21 3 22 3 24 3 25 3 26 3 27 3 29 3 30 3 33 3 35 3 39 3 40 3 42 3 45 3 47 3 48 3 49 3 51 3 53 3 54 3 56 3 58 3 59 3 61 3 62 3 64 3 65 3 68 3 70 3 72 XV Figures Figure 3 43 Figure 3 44 Figure 3 45 Figure 3 46 Figure 3 47 Figure 3 48 Figure 3 49 Figure 3 50 Figure 3 51 Figure 3 52 Figure 3 53 Figure 3 54 Figure 3 55 Figure 3 56 Figure 3 57 Figure 3 58 Figur
378. rized Reauth Count Number of times connecting state is re entered Backend State Machine State Current state including request response success fail timeout idle initialize Request Count Number of EAP Request packets sent to the Supplicant without receiving a response Identifier Server Identifier carried in the most recent EAP Success Failure or Request packet received from the Authentication Server Reauthentication State Machine State Current state including initialize reauthenticate Authentication Commands Example Console show dot1x Global 802 1X Parameters reauth enabled yes reauth period 3600 quiet period 60 tx period 30 supp timeout 30 server timeout 30 reauth max 2 max req 2 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized 1 1 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 1 2 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 1 47 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 1 48 enabled Single Host Auto yes 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is disabled on port 1 1 802 1X is disabled on port 1 2 802 1X is disabled on port 1 47 802 1X is enabled on port 1 48 Status Authorized Operation mode Single Host Max count 5 Port control Auto Supplicant 00 00 e8 49 5e dc Current Identifier 3 Authenticator State Machine State Authenticated Reauth Count 0 Backend State Machine State Idle Request Count 0 Identifier Server 2 Reauthenticat
379. rk traffic or to implement security controls by restricting access to specific network resources or protocols Port Configuration You can manually configure the speed duplex mode and flow control used on specific ports or use auto negotiation to detect the connection settings used by the attached device Use the full duplex mode on ports whenever possible to double the throughput of switch connections Flow control should also be enabled to control network traffic during periods of congestion and prevent the loss of packets when port buffer thresholds are exceeded The switch supports flow control based on the IEEE 802 3x standard Rate Limiting This feature controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the network Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Description of Software Features 1 Port Mirroring The switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity Port Trunking Ports can be combined into an aggregate connection Trunks can be manually set up or dynamically configured using IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP The additional ports dramat
380. rmined by manual configuration or by auto detection as described for Admin Link Type in STA Port Configuration on page 3 102 Oper Edge Port This parameter is initialized to the setting for Admin Edge Port in STA Port Configuration on page 3 102 i e true or false but will be set to false if a BPDU is received indicating that another bridge is attached to this port Port Role Roles are assigned according to whether the port is part of the active topology connecting the bridge to the root bridge i e root port connecting a LAN through the bridge to the root bridge i e designated port or is the MSTI regional root i e master port or is an alternate or backup port that may provide connectivity if other bridges bridge ports or LANs fail or are removed The role is set to disabled i e disabled port if a port has no role within the spanning tree Alternate port receives more R Root Port useful BPDUs from another N A Alternate Port bridge and is therefore not D Designated Port selected as the designated B Backup Port R port R A J D B XN Backup port receives more useful BPDUs from the same bridge and is therefore not selected as the designated ort R a R P aa 1 X a Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Information only These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI e A
381. roblems The switch includes an onboard SNMP agent that continuously monitors the status of its hardware as well as the traffic passing through its ports A network management station can access this information using software such as HP OpenView Access rights to the onboard agent are controlled by community strings To communicate with the switch the management station must first submit a valid community string for authentication The options for configuring community strings trap functions and restricting access to clients with specified IP addresses are described in the following sections Setting Community Access Strings You may configure up to five community strings authorized for management access All community strings used for IP Trap Managers should be listed in this table For security reasons you should consider removing the default strings Command Attributes SNMP Community Capability Indicates that the switch supports up to five community strings Community String A community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol Default strings public read only access private read write access Range 1 32 characters case sensitive e Access Mode Read Only Specifies read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects Read Write Specifies read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify M
382. rom a recognized certification authority 3 35 3 Configuring the Switch Caution For maximum security we recommend you obtain a unique Secure Sockets Layer certificate at the earliest opportunity This is because the default certificate for the switch is not unique to the hardware you have purchased When you have obtained these place them on your TFTP server and use the following command at the switch s command line interface to replace the default unrecognized certificate with an authorized one Console copy tftp https certificate 4 63 TFTP server ip address lt server ip address gt Source certificate file name lt certificate file name gt Source private file name lt private key file name gt Private password lt password for private key gt Note The switch must be reset for the new certificate to be activated To reset the switch type console reload Configuring the Secure Shell The Berkley standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix systems Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows and other environments These tools including commands such as rlogin remote login rsh remote shell and rcp remote copy are not secure from hostile attacks The Secure Shell SSH includes server client applications intended as a secure replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools SSH can also provide remote management access to this switch as a secure re
383. roups PE 4 185 protocol group show interfaces Shows the interfaces mapped to a protocol group and the PE 4 186 protocol vlan protocol group corresponding VLAN To configure protocol based VLANSs follow these steps 1 First configure VLAN groups for the protocols you want to use page 4 174 Although not mandatory we suggest configuring a separate VLAN for each major protocol running on your network Do not add port members at this time 2 Create a protocol group for each protocol you want to assign to a VLAN using the protocol vlan protocol group command General Configuration mode 3 Then map the protocol for each interface to the appropriate VLAN using the protocol vian protocol group command Interface Configuration mode 4 183 4 Command Line Interface protocol vlan protocol group Configuring Groups This command creates a protocol group or to add specific protocols to a group Use the no form to remove a protocol group Syntax protocol vian protocol group group id add remove frame_type frame protocol type protocol no protocol vian protocol group group id group id Group identifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 frame Frame type used by this protocol Options ethernet rfc_1042 llc_other protocol Protocol type The only option for the Ilc_other frame type is ipx_raw The options for all other frames types include ip arp rarp Default Setting No pro
384. rsa RSA key type Default Setting Clears both the DSA and RSA key 4 39 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command clears the host key from volatile memory RAM Use the no ip ssh save host key command to clear the host key from flash memory The SSH server must be disabled before you can execute this command Example Console ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa Console Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 39 ip ssh save host key 4 40 no ip ssh server 4 36 ip ssh save host key Use this command to save host key from RAM to flash memory Syntax ip ssh save host key Default Setting Saves both the DSA and RSA key Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console ip ssh save host key Console Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 39 show ip ssh Use this command to display the connection settings used when authenticating client access to the SSH server Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 40 System Management Commands 4 Example Console show ip ssh SSH Enabled version 1 99 Negotiation timeout 120 secs Authentication retries 3 Server key size 768 bits Console show ssh Use this command to display the current SSH server connections Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ssh Connection Version State Username Encryption 0 2 0 Session Started
385. rt bitmask no permit deny tcp any source address bitmask host source any destination address bitmask host destination precedence precedence tos tos dscp dscp source port sport bitmask destination port dport port bitmask control flag control flags flag bitmask protocol number A specific protocol number Range 0 255 source Source IP address destination Destination IP address address bitmask Decimal number representing the address bits to match host Keyword followed by a specific IP address precedence IP precedence level Range 0 7 tos Type of Service level Range 0 15 dscp DSCP priority level Range 0 63 sport Protocol source port number Range 0 65535 dport Protocol destination port number Range 0 65535 port bitmask Decimal number representing the port bits to match Range 0 65535 control flags Decimal number representing a bit string that specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header Range 0 63 flag bitmask Decimal number representing the code bits to match Range 0 63 Includes TCP UDP or other protocol types Default Setting None Command Mode 4 90 Extended ACL Access Control List Commands 4 Command Usage All new rules are appended to the end of the list Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period Th
386. rt to an Access Control List After configuring the Access Control Lists ACL you can bind the ports that need to filter traffic to the appropriate ACLs You can only bind a port to one ACL for each basic type IP ingress IP egress MAC ingress and MAC egress Command Usage e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port e This switch supports ACLs for both ingress and egress filtering However you can only bind one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for ingress filtering and one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for egress filtering In other words only four ACLs can be bound to an interface Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL and Egress MAC ACL e When an ACL is bound to an interface as an egress filter all entries in the ACL must be deny rules Otherwise the bind operation will fail The switch does not support the explicit deny any any rule for the egress IP ACL or the egress MAC ACLs If these rules are included in ACL and you attempt to bind the ACL to an interface for egress checking the bind operation will fail Command Attributes Port Fixed port or SFP module Range 1 24 1 48 IP Specifies the IP ACL to bind to a port e MAC Specifies the MAC ACL to bind to a port e IN ACL for ingress packets e OUT ACL for egress packets ACL Name Name of the ACL 3 63 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Security ACL Port Binding Mar
387. rts should receive configuration messages at regular intervals If the root port ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section means interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Root Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds this device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting 3 93 3 Configuring the Switch information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result e Root Hold Time The interval in seconds during which no more than two bridge configuration protocol data units shall be transmitted by this node e Max hops The max number of hop counts for the MST region e Remaining hops The remaining number of hop counts for the MST instance Transmission limit The minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive RSTP MSTP BPDUs e Path Cost Method The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned to each interface Web Click Spanning Tree STA Information STA Infor
388. rval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses e Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses The rules defining port status are A port on a network segment with no other STA compliant bridging device is always forwarding If two ports of a switch are connected to the same segment and there is no other STA device attached to this segment the port with the smaller ID forwards packets and the other is discarding All ports are discarding when the switch is booted then some of them change state to learning and then to forwarding Forward Transitions The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding state Designated Cost The cost for a packet to travel from this port to the root in the current Spanning Tree configuration The slower the media the higher the cost Designated Bridge The bridge priority and MAC address of the device through which this port must communicate to reach the root of the Spanning Tree Designated Port The port priority and number of the port on the designated bridging device through which this switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree 3 99 3 Configuring the Switch Oper Link Type The operational point to point status of the LAN segment attached to this interface This parameter is dete
389. s Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax queue mode strict wrr no queue mode strict Services the egress queues in sequential order transmitting all traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues e wrr Weighted Round Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using scheduling weights 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 for queues 0 7 respectively Default Setting Weighted Round Robin Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are serviced or use Weighted Round Robin WRR queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue This prevents the head of line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing Example The following example sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode Console config queue mode strict Console config 4 192 Priority Commands 4 switchport priority default This command sets a priority for incoming untagged frames Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax switchport priority default default priority id no switchport priority default default priority id The prior
390. s 2000 Windows XP Solaris 2 6 To specify a secure site certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 3 35 Command Attributes e HTTPS Status Allows you to enable disable the HTTPS server feature on the switch Default Enabled Change HTTPS Port Number Specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS SSL connection to the switch s web interface Default Port 443 Web Click Security HTTPS Settings Enable HTTPS and specify the port number then click Apply HTTPS Settings HTTPS Status Enabled gt Change HTTPS Port Number 1 65535 441 Figure 3 22 HTTPS Settings CLI This example enables the HTTP secure server and modifies the port number Console config ip http secure server 4 31 Console config ip http secure port 441 4 32 Console config Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate When you log onto the web interface using HTTPS for secure access a Secure Sockets Layer SSL certificate appears for the switch By default the certificate that Netscape and Internet Explorer display will be associated with a warning that the site is not recognized as a secure site This is because the certificate has not been signed by an approved certification authority If you want this warning to be replaced by a message confirming that the connection to the switch is secure you must obtain a unique certificate and a private key and password f
391. s Control List Commands 4 3 User defined rules in the Ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports 4 User defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports 5 Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports 6 Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports 7 If no explicit rule is matched the implicit default is permit all Masks for Access Control Lists You must specify masks that control the order in which ACL rules are checked The switch includes two system default masks that pass filter packets matching the permit deny the rules specified in an ingress ACL You can also configure up to seven user defined masks for an ACL A mask must be bound exclusively to one of the basic ACL types i e Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL or Egress MAC ACL but a mask can be bound to up to four ACLs of the same type Table 4 32 Access Control List Commands Command Groups Function Page IP ACLs Configures ACLs based on IP addresses TCP UDP port number 4 87 protocol type and TCP control code MACACLs Configures ACLs based on hardware addresses packet format and 4 104 Ethernet type ACL Information Displays ACLs and associated rules shows ACLs assigned to each port 4 111 IP ACLs Table 4 33 IP ACL Commands Command Function Mode Page access list ip Creates an IP ACL and enters configuration mode GC 4 88 permit deny Filters packets m
392. s its own filtering database Configurable PVID Tagging This switch allows you to override the default Port VLAN ID PVID used in frame tags and egress status VLAN Tagged or Untagged on each port Refer to VLAN Configuration on page 3 110 Local VLAN Capable This switch does not support multiple local bridges outside of the scope of 802 1Q defined VLANs GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP allows network devices to register endstations with multicast groups This switch does not support GMRP it uses the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP to provide automatic multicast filtering Web Click System Bridge Extension Bridge Extension Configuration Bridge Capability Extended Multicast Filtering Services No Traffic Classes Enabled Static Entry Individual Port Yes VLAN Learning ML Configurable P VID Tagging Yes Local VLAN Capable No GMRP I Enable Figure 3 5 Displaying Bridge Extension Configuration 3 12 Basic Configuration 3 CLI Enter the following command Console show bridge ext 4 188 Max support vlan numbers 255 Max support vlan ID 4094 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning IVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic classes Enabled Global GVRP status Disabled GMRP Disabled Console Setting the Switch s IP Address This section describes how to configure an
393. sable it Syntax no ip igmp snooping querier Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If enabled the switch will serve as querier if elected The querier is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic Example Console config ip igmp snooping querier Console config ip igmp snooping query count This command configures the query count Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query count count no ip igmp snooping query count count The maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the multicast group Range 2 10 4 208 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 Default Setting 2 times Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The query count defines how long the querier waits for a response from a multicast client before taking action If a querier has sent a number of queries defined by this command but a client has not responded a countdown timer is started using the time defined by ip igmp snooping query max response time If the countdown finishes and the client still has not responded then that client is considered to have left the multicast group Example The following shows how to configure the query count to 10 Console config ip igmp snooping query count 10 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping
394. serted when attempting to transmit a frame SQE Test Errors A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the PLS sublayer for a particular interface Frames Too Long A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size Deferred Transmissions A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium was busy Internal MAC Receive Errors A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error RMON Statistics Drop Events The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of resources Jabbers The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error Received Bytes Total number of bytes of data received on the network This statistic can be used as a reasonable indication of Ethernet utilization Collisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment 3 85 3 Configuring the Switch Table 3 9 Port Statistics Parameter Description Received Frames The total number of frames bad broadcast and multicast received Broadcast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to the broadcast addre
395. server green Server port number 200 4 69 4 74 4 74 4 75 Configuring HTTPS You can configure the switch to enable the Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTPS over the Secure Socket Layer SSL providing secure access i e an encrypted connection to the switch s web interface Command Usage Both the HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch However you cannot configure both services to use the same UDP port e If you enable HTTPS you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your browser https device port_number When you start HTTPS the connection is established in this way The client authenticates the server using the server s digital certificate The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data e The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5 x or above and Netscape Navigator 4 x or above 3 34 User Authentication 3 The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS Table 3 4 HTTPS System Support Web Browser Operating System Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Netscape Navigator 4 76 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Window
396. server client applications intended as a secure replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools SSH can also provide remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet When a client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol the switch uses a public key that the client must match along with a local user name and password for access authentication SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and SSH enabled management station clients and ensures that data traveling over the network arrives unaltered This section describes the commands used to configure the SSH server However note that you also need to install a SSH client on the management station when using this protocol to configure the switch Note The switch supports both SSH Version 1 5 and 2 0 Table 4 14 re Shell Commands Command Function Mode Page ip ssh server Enables the SSH server on the switch GC 4 36 ip ssh timeout Specifies the authentication timeout for the SSH server GC 4 37 ip ssh Specifies the number of retries allowed by a client GC 4 37 authentication retries ip ssh server key size Sets the SSH server key size GC 4 38 copy tftp public key Copies the user s public key from a TFTP server to the switch PE 4 63 delete public key Deletes the public key for the specified user PE 4 38 ip ssh crypto host key Generates the host key PE 4 39 generate ip ssh crypto zeroize Clear
397. settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor admin key 120 Console config if 4 143 4 Command Line Interface lacp admin key Port Channel This command configures a port channel s LACP administration key string Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp admin key key no lacp admin key key The port channel admin key is used to identify a specific link aggregation group LAG during local LACP setup on this switch Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Port Channel Command Usage e Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if 1 the LACP system priority matches 2 the LACP port admin key matches and 3 the LACP port channel key matches if configured e Ifthe port channel admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed i e it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group Note that when the LAG is no longer used the port channel admin key is reset to 0 Example Console config interface port channel 1 Console config if lacp admin key 3 Console config if lacp p
398. show access list This command shows all ACLs and associated rules as well as all the user defined masks Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Once the ACL is bound to an interface i e the ACL is active the order in which the rules are displayed is determined by the associated mask Example Console show access list IP standard access list david permit host 10 1 1 21 permit 168 92 0 0 0 0 15 255 IP extended access list bob permit 10 7 1 1 0 0 0 255 any permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any destination port 80 80 permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any protocol tcp control code 2 2 MAC access list jerry permit any host 00 30 29 94 34 de ethertype 800 800 IP extended access list A6 deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 permit any any IP ingress mask ACL mask protocol any any control flag 2 Console show access group This command shows the port assignments of ACLs Command Mode Privileged Executive Example Console show access group Interface ethernet 1 25 IP standard access list david MAC access list jerry Console 4 111 4 Command Line Interface SNMP Commands Controls access to this switch from management stations using the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP as well as the error types sent to trap managers Table 4 38 SNMP Commands Command Function Mode Page snmp server community Sets up the community access string to permit access t
399. show dot1x Shows all dot1x related information PE 4 83 authentication dot1x default This command sets the default authentication server type Use the no form to restore the default Syntax authentication dot1x default radius no authentication dot1x Default Setting RADIUS Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config authentication dotlx default radius Console config 4 78 Authentication Commands 4 dot1x default This command sets all configurable dot1x global and port settings to their default values Syntax dot1x default Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dot1lx default Console config dot1x max req This command sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Use the no form to restore the default Syntax dot1x max req count no dot1x max req count The maximum number of requests Range 1 10 Default 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dot1lx max req 2 Console config 4 79 4 Command Line Interface dot1x port control This command sets the dot1x mode on a port interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax dot1x port control auto force authorized force unauthorized no dot1x port control e auto Requires a dot1x aware connected clien
400. shows that the entries in the mask override the precedence in which the rules are entered into the ACL In the following example packets with the source address 10 1 1 1 are dropped because the deny 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 rule has the higher precedence according the mask host any entry Console config access list ip standard A2 Console config std acl permit 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 Console config std acl deny 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 Console config std acl exit Console config access list ip mask precedence in Console config ip mask acl mask host any Console config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any Console config ip mask acl 4 94 Access Control List Commands 4 This shows how to create a standard ACL with an ingress mask to deny access to the IP host 171 69 198 102 and permit access to any others Console config access list ip standard A2 Console config std acl permit any Console config std acl deny host 171 69 198 102 Console config std acl end Console show access list IP standard access list A2 deny host 171 69 198 102 permit any Console configure Console config access list ip mask precedence in Console config ip mask acl mask host any Console config ip mask acl exit Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if ip access group A2 in Console config if end Console show access list IP standard access list A2 deny host 171 69 19
401. sk precedence in Console config mac mask acl mask pktformat ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid Console config mac mask acl exit Console config interface ethernet 1 12 Console config if mac access group M4 in Console config if end Console show access list MAC access list M4 deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 permit any any MAC ingress mask ACL mask pktformat host any vid Console This example creates an Egress MAC ACL Console config access list mac M5 Console config mac acl deny tagged 802 3 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any Console config mac acl deny tagged eth2 00 11 11 11 11 11 ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid 3 ethertype 0806 Console config mac acl end Console show access list MAC access list M5 deny tagged 802 3 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 ethertype 0806 Console configure Console config access list mac mask precedence out Console config mac mask acl mask pktformat ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid Console config mac mask acl exit Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if mac access group M5 out Console config if end Console show access list MAC access list M5 deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 ethertype 0806 deny tagged 802 3 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any MAC ingress mask ACL mask pktformat host any vid ethertype Console 4 106 Access Control List Commands 4 show access list mac m
402. splay The web agent displays an image of the switch s ports The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports including Active i e up or down Duplex i e half or full duplex or Flow Control i e with or without flow control Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Configuration page as described on page 3 67 Mode Active he ae ee a al F Link Up J Link Down cou Figure 3 2 Front Panel Indicators 3 Configuring the Switch Main Menu Using the onboard web agent you can define system parameters manage and control the switch and all its ports or monitor network conditions The following table briefly describes the selections available from this program Table 3 2 Switch Main Menu security breach and maximum allowed MAC addresses Menu Description Page System 3 9 System Information Provides basic system description including contact information 3 9 Switch Information Shows the number of ports hardware firmware version 3 10 numbers and power status Bridge Extension Shows the bridge extension parameters 3 12 IP Configuration Sets the IP address for management access 3 13 File 3 16 Firmware Manages code image files 3 16 Configuration Manages switch configuration files 3 17 Log 3 19 Logs Sends error messages to a logging process 3 22 System Logs Stores and displays error messages 3
403. ss Note that this does not include multicast packets Multicast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to this multicast address CRC Alignment Errors The number of CRC alignment errors FCS or alignment errors Undersize Frames The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Oversize Frames The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Fragments The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error 64 Bytes Frames The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 65 127 Byte Frames 128 255 Byte Frames 256 511 Byte Frames 512 1023 Byte Frames 1024 1518 Byte Frames 1519 1536 Byte Frames The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 3 86 Port Configuration 3 Web Click Port Port Statistics Select the required interface and click Query You can also use the Refresh button at the
404. ss MAC ACLs If these rules are included in ACL and you attempt to bind the ACL to an interface for egress checking the bind operation will fail The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows User defined rules in the Egress MAC ACL for egress ports User defined rules in the Egress IP ACL for egress ports User defined rules in the Ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports User defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports If no explicit rule is matched the implicit default is permit all NOOR WDM 3 52 Access Control Lists 3 Setting the ACL Name and Type Use the ACL Configuration page to designate the name and type of an ACL Command Attributes Name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e Type There are three filtering modes Standard IP ACL mode that filters packets based on the source IP address Extended IP ACL mode that filters packets based on source or destination IP address as well as protocol type and protocol port number If the TCP protocol is specified then you can also filter packets based on the TCP control code MAC MAC ACL mode that filters packets based on the source or destination MAC address and the Ethernet frame type RFC 1060 Web Click Security ACL Configuration Enter a
405. ss Vlan Type Eth 1 1 00 E0 29 94 34 DE 1 Permanent Eth 1 1 00 20 9C 23 CD 60 2 Learned Console 3 90 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 Changing the Aging Time You can set the aging time for entries in the dynamic address table Command Attributes Aging Status Enables or disables the aging time Aging Time The time after which a learned entry is discarded Range 10 1000000 seconds Default 300 seconds Web Click Address Table Address Aging Specify the new aging time click Apply Address Aging Aging Status Enabled Aging Time 10 1000000 300 seconds Figure 3 53 Address Aging CLI This example sets the aging time to 400 seconds Console config mac address table aging time 400 4 152 Console config Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration The Spanning Tree Algorithm STA can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STA compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions e STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D e RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w e MSTP
406. standard extended acl_name standard Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source IP address extended Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source or destination IP address and other more specific criteria acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e An egress ACL must contain all deny rules e When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list To create an ACL you must add at least one rule to the list To remove a rule use the no permit or no deny command followed by the exact text of a previously configured rule e An ACL can contain up to 32 rules Example Console config access list ip standard david Console config std acl Related Commands permit deny 4 89 ip access group 4 97 show ip access list 4 92 4 88 Access Control List Commands 4 permit deny Standard ACL This command adds a rule to a Standard IP ACL The rule sets a filter condition for packets emanating from the specified source Use the no form to remove a rule Syntax no permit deny any source bitmask host source any Any source IP address source Source IP address bitmask Decimal number representing the address bits to match host Keyword followed by
407. strative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner 3 73 3 Configuring the Switch Web Click Port LACP Aggregation Port Set the System Priority Admin Key and Port Priority for the Port Actor You can optionally configure these settings for the Port Partner Be aware that these settings only affect the administrative state of the partner and will not take effect until the next time an aggregate link is formed with this device After you have completed setting the port LACP parameters click Apply Aggregation Port Set Port Actor Port System Priority Admin Key Port Priority 0 65535 065535 065535 1 B fie pzs 2 B feo pores 3 b ha pores albe ha fese sb ha fpeves s b ha pees zb ha zes selb h pores 9 B fa pe H Figure 3 43 LACP Aggregation Port 3 74 Port Configuration 3 CLI The following example configures LACP parameters for ports 1 6 Ports 1 4 are used as active members of the LAG ports 5 and 6 are set to backup mode Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 125 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 4 142 Console config if lacp actor admin key 120 4 143 Console config if lacp actor port priority 128 4 144 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 6 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 Console
408. sure that multicast traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the switch Command Attributes Interface Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list VLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router Port or Trunk Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router Web Click IGMP Snooping Static Multicast Router Port Configuration Specify the interfaces attached to a multicast router indicate the VLAN which will forward all the corresponding multicast traffic and then click Add After you have finished adding interfaces to the list click Apply Static Multicast Router Port Configuration Current New Vlant Uniti Portl1 Interface Port lt lt Add VLAN ID 1 Remove Port 1 amp Trunk Figure 3 85 Static Multicast Router Port Configuration CLI This example configures port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1 11 4 211 Console config exit Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 4 212 VLAN M cast Router Port Type 1 Eth 1 11 Static Console 3 143 3 Configuring the Switch Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services You can display the port members associated with a specified VLAN and multicast service Command Attribute e VLAN ID Selects the VLAN for which to display port members e Multicast IP Address
409. sword thresh 4 15 exec timeout This command sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected Use the no form to restore the default Syntax exec timeout seconds no exec timeout seconds Integer that specifies the number of seconds Range 0 65535 seconds 0 no timeout Default Setting CLI No timeout Telnet 10 minutes Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e If user input is detected within the timeout interval the session is kept open otherwise the session is terminated e This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections e The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled e Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting Example To set the timeout to two minutes enter this command Console config line exec timeout 120 Console config line 4 14 Line Commands 4 password thresh This command sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts Use the no form to remove the threshold value Syntax password thresh threshold no password thresh threshold The number of allowed password attempts Range 1 120 0 no threshold Default Setting The default value is three attempts Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage When the logon attempt threshold is reached the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time before allowing the next logon attempt
410. t 5 Mode Sets the authentication mode to one of the following options Auto Requires a dot1x aware client to be authorized by the authentication server Clients that are not dot1x aware will be denied access Force Authorized Forces the port to grant access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise Force Unauthorized Forces the port to deny access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise 3 47 3 Configuring the Switch Authorized Yes Connected client is authorized No Connected client is not authorized Blank Displays nothing when dot1x is disabled on a port e Supplicant Indicates the MAC address of a connected client Trunk Indicates if the port is configured as a trunk port Web Click Security 802 1x Port Configuration Select the authentication mode from the drop down box and click Apply 802 1X Port Configuration Max conut Port Status Operation Mode 1 20 Mode Authorized Supplicant Trunk 1 Enabled Single Host 7 5 Force Authorized x Yes 00 00 00 00 00 00 2 Enabled MultitHost 10 Force Authorized gt 00 00 00 00 00 00 3 Enabled Single Host 5 Force Authorized x 00 00 00 00 00 00 4 Enabled Single Host 5 Force Authorized 00 00 00 00 00 00 5 Enabled Single Host 5 Force Authorized x 00 00 00 00 00 00 zi Figure 3 28 802 1x Port Configuration CLI This example sets the authentication mo
411. t Add Eze Domain Name Remove Name Server List Current New 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 Name Server rey Figure 3 88 DNS General Configuration CLI This example sets a default domain name and a domain list However remember that if a domain list is specified the default domain name is not used Console config ip domain name sample com 4 118 Console config ip domain list sample com uk 4 119 Console config ip domain list sample com jp Console config ip name server 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 4 120 Console config ip domain lookup 4 121 Console config end Console show dns 4 123 Domain Lookup Status DNS enabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List sample com uk sample com jp Name Server List 192 166 14 55 101 055 Console 3 147 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring Static DNS Host to Address Entries You can manually configure static entries in the DNS table that are used to map domain names to IP addresses Command Usage e Static entries may be used for local devices connected directly to the attached network or for commonly used resources located elsewhere on the network e Servers or other network devices may support one or more connections via multiple IP addresses If more than one IP address is associated with a host name in the static table or via information returned from a name server a DNS client can try each address in succession unti
412. t offers a variety of management options including SNMP RMON and a Web based interface A PC may also be connected directly to the switch for configuration and monitoring via a command line interface CLI Note The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default To change this address see Setting an IP Address on page 2 4 The switch s HTTP Web agent allows you to configure switch parameters monitor port connections and display statistics using a standard Web browser such as Netscape Navigator version 6 2 and higher or Microsoft IE version 5 0 and higher The switch s Web management interface can be accessed from any computer attached to the network The CLI program can be accessed by a direct connection to the RS 232 serial console port on the switch or remotely by a Telnet connection over the network The switch s management agent also supports SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol This SNMP agent permits the switch to be managed from any system in the network using network management software such as HP OpenView The switch s Web interface CLI configuration program and SNMP agent allow you to perform the following management functions e Set user names and passwords Set an IP interface for a management VLAN Configure SNMP parameters e Enable disable any port Set the speed duplex mode for any port Configure the bandwidth of any port by limiting input or output rates Control port a
413. t the address type Any Host or IP If you select Host enter a specific address If you select IP enter a subnet address and the mask for an address range Set any other required criteria such as service type protocol type or TCP control code Then click Add Extend ACL a Name mike 4 Sre Sre SrePort Dst DstPort Control Control Action Address TOS Precedence DSCP Protocol pon Bittask Port BitMask Code Bitmas Remove Permit 110 7 1 0 Any Any Any 6 Any Any Any Any Any Any Remove Perma 192 16 10 25 Any Any Any 6 Any Any 80 65535 Any Any Remove DSCP 064 BaMask 65536 Dst Port 0 65535 Dst Port BiaMask 65535 Control Code 0 63 a Control BeMask 0 63 Figure 3 33 ACL Configuration Extended IP CLI This example adds three rules 1 Accept any incoming packets if the source address is in subnet 10 7 1 x For example if the rule is matched i e the rule 10 7 1 0 amp 255 255 255 0 equals the masked address 10 7 1 2 amp 255 255 255 0 the packet passes through 2 Allow TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 to any destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 i e HTTP 3 Permit all TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 with the TCP control code set to SYN Console config ext acl permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any 4 90 Console config ext acl permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any destination port 80 Console
414. t to be authorized by the RADIUS server Clients that are not dot1x aware will be denied access force authorized Configures the port to grant access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise force unauthorized Configures the port to deny access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise Default force authorized Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1lx port control auto Console config if dot1x operation mode This command allows single or multiple hosts clients to connect to an 802 1X authorized port Use the no form with no keywords to restore the default to single host Use the no form with the multi host max count keywords to restore the default maximum count Syntax dot1x operation mode single host multi host max count counf no dot1x operation mode multi host max count e single host Allows only a single host to connect to this port multi host Allows multiple host to connect to this port max count Keyword for the maximum number of hosts count The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port Range 1 20 Default 5 Default Single host Command Mode Interface Configuration 4 80 Authentication Commands 4 Command Usage The max count parameter specified by this command is only effective if the dot1x mode is set to auto by the dot1x port control command page
415. t type one of the following commands Use the exit or end command to return to the Privileged Exec mode Table 4 2 Configuration Command Modes Mode Command Prompt Page Line line console vty Console config line 4 11 Access access list ip standard Console config std acl 4 86 Control List access list ip extended Console config ext acl access list ip mask precedence Console config ip mask acl access list mac Console config mac acl access list mac mask precedence Console config mac mask acl Interface interface ethernet port port channel ia vlan id Console config if 4 125 VLAN vlan database Console config vlan 4 172 MSTP spanning tree mst configuration Console config mstp 4 159 For example you can use the following commands to enter interface configuration mode and then return to Privileged Exec mode Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if exit Console config Entering Commands 4 Command Line Processing Commands are not case sensitive You can abbreviate commands and parameters as long as they contain enough letters to differentiate them from any other currently available commands or parameters You can use the Tab key to complete partial commands or enter a partial command followed by the character to display a list of possible matches You can also use the following editing keystrokes for command line processing
416. t1x max req 4 79 dot1x port control 4 80 dot1x operation mode 4 80 dot1x re authenticate 4 81 dot1x re authentication 4 81 dot1x timeout quiet period 4 82 dot1x timeout re authperiod 4 82 dot1x timeout tx period 4 83 show dot1x 4 83 Access Control List Commands 4 86 IP ACLs 4 87 access list ip 4 88 permit deny Standard ACL 4 89 permit deny Extended ACL 4 90 show ip access list 4 92 access list ip mask precedence 4 92 mask IP ACL 4 93 show access list ip mask precedence 4 96 ip access group 4 97 show ip access group 4 97 map access list ip 4 98 show map access list ip 4 99 match access list ip 4 99 show marking 4 100 MAC ACLs 4 101 access list mac 4 101 permit deny MAC ACL 4 102 show mac access list 4 103 access list mac mask precedence 4 104 mask MAC ACL 4 105 show access list mac mask precedence 4 107 mac access group 4 107 show mac access group 4 108 map access list mac 4 108 show map access list mac 4 109 match access list mac 4 110 vii Contents viii ACL Information show access list show access group SNMP Commands snmp server community snmp server contact snmp server location snmp server host snmp server enable traps show snmp DNS Commands ip host clear host ip domain name ip domain list ip name server ip domain lookup show hosts show dns show dns cache clear dns cache Interface Commands interface description speed duplex negotiation capabilities flowcontrol combo forced mode shutdown
417. tarted Console disconnect 0 4 18 Console Configuring Port Security Port security is a feature that allows you to configure a switch port with one or more device MAC addresses that are authorized to access the network through that port When port security is enabled on a port the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted as authorized to access the network through that port If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message To use port security specify a maximum number of addresses to allow on the port and then let the switch dynamically learn the lt source MAC address VLAN gt pair for frames received on the port Note that you can also manually add secure addresses to the port using the Static Address Table page 3 88 When the port has reached the maximum number of MAC addresses the selected port will stop learning The MAC addresses already in the address table will be retained and will not age out Any other device that attempts to use the port will be prevented from accessing the switch Command Usage e A secure port has the following restrictions It cannot use port monitoring It ca
418. tats Octets input 868453 Octets output 3492122 Unicast input 7315 Unitcast output 6658 Discard input 0 Discard output 0 Error input 0 Error output 0 Unknown protos input 0 QLen output 0 Extended iftable stats Multi cast input 0 Multi cast output 17027 Broadcast input 231 Broadcast output 7 Ether like stats Alignment errors 0 FCS errors 0 Single Collision frames 0 Multiple collision frames 0 SQE Test errors 0 Deferred transmissions 0 Late collisions 0 Excessive collisions 0 Internal mac transmit errors 0 Internal mac receive errors 0 Frame too longs 0 Carrier sense errors 0 Symbol errors 0 RMON stats Drop events 0 Octets 4422579 Packets 31552 Broadcast pkts 238 Multi cast pkts 17033 Undersize pkts 0 Oversize pkts 0 Fragments 0 Jabbers 0 CRC align errors 0 Collisions 0 Packet size lt 64 octets 25568 Packet size 65 to 127 octets 1616 Packet size 128 to 255 octets 1249 Packet size 256 to 511 octets 1449 Packet size 512 to 1023 octets 802 Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets 871 Console Address Table Settings Switches store the addresses for all known devices This information is used to pass traffic directly between the inbound and outbound ports All the addresses learned by monitoring traffic are stored in the dynamic address table You can also manually configure static addresses that are bound to a specific port Setting Static Addresses A static address can
419. tch will work through the domain list appending each domain name in the list to the host name and checking with the specified name servers for a match e When more than one name server is specified the servers are queried in the specified sequence until a response is received or the end of the list is reached with no response e Note that if all name servers are deleted DNS will automatically be disabled Command Attributes Domain Lookup Status Enables DNS host name to address translation Default Domain Name Defines the default domain name appended to incomplete host names Range 1 64 alphanumeric characters Domain Name List Defines define a list of domain names that can be appended to incomplete host names Range 1 64 alphanumeric characters 1 5 names e Name Server List Specifies the address of one or more domain name servers to use for name to address resolution Range 1 6 IP addresses Do not include the initial dot that separates the host name from the domain name 3 146 Configuring Domain Name Service 3 Web Select DNS General Configuration Set the default domain name or list of domain names specify one or more name servers to use to use for address resolution enable domain lookup status and click Apply General Configuration Domain Lookup Status V Enable Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List Current New sample com uk sample com jp lt l
420. te test2 cfg Console Related Commands dir 4 66 delete public key 4 38 dir This command displays a list of files in flash memory Syntax dir boot rom config opcode filename The type of file or image to display includes boot rom Boot ROM or diagnostic image file config Switch configuration file opcode Run time operation code image file filename Name of the file or image If this file exists but contains errors information on this file cannot be shown Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e If you enter the command dir without any parameters the system displays all files e File information is shown below Table 4 25 File Directory Information Column Heading Description file name The name of the file file type File types Boot Rom Operation Code and Config file startup Shows if this file is used when the system is started size The length of the file in bytes 4 66 Flash File Commands 4 Example The following example shows how to display all file information Console dir file name file type startup size byte Unit1 Diag bix Boot Rom image Y 818812 V11022 Operation Code Ne 2402452 Factory Default _Config cfg Config File N 374 startup Config File Y 7606 Total free space 3932160 Console whichboot This command displays which files were booted when the system powered up Default Setting N
421. tected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space Rece ived Unknown Packets The number of packets received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol Rece ived Errors The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol Transmit Octets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters Transmit Unicast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Multicast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Broadcast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent 3 84 Port Configuration 3 Table 3 9 Port Statistics Parameter Description Transmit Discarded Packets The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been de
422. tected to prevent their being transmitted One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space Transmit Errors The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors Etherlike Statistics Alignment Errors The number of alignment errors missynchronized data packets Late Collisions The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet FCS Errors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check This count does not include frames received with frame too long or frame too short error Excessive Collisions A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in full duplex mode Single Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Internal MAC Transmit Errors A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error Multiple Collision Frames A count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision Carrier Sense Errors The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never as
423. tering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be discarded Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames such as GVRP or STA However they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames such as GMRP 4 177 4 Command Line Interface Example The following example shows how to set the interface to port 1 and then enable ingress filtering Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport ingress filtering Console config if switchport native vlan This command configures the PVID i e default VLAN ID for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport native vlan vlan id no switchport native vlan vlan id Default VLAN ID for a port Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes Default Setting VLAN 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Ifan interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member For all other VLANs an interface must first be configured as an untagged member before you can assign its PVID to that group e If acceptable frame types is set to all or switchport mode is set to hybrid the PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port Example The following example shows how to set the PVID for port 1 to VLAN 3 Console c
424. th exit the configuration program Example This example shows how to quit a CLI session Console quit Press ENTER to start session User Access Verification Username System Management Commands These commands are used to control system logs passwords user names browser configuration options and display or configure a variety of other system information Table 4 7 System Management Commands Command Group Function Page Device Designation Configures information that uniquely identifies this switch 4 25 User Access Configures the basic user names and passwords for management access 4 26 IP Filter Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access 4 28 Web Server Enables management access via a Web browser 4 30 Telnet Server Enables management access via Telnet 4 33 Secure Shell Provides secure replacement for Telnet 4 34 Event Logging Controls logging of error messages 4 43 SMTP Alerts Configures SMTP email alerts 4 48 Time System Clock Sets the system clock automatically via NTP SNTP server or manually 4 52 System Status Displays system configuration active managers and version information 4 57 Frame Size Enables support for jumbo frames 4 62 4 24 System Management Commands 4 Device Designation Commands Table 4 8 Device Designation Commands Command Function Mode Page prompt Customizes the prompt used in PE
425. the CLI at the Privileged Exec level using the default user name and password perform these steps 1 To initiate your console connection press lt Enter gt The User Access Verification procedure starts At the Username prompt enter admin 3 At the Password prompt also enter admin The password characters are not displayed on the console screen 4 The session is opened and the CLI displays the Console prompt indicating you have access at the Privileged Exec level 2 Initial Configuration Setting Passwords Note If this is your first time to log into the CLI program you should define new passwords for both default user names using the username command record them and put them in a safe place Passwords can consist of up to 8 alphanumeric characters and are case sensitive To prevent unauthorized access to the switch set the passwords as follows 1 Open the console interface with the default user name and password admin to access the Privileged Exec level 2 Type configure and press lt Enter gt 3 Type username guest password 0 password for the Normal Exec level where password is your new password Press lt Enter gt 4 Type username admin password 0 password for the Privileged Exec level where password is your new password Press lt Enter gt Username admin Password CLI session with the 44 10 100 1000 ports 4 Gigabit Combo ports L2 L4 man
426. the downlinks Console config pvlan Console config pvlan up link ethernet 1 24 down link ethernet 1 1 4 Console config 4 182 VLAN Commands 4 show pvlan This command displays the configured private VLAN Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show pvlan Private VLAN status Enabled Up link port Ethernet 1 24 Down link port Ethernet 1 1 Ethernet 1 2 Ethernet 1 3 Ethernet 1 4 Console Configuring Protocol based VLANs The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped into a common VLAN This may require non standard devices to pass traffic between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a specific protocol This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits of VLANs including security and easy accessibility To avoid these problems you can configure this switch with protocol based VLANs that divide the physical network into logical VLAN groups for each required protocol When a frame is received at a port its VLAN membership can then be determined based on the protocol type in use by the inbound packets Table 4 57 Protocol VLAN Commands Command Function Mode Page protocol vlan protocol group Create a protocol group specifying the supported protocols GC 4 184 protocol vlan protocol group Maps a protocol group to a VLAN IC 4 184 show protocol vlan Shows the configuration of protocol g
427. then 802 1p priority Example Console config interface ethernet 1 12 Console config if match access list ip bill set dscp 0 Console config if Related Commands show marking 4 100 show marking This command displays the current configuration for packet marking Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show marking Interface ethernet 1 12 match access list IP bill set DSCP 0 match access list MAC a set priority 0 Console Related Commands match access list ip 4 99 4 100 Access Control List Commands 4 MAC ACLs Table 4 35 MAC ACL Commands Command Function Mode Page access list mac Creates a MAC ACL and enters configuration mode GC 4 101 permit deny Filters packets matching a specified source and MAC ACL 4 102 destination address packet format and Ethernet type show mac access list Displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs PE 4 103 access list mac Changes to the mode for configuring access control masks GC 4 104 mask precedence mask Sets a precedence mask for the ACL rules MAC Mask 4 105 show access list mac Shows the ingress or egress rule masks for MAC ACLs PE 4 107 mask precedence mac access group Adds a port to a MAC ACL IC 4 107 show mac access group Shows port assignments for MAC ACLs PE 4 108 map access list mac Sets the CoS value and corresponding output queue for IC 4 108 packets matching an ACL rule show map access
428. tic Multicast Routing Configures static multicast router ports 4 211 IGMP Snooping Commands Table 4 66 IGMP Snooping Commands Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping Enables IGMP snooping GC 4 205 ip igmp snooping vlan static Adds an interface as a member of a multicast group GC 4 205 ip igmp snooping version Configures the IGMP version for snooping GC 4 206 show ip igmp snooping Shows the IGMP snooping and query configuration PE 4 206 show ma address table Shows the IGMP snooping MAC multicast list PE 4 207 multicas 4 204 Multicast Filtering Commands 4 ip igmp snooping This command enables IGMP snooping on this switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no ip igmp snooping Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following example enables IGMP snooping Console config ip igmp snooping Console config ip igmp snooping vlan static This command adds a port to a multicast group Use the no form to remove the port Syntax no ip igmp snooping vlan vian id static ijp address interface e vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 jp address IP address for multicast group e interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following shows how to statically configure a multicast group on a port Co
429. ticast service This procedure is called multicast filtering The purpose of IP multicast filtering is to optimize a switched network s performance so multicast packets will only be forwarded to those ports containing multicast group hosts or multicast routers switches instead of flooding traffic to all ports in the subnet VLAN Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Query IGMP Snooping and Query If multicast routing is not supported on other switches in your network you can use IGMP Snooping and Query page 3 140 to monitor IGMP service requests passing between multicast clients and servers and dynamically configure the switch ports which need to forward multicast traffic Static IGMP Router Interface If IGMP snooping cannot locate the IGMP querier you can manually designate a known IGMP querier i e a multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface on your switch page 3 143 This interface will then join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router switch to ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all appropriate interfaces within the switch Static IGMP Host Interface For multicast applications that you need to control more carefully you can manually assign a multicast service to specific interfaces on the switch page 3 145 3 139 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters You can configure the switch to forward multicast traffic intelligently
430. time servers NTP or SNTP or by using information broadcast by local time servers Table 4 21 Time Commands Command Function Mode Page sntp client Accepts time from specified time servers GC 4 52 sntp server Specifies one or more time servers GC 4 53 sntp poll Sets the interval at which the client polls for time GC 4 54 show sntp Shows current SNTP configuration settings NE PE 4 54 clock timezone Sets the time zone for the switch s internal clock GC 4 55 calendar set Sets the system date and time PE 4 55 show calendar Displays the current date and time setting NE PE 4 56 sntp client This command enables SNTP client requests for time synchronization from NTP or SNTP time servers specified with the sntp servers command Use the no form to disable SNTP client requests Syntax no sntp client Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and times for log events Without SNTP the switch only records the time starting from the factory default set at the last bootup i e 00 00 00 Jan 1 2001 This command enables client time requests to time servers specified via the sntp servers command It issues time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command 4 52 System Management Commands 4 Example Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 Cons
431. tion message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section mean interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Default 20 e Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 e Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 3 96 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3 Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds this device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result e Default 15 e Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1 e Maximum 30 Configuration Settings for RSTP The following attributes apply to both RSTP and MSTP e Path Cost Method The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned to each interface e Long Specifies 32 bit based values that range from 1 200 000 000 This is the default e Short Specifies 16 bit based values that range from 1 65535 Transmission Limit The maximum transmission rate for
432. tled above a critical threshold Port Mirroring Multiple source ports one destination port Rate Limits Input Limit Output limit Range configured per port Port Trunking Static trunks Cisco EtherChannel compliant Dynamic trunks Link Aggregation Control Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 1s VLAN Support Up to 255 groups port based protocol based or tagged 802 1Q GVRP for automatic VLAN learning private VLANs Class of Service Supports eight levels of priority and Weighted Round Robin Queueing which can be configured by VLAN tag or port Layer 3 4 priority mapping IP Precedence IP DSCP Multicast Filtering IGMP Snooping Layer 2 A Software Specifications Additional Features BOOTP client SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol RMON Remote Monitoring groups 1 2 3 9 SMTP Email Alerts Management Features In Band Management Telnet Web based HTTP or HTTPS SNMP manager or Secure Shell Out of Band Management RS 232 DB 9 console port Software Loading TFTP in band or XModem out of band SNMP Management access via MIB database Trap management to specified hosts RMON Groups 1 2 3 9 Statistics History Alarm Event Standards IEEE 802 3 Ethernet IEEE 802 3u Fast Ethernet IEEE 802 3x Full duplex flow control ISO I
433. to restore the default Syntax spanning tree priority priority no spanning tree priority priority Priority of the bridge Range 0 65535 Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Default Setting 32768 4 157 4 Command Line Interface Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Example Console config spanning tree priority 45056 Console config spanning tree pathcost method This command configures the path cost method used for Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree pathcost method long short no spanning tree pathcost method long Specifies 32 bit based values that range from 1 200 000 000 short Specifies 16 bit based values that range from 1 65535 Default Setting Long method Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media
434. tocol groups are configured Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following creates protocol group 1 and specifies Ethernet frames with IP and ARP protocol types Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame type ethernet protocol type ip Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame type ethernet protocol type arp Console config protocol vlan protocol group Configuring Interfaces This command maps a protocol group to a VLAN for the current interface Use the no form to remove the protocol mapping for this interface Syntax protocol vian protocol group group id vlan vian id no protocol vian protocol group group id vlan group id Group identifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 e vian id VLAN to which matching protocol traffic is forwarded Range 1 4094 Default Setting No protocol groups are mapped for any interface Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 4 184 VLAN Commands 4 Command Usage When creating a protocol based VLAN only assign interfaces via this command If you assign interfaces using any of the other VLAN commands such as vlan on page 4 174 these interfaces will admit traffic of any protocol type into the associated VLAN When a frame enters a port that has been assigned to a protocol VLAN it is processed in the following manner If the frame is tagged it will be processed according to the standa
435. tore the default Syntax spanning tree link type auto point to point shared no spanning tree link type auto Automatically derived from the duplex mode setting point to point Point to point link e shared Shared medium Default Setting auto Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Specify a point to point link if the interface can only be connected to exactly one other bridge or a shared link if it can be connected to two or more bridges e When automatic detection is selected the switch derives the link type from the duplex mode A full duplex interface is considered a point to point link while a half duplex interface is assumed to be on a shared link RSTP only works on point to point links between two bridges If you designate a port as a shared link RSTP is forbidden Since MSTP is an extension of RSTP this same restriction applies Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree link type point to point spanning tree mst cost This command configures the path cost on a spanning instance in the Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mst instance_id cost cost no spanning tree mst instance_id cost e instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 1 4094 no leading zeroes e cost Path cost for an interface Range 1 200 000 000 The recommended ra
436. ts the CoS value and corresponding output queue for IC 4 98 packets matching an ACL rule map access list mac Sets the CoS value and corresponding output queue for IC 4 108 packets matching an ACL rule show map ip port Shows the IP port map PE 4 201 show map ip precedence Shows the IP precedence map PE 4 202 show map ip dscp Shows the IP DSCP map PE 4 203 show map access list ip Shows CoS value mapped to an access list for an interface PE 4 99 show map access list mac Shows CoS value mapped to an access for an interface PE 4 109 map ip port Global Configuration This command enables IP port mapping i e class of service mapping for TCP UDP sockets Use the no form to disable IP port mapping Syntax no map ip port Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority 4 197 4 Command Line Interface Example The following example shows how to enable TCP UDP port mapping globally Console config map ip port Console config map ip port Interface Configuration This command enables IP port mapping i e TCP UDP port priority Use the no form to remove a specific setting Syntax map ip port port number cos cos value no map ip port port number port number 16 bit TCP UDP port number Range 1 65535 cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7
437. turns the VLAN to the default state i e active e You can configure up to 255 VLANs on the switch Example The following example adds a VLAN using VLAN ID 105 and name RD5 The VLAN is activated by default Console config vlan database Console config vlan vlan 105 name RD5 media ethernet Console config vlan Related Commands show vlan 4 181 4 174 VLAN Commands 4 Configuring VLAN Interfaces Table 4 54 Configuring VLAN Interfaces Command Function Mode Page interface vlan Enters interface configuration mode for a specified VLAN IC 4 175 switchport mode Configures VLAN membership mode for an interface IC 4 176 switchport Configures frame types to be accepted by an interface IC 4 176 acceptable frame types switchport ingress filtering Enables ingress filtering on an interface IC 4 177 switchport native vlan Configures the PVID native VLAN of an interface IC 4 178 switchport allowed vlan Configures the VLANs associated with an interface IC 4 179 switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface IC 4 188 switchport forbidden vlan Configures forbidden VLANs for an interface IC 4 180 switchport priority default Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames IC 4 193 interface vlan This command enters interface configuration mode for VLANs which is used to configure VLAN parameters for a physical interface Syntax interface vlan vlan id vla
438. ty ACL CoS Priority Enable mapping for any port select an ACL from the scroll down list then click Apply ACL CoS Priority ACL CoS Priority Configure CoS iia 0 7 Mamea e Pot Name Type ACL CoS Priority Mapping Port Name Type CoS Priority 1 bill IP 0 Remove Figure 3 81 ACL CoS Priority CLI This example assigns a CoS value of zero to packets matching rules within the specified ACL on port 24 Console config interface ethernet 1 24 4 125 Console config if map access list ip bill cos 0 4 98 Console config if Changing Priorities Based on ACL Rules You can change traffic priorities for frames matching the defined ACL rule This feature is commonly referred to as ACL packet marking This switch can change the IEEE 802 1p priority IP Precedence or DSCP Priority of IP frames or change the IEEE 802 1p priority of Layer 2 frames Command Usage You must configure an ACL mask before you can change priorities based on a rule Traffic priorities may be included in the IEEE 802 1p priority tag This tag is also incorporated as part of the overall IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tag The 802 1p priority may be set for either Layer 2 or IP frames The IP frame header also includes priority bits in the Type of Service ToS octet The Type of Service octet may contain three bits for IP Precedence or six bits for Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP ser
439. ueing ensures the minimum delay for moving real time multimedia data across the network While multicast filtering provides support for real time network applications Some of the management features are briefly described below Configuration Backup and Restore You can save the current configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server and later download this file to restore the switch configuration settings Authentication This switch authenticates management access via the console port Telnet or web browser User names and passwords can be configured locally or can be verified via a remote authentication server i e RADIUS or TACACS Port based authentication is also supported via the IEEE 802 1x protocol This protocol uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol over LANs EAPOL to request user credentials from the 802 1x client and then verifies the client s right to access the network via an authentication server Other authentication options include HTTPS for secure management access via the web SSH for secure management access over a Telnet equivalent connection IP address filtering for SNMP web Telnet management access and MAC address filtering for port access Access Control Lists ACLs provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol TCP UDP port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type ACLs can by used to improve performance by blocking unnecessary netwo
440. ulties with GMRP or GVRP registration deregistration e Timer values are applied to GVRP for all the ports on all VLANs e Timer values must meet the following restrictions leave gt 2 x join leaveall gt leave Note Set GVRP timers on all Layer 2 devices connected in the same network to the same values Otherwise GVRP may not operate successfully Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if garp timer join 100 Console config if Related Commands show garp timer 4 190 show garp timer This command shows the GARP timers for the selected interface Syntax show garp timer interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 Default Setting Shows all GARP timers Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show garp timer ethernet 1 1 Eth 1 1 GARP timer status Join timer 20 centiseconds Leave timer 60 centiseconds Leaveall timer 1000 centiseconds Console 4 190 Priority Commands 4 Related Commands garp timer 4 189 Priority Commands The commands described in this section allow you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion This switch supports CoS with eight priority queues for each port Data packets in a port s high priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower priority
441. unked link with LACP configured ports on another device Glossary 3 Glossary Management Information Base MIB An acronym for Management Information Base It is a set of database objects that contains information about a specific device Multicast Switching A process whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for services for which no attached host has registered or forwards them to all ports contained within the designated multicast VLAN group Network Time Protocol NTP NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network The time servers operate in a hierarchical master slave configuration in order to synchronize local clocks within the subnet and to national time standards via wire or radio Out of Band Management Management of the network from a station not attached to the network Port Authentication See IEEE 802 1x Port Mirroring A method whereby data on a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for troubleshooting with a logic analyzer or RMON probe This allows data on the target port to be studied unobstructively Port Trunk Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies how to create a single high speed logical link that combines several lower speed physical links Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from uplink
442. up 01 Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console This example shows how to copy a secure site certificate from an TFTP server It then reboots the switch to activate the certificate Console copy tftp https certificate TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 19 Source certificate file name SS certificate Source private file name SS private Private password k Success Console reload System will be restarted continue lt y n gt y This example shows how to copy a public key used by SSH from an TFTP server Note that public key authentication via SSH is only supported for users configured locally on the switch Console copy tftp public key TFTP server IP address 192 168 1 19 Choose public key type 1 RSA 2 DSA lt 1 2 gt 1 Source file name steve pub Username steve TFTP Download Success Write to FLASH Programming Success Console delete This command deletes a file or image Syntax delete filename filename Name of the configuration file or image name Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 65 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage If the file type is used for system startup then this file cannot be deleted e Factory_Default_Config cfg cannot be deleted Example This example shows how to delete the test2 cfg configuration file from flash memory Console dele
443. ut Sets the interval that the command interpreter waits until user LC 4 14 input is detected password thresh Sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of LC 4 15 failed logon attempts silent time Sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible LC 4 15 after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password thresh command databits Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and LC 4 16 generated by hardware parity Defines the generation of a parity bit LC 4 17 speed Sets the terminal baud rate LC 4 17 stopbits Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte LC 4 18 disconnect Terminates a line connection PE 4 18 show line Displays a terminal line s parameters NE PE 4 19 These commands only apply to the serial port 4 11 4 Command Line Interface line This command identifies a specific line for configuration and to process subsequent line configuration commands Syntax line console vty console Console terminal line e vty Virtual terminal for remote console access i e Telnet Default Setting There is no default line Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Telnet is considered a virtual terminal connection and will be shown as Vty in screen displays such as show users However the serial communication parameters e g databits do not affe
444. vice Note that the IP frame header can include either the IP Precedence or DSCP priority type The precedence for priority mapping by this switch is IP Precedence or DSCP Priority and then 802 1p priority 3 137 3 Configuring the Switch Command Attributes e Port Port identifier e Name Name of ACL Type Type of ACL IP or MAC e Precedence IP Precedence value Range 0 7 e DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point value Range 0 63 802 1p Priority Class of Service value in the IEEE 802 1p priority tag Range 0 7 7 is the highest priority For information on configuring ACLs see page 3 52 Web Click Priority ACL Marker Select a port and an ACL rule To specify a ToS priority mark the Precedence DSCP check box select Precedence or DSCP from the scroll down box and enter a priority To specify an 802 1p priority mark the 802 1p Priority check box and enter a priority Then click Add ACL Marker ACL Marker Configure Precedence 0 7 802 1p Port Name Type nscp 0 63 Priority 0 7 Mae a r Peere r aa ACL Marker Mapping Por Name Type Precedence DSCP 20 of riority h fu fP posce o o Remove h mike MACO o 0 Remove Figure 3 82 ACL Marker CLI This example changes the DSCP priority for packets matching an IP ACL rule and the 802 1p priority for packets matching a MAC ACL rule Console config interface ethernet 1 1 4 12
445. w mac address table multicast vlan 1 4 207 VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type 1 224 1 1 12 Eth1 12 USER 1 224 1 2 3 Eth1 12 IGMP Console 3 145 3 Configuring the Switch Configuring Domain Name Service The Domain Naming System DNS service on this switch allows host names to be mapped to IP addresses using static table entries or by redirection to other name servers on the network When a client device designates this switch as a DNS server the client will attempt to resolve host names into IP addresses by forwarding DNS queries to the switch and waiting for a response You can manually configure entries in the DNS table used for mapping domain names to IP addresses configure default domain names or specify one or more name servers to use for domain name to address translation Configuring General DNS Server Parameters Command Usage To enable DNS service on this switch first configure one or more name servers and then enable domain lookup status To append domain names to incomplete host names received from a DNS client i e not formatted with dotted notation you can specify a default domain name or a list of domain names to be tried in sequential order e If there is no domain list the default domain name is used If there is a domain list the default domain name is not used e When an incomplete host name is received by the DNS server on this switch and a domain name list has been specified the swi
446. w map ip dscp This command shows the IP DSCP priority map Syntax show map ip dscp interface interface ethernet unit port unit This is device 1 port Port number port channel channel id Range 1 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 4 203 4 Command Line Interface Example Console show map ip dscp ethernet 1 1 DSCP mapping status disabled Port DSCP COS Eth 1 1 o 0 Eth 1 1 1 0 Eth 1 1 2 0 Eth 1 1 3 0 Eth 1 1 61 0 Eth 1 1 62 0 Eth 1 1 63 0 Console Related Commands map ip dscp Global Configuration 4 200 map ip dscp Interface Configuration 4 200 Multicast Filtering Commands This switch uses IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol to query for any attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service It identifies the ports containing hosts requesting a service and sends data out to those ports only It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Table 4 65 Multicast Filtering Commands Command Groups Function Page IGMP Snooping Configures multicast groups via IGMP snooping or static assignment 4 204 sets the IGMP version displays current snooping and query settings and displays the multicast service and group members IGMP Query Configures IGMP query parameters for multicast filtering at Layer 2 4 208 Sta
447. witch allows you to control the logging of error messages including the type of events that are recorded in switch memory logging to a remote System Log syslog server and displays a list of recent event messages System Log Configuration The system allows you to enable or disable event logging and specify which levels are logged to RAM or flash memory Severe error messages that are logged to flash memory are permanently stored in the switch to assist in troubleshooting network problems Up to 4096 log entries can be stored in the flash memory with the oldest entries being overwritten first when the available log memory 256 kilobytes has been exceeded The System Logs page allows you to configure and limit system messages that are logged to flash or RAM memory The default is for event levels 0 to 3 to be logged to flash and levels 0 to 7 to be logged to RAM Command Attributes e System Log Status Enables disables the logging of debug or error messages to the logging process Default Enabled Flash Level Limits log messages saved to the switch s permanent flash memory for all levels up to the specified level For example if level 3 is specified all messages from level 0 to level 3 will be logged to flash Range 0 7 Default 3 Table 3 3 Logging Levels Level Severity Name Description 7 Debug Debugging messages 6 Informational Informational messages only 5 Notice Normal but s
448. xec timeout command for vty sessions Example Console config ip ssh timeout 60 Console config Related Commands exec timeout 4 14 show ip ssh 4 40 ip ssh authentication retries Use this command to configure the number of times the SSH server attempts to reauthenticate a user Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh authentication retries count no ip ssh authentication retries count The number of authentication attempts permitted after which the interface is reset Range 1 5 Default Setting 3 Command Mode Global Configuration 4 37 4 Command Line Interface Example Console config ip ssh authentication retires 2 Console config Related Commands show ip ssh 4 40 ip ssh server key size Use this command to set the SSH server key size Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh server key size key size no ip ssh server key size key size The size of server key Range 512 896 bits Default Setting 768 bits Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch The host key is shared with the SSH client and is fixed at 1024 bits Example Console config ip ssh server key size 512 Console config delete public key Use this command to delete the specified user s public key Syntax delete public key username dsa rsa
449. xf Figure 3 63 VLAN Current Table 3 114 VLAN Configuration Command Attributes CLI VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading zeroes Type Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch Dynamic Automatically learned via GVRP Static Added as a static entry Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters Status Shows if this VLAN is enabled or disabled Active VLAN is operational Suspend VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets Ports Channel groups Shows the VLAN interface members CLI Current VLAN information can be displayed with the following command Console show vlan id 1 4 181 VLAN Type Name Status Ports Channel groups Console Static DefaultVlan Active Eth1 1 Eth1 2 Creating VLANs Use the VLAN Static List to create or remove VLAN groups To propagate information about VLAN groups used on this switch to external network devices you must specify a VLAN ID for each of these groups Command Attributes Current Lists all the current VLAN groups created for this system Up to 255 VLAN groups can be defined VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN New Allows you to specify the name and numeric identifier for a new VLAN group The VLAN name is only used for management on this system it is not added to the VLAN tag VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 no leading zeroes VLAN Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters Status We
450. y to Flash Saves the host key from RAM i e volatile memory to flash memory Otherwise the host key pair is stored to RAM by default Note that you must select this item prior to generating the host key pair e Generate This button is used to generate the host key pair Note that you must first generate the host key pair before you can enable the SSH server on the SSH Server Settings page 3 38 User Authentication 3 Web Click Security SSH Host Key Settings Select the host key type from the drop down box select the option to save the host key from memory to flash if required prior to generating the key and then click Generate SSH Host Key Settings Public Key of Host Key z RSA DSA Host Key Type Both F Save Host Key from Memory to Flash Generate Clear Figure 3 23 SSH Host Key Settings CLI This example generates a host key pair using both the RSA and DSA algorithms stores the keys to flash memory and then displays the host s public keys Console ip ssh crypto host key generate 4 39 Console ip ssh save host key 4 40 Console show public key host 4 42 Host RSA 1024 65537 127250922544926402131336514546131189679055192360076028653006761 82409690947448320102524878965977592168322225584652387791546479807396314033 86925793105105765212243052807865885485789272602937866089236841423275912127 60325919683697053439336438445223335188287173896894511729290510813919642025 190932104328579045
451. you must configure at least one snmp server host command Example Console config snmp server enable traps link up down Console config Related Commands snmp server host 4 114 show snmp This command checks the status of SNMP communications Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 4 115 4 Command Line Interface Command Usage This command provides information on the community access strings counter information for SNMP input and output protocol data units and whether or not SNMP logging has been enabled with the snmp server enable traps command Example Console show snmp System Contact Paul System Location WC 19 SNMP traps Authentication enable Link up down enable SNMP communities 1 alpha and the privilege is read write 2 private and the privilege is read write 3 public and the privilege is read only 0 SNMP packets input Bad SNMP version errors Unknown community name Illegal operation for community name supplied Encoding errors Number of requested variables Number of altered variables Get request PDUs Get next PDUs Set request PDUs 0 SNMP packets output Too big errors No such name errors Bad values errors General errors Response PDUs Trap PDUs oo0oo0oo0oo00000 oo0oo0oo0oo0oo0 SNMP logging enabled Logging to 10 1 19 23 batman version 1 Console 4 116 DNS Commands 4 DNS Commands These commands are used to configu
452. ypts the entire body of the packet Command Usage By default management access is always checked against the authentication database stored on the local switch If a remote authentication server is used you must specify the authentication sequence and the corresponding parameters for the remote authentication protocol Local and remote logon authentication control management access via the console port web browser or Telnet RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assign a specific privilege level for each user name password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server You can specify up to three authentication methods for any user to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you select 1 RADIUS 2 TACACS and 3 Local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted using the TACACS server and finally the local user name and password is checked Command Attributes Authentication Select the authentication or authentication sequence required Local User authentication is performed only locally by the switch Radius User authentication is performed using a RADIUS server only TACACS User authentication is performed using a TACACS server only authentication sequence User authentication is performed by up to three authentication methods in the indic

Accton Technology ES4548C Switch User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents